FM 3-09.15 

MCWP 3-16.5 

TACTICS, TECHNIQUES, 

AND PROCEDURES FOR 

FIELD ARTILLERY 

METEOROLOGY 

 OCTOBER 2007 

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. 
This publication is available at Army 

Knowledge Online <www.us.army.mil> 

and the General Dennis J. Reimer Training and 

Doctrine Digital Library at <www.train.army.mil>. 
*FM 3-09.15 (FM 6-15) 

MCWP 3-16.5 

Field Manual 

No. 3-09.15 

Headquarters 

Department of the Army 

 Washington, DC, 25 October 2007 

Distribution Restriction: Approved for public release, distribution is unlimited. 

*This publication supersedes FM 6-15-, 13 August 1997. 

i 

Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field 

Artillery Meteorology 

Contents 

Page 

 PREFACE ..............................................................................................................x

Chapter 1 Commander and Staff Considerations........................................................... 1-1

Section I overview ............................................................................................ 1-1

Mission ............................................................................................................... 1-1

U.S. Army MET Sections.................................................................................... 1-2

U.S. Marine Corps MET Section ........................................................................ 1-2

MET Systems ..................................................................................................... 1-2

Capabilities ......................................................................................................... 1-2

Command and Control ....................................................................................... 1-4

Section II Operational Considerations ........................................................... 1-5

Scheduling and Positioning................................................................................ 1-5

Profiler Characterization..................................................................................... 1-9

Chapter 2 Additional Sources of Meteorological Information....................................... 2-1

Allied Nations...................................................................................................... 2-1

U.S. Air Force ..................................................................................................... 2-2

U.S. Navy............................................................................................................ 2-2

Marine Corps...................................................................................................... 2-2

Numerical Weather Prediction............................................................................ 2-2

Chapter 3 Weather and Its Effects.................................................................................... 3-1
Contents 

ii FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Section I Elementary Meteorology ..................................................................3-1

Atmosphere.........................................................................................................3-1

Heat.....................................................................................................................3-2

Moisture ..............................................................................................................3-3

Atmospheric Pressure.........................................................................................3-4

Clouds .................................................................................................................3-5

Air Masses ..........................................................................................................3-9

Section II Weather As It Applies To The Artillery ........................................3-12

Field Artillery MET.............................................................................................3-12

Mesoscale Modeling .........................................................................................3-17

MET Effects On Smart Munitions......................................................................3-22

Chapter 4 Operating Principles.........................................................................................4-1

Section I MMS Sections....................................................................................4-1

Navigational Aid (NAVAID) System ....................................................................4-1

RDF Operations ..................................................................................................4-3

GPS Operations..................................................................................................4-3

Section II MMS–P Sections ..............................................................................4-3

Degraded Mode Operations ...............................................................................4-4

Section III Visual MET.......................................................................................4-5

Pilot Balloon (PIBAL) Observations (USMC)......................................................4-5

Chapter 5 Meteorological Measuring Set, AN/TMQ-41 ...................................................5-1

Section I MMS AN/TMQ-41 Equipment ...........................................................5-1

Section II AN/TMQ-41 Section Site Operations..............................................5-3

Site Selection ......................................................................................................5-3

Survey Requirements .........................................................................................5-4

RDF Emplacement..............................................................................................5-4

Equipment Shelter Emplacement .......................................................................5-4

Balloon Inflation Site ...........................................................................................5-4

Camouflage.........................................................................................................5-5

Section III AN/TMQ-41 Section Personnel......................................................5-6

Field artillery (FA) MET Station Leader (SFC, MOS 13W40).............................5-7

FA MET Section Sergeant (SSG, MOS 13W30) ................................................5-8

FA MET Equipment Repairer (SGT, MOS 13W20H1) .......................................5-8

FA MET Equipment Repairer (SPC, MOS 13W10H1) .......................................5-8

FA MET Crewmember (SPC, MOS 13W10).......................................................5-8

FA MET Crewmember (PFC, MOS 13W10).......................................................5-9

Section IV Suggested Load Plans.................................................................5-10

Chapter 6 Meteorological Measuring Set-Profiler, AN/TMQ-52 .....................................6-1

Section I MMS–P AN/TMQ-52 Equipment .......................................................6-1

Shelter Equipment Group ...................................................................................6-1

Section II AN/TMQ-52 Section Site Operations..............................................6-3

Site Selection ......................................................................................................6-3

Equipment Shelter Emplacement .......................................................................6-4

Balloon Inflation Site ...........................................................................................6-4

Camouflage.........................................................................................................6-5
Contents 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 iii 

Displacement Procedures .................................................................................. 6-5

Section III AN/TMQ-52 Section Personnel ..................................................... 6-6

FA MET Station Leader (SFC, MOS 13W40) .................................................... 6-6

FA MET Section Sergeant (SSG, MOS 13W30)................................................ 6-7

FA MET Equipment Repairer (SGT, MOS 13W20H1)....................................... 6-7

FA MET Equipment Repairer (SPC, MOS 13W10H1)....................................... 6-7

FA MET Crewmember (SPC, MOS 13W10) ...................................................... 6-7

FA MET Crewmember (PFC, MOS 13W10) ...................................................... 6-8

Section IV Suggested Load Plans .................................................................. 6-8

Chapter 7 Balloon Inflation and Launching Procedures................................................ 7-1

Section I Overview............................................................................................ 7-1

Safety Procedures.............................................................................................. 7-1

Gases Used For Inflation.................................................................................... 7-3

Section III Inflation Procedures....................................................................... 7-4

Balloon Inflation And Launching Device, ML-594/U........................................... 7-4

Commercial Gas Regulators .............................................................................. 7-4

Balloons.............................................................................................................. 7-4

Preparation of Balloons ...................................................................................... 7-5

Night-Lighting Unit.............................................................................................. 7-5

Determining Lift For Balloons ............................................................................. 7-5

Determining Gas Volume Required ................................................................... 7-7

Inflation Using the Inflation and Launching Device ............................................ 7-8

Inflation Shelter................................................................................................... 7-9

Nozzles and Weights........................................................................................ 7-10

Inflating the Pilot Balloon.................................................................................. 7-10

Inflating the Sounding Balloon.......................................................................... 7-10

Tying Off the Balloon........................................................................................ 7-11

Balloon Train .................................................................................................... 7-11

Section IV Release Procedures..................................................................... 7-12

Releasing From the Inflation and Launching Device ....................................... 7-12

Releasing From an Inflation Shelter................................................................. 7-13

Release Using a Balloon Shroud ..................................................................... 7-14

Chapter 8 Personnel, Logistics, and Maintenance......................................................... 8-1

Personnel ........................................................................................................... 8-1

Logistics Planning............................................................................................... 8-1

Basic Load and Stockage Levels ....................................................................... 8-2

Logistical Supply Channels and Locations of Reserve Stocks .......................... 8-2

Communications................................................................................................. 8-3

Maintenance Concept ........................................................................................ 8-3

Appendix A Met Messages ...................................................................................................A-1

SECTION I MMS FATDS MET MESSAGES.....................................................A-1

Overview.............................................................................................................A-1

Section II JVMF MET Messages (MMS–P)....................................................A-10

Common Message Processor..........................................................................A-15

Section III Standard MET Messages.............................................................A-18
Contents 

iv FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Encoding Standard Messages From MMS–P MET Messages ....................... A-44

Section IV Artillery Limited Surface Observation MET Message.............. A-45

overview........................................................................................................... A-45

Section V MET Message Checking Procedures ......................................... A-55

Appendix B World Meteorological Organization Cloud Codes........................................ B-1

Appendix C MET Support Request Procedures ................................................................ C-1

Appendix D Example MET Plan ........................................................................................... D-1

Example MET Plan ............................................................................................ D-1

Appendix E Global Positioning System (GPS) .................................................................. E-1

GPS System....................................................................................................... E-1

Appendix F NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables ............................................................F-1

Appendix G Safety and Environmental Requirements...................................................... G-1

General .............................................................................................................. G-1

Appendix H Environmental Awareness.............................................................................. H-1

Section I-Army Environmental Awareness ................................................... H-1

Section II-Meteorology Environmental Considerations............................... H-1

Maintenance....................................................................................................... H-3

Supply ................................................................................................................ H-4

Section III-Regulatory Requirements............................................................. H-5

Section IV. Environmental Risk Management............................................... H-7

Appendix I Time Zones, Octants, and Regions..................................................................I-1

Time Zones ..........................................................................................................I-1

Global Octants .....................................................................................................I-1

Climatic Regions ..................................................................................................I-1

 GLOSSARY.......................................................................................... Glossary-1

 REFERENCES.................................................................................. References-1

 INDEX ......................................................................................................... Index-1

Figures 

Figure 1-1. MMS MET message area of validity.................................................................... 1-8

Figure 1-2 MMS–P MET message area of validity ................................................................ 1-9

Figure 1-3. Examples of positioning for wind....................................................................... 1-10

Figure 1-4. MET day ............................................................................................................ 1-11

Figure 1-5. Leapfrog movement technique.......................................................................... 1-14

Figure 1-6. Nonlinear battlefield........................................................................................... 1-17

Figure 2-1. 45 kilometers ....................................................................................................... 2-3

Figure 2-2. 15 kilometers ....................................................................................................... 2-4

Figure 2-3. 5 kilometers ......................................................................................................... 2-4

Figure 3-1. Earth’s atmosphere ............................................................................................. 3-1
Contents 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 v 

Figure 3-2. Temperature scales .............................................................................................3-3

Figure 3-3. Atmospheric pressure..........................................................................................3-4

Figure 3-4. Cloud types ..........................................................................................................3-7

Figure 3-5. General circulation pattern...................................................................................3-8

Figure 3-6. Cold front............................................................................................................3-10

Figure 3-7. Warm front .........................................................................................................3-11

Figure 3-8. Warm front occlusion .........................................................................................3-12

Figure 3-9. Cold front occlusion ...........................................................................................3-12

Figure 3-10. Effect of a 20-knot tail wind..............................................................................3-16

Figure 3-11. Effect of a 20-knot crosswind...........................................................................3-16

Figure 3-12. Effect of temperature .......................................................................................3-17

Figure 3-13. Effect of density ...............................................................................................3-17

Figure 3-15. Nested domains ...............................................................................................3-19

Figure 3-16. Atmospheric profile ..........................................................................................3-20

Figure 3-17. NEEDS CAPTION............................................................................................3-21

Figure 3-18. MET data reference point ................................................................................3-22

Figure 4-1. Southeast U.S. chain ...........................................................................................4-2

Figure 4-2. Remote launch capability.....................................................................................4-3

Figure 4-3. Example degraded mode timeline .......................................................................4-5

Figure 5-1. AN/TMQ-41 equipment........................................................................................5-1

Figure 5-2. Site occupation ....................................................................................................5-5

Figure 5-3. Vehicle 1 with trailer...........................................................................................5-10

Figure 5-4. Vehicle 2 with trailer...........................................................................................5-11

Figure 5-5. Vehicle 3 with trailer...........................................................................................5-12

Figure 6-1. AN/TMQ-52 equipment........................................................................................6-1

Figure 6-2. Site occupation ....................................................................................................6-5

Figure 6-3 Vehicle 1 (shelter) load plan .................................................................................6-8

Figure 6-4 Vehicle 2 load plan................................................................................................6-9

Figure 6-5 Vehicle 3 load plan..............................................................................................6-10

Figure 7-1. Personnel ground.................................................................................................7-3

Figure 7-2. Completed grounding field...................................................................................7-3

Figure 7-3. Inflation nomograph .............................................................................................7-8

Figure 7-4. Required total lift example ...................................................................................7-9

Figure 7-5. Weigh-off example .............................................................................................7-10

Figure 7-6. Tying fff the balloon............................................................................................7-11

Figure 7-7. Balloon train .......................................................................................................7-12

Figure 7-8. Release from the inflation and launching device ...............................................7-13

Figure 7-9. Release using a shroud .....................................................................................7-15

Figure A-1. Comm line format ................................................................................................A-1

Figure A-2. Comm line header format....................................................................................A-2

Figure A-3. Priority field format...............................................................................................A-2
Contents 

vi FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure A-4. Subscriber field format ........................................................................................A-3

Figure A-5 Security Classification Field .................................................................................A-3 

Figure A-6. Segment information field format........................................................................A-4

Figure A-7. Date-time-group field format ...............................................................................A-4

Figure A-8. Message identification number field format ........................................................A-4

Figure A-9. Automatic transmission field format....................................................................A-5

Figure A-10. Digital data terminal field format .......................................................................A-5

Figure A-11. FATDS MET message heading format.............................................................A-5

Figure A-12. FATDS computer MET message format...........................................................A-7

Figure A-13. FATDS fallout MET message format ................................................................A-7

Figure A-14. FATDS target acquisition MET message format ..............................................A-8

Figure A-15. Ballistic MET message (PTM) format ...............................................................A-8

Figure A-16. WMO MET message PTM format...................................................................A-10

Figure A-17. Computer MET message format.....................................................................A-12

Figure A-18. Target area MET message format..................................................................A-13

Figure A-19. Target area MET message format..................................................................A-14

Figure A-20. Basic wind report.............................................................................................A-15

Figure A-21. Main message menu screen...........................................................................A-16

Figure A-22. Host address block .........................................................................................A-17

Figure A-23. CMP toolbar ....................................................................................................A-18

Figure A-24. Message format toolbar ..................................................................................A-18

Figure A-25. DA Form 3677-R.............................................................................................A-19

Figure A-26. Computer MET message identification line ....................................................A-20

Figure A-27. Example MET message body.........................................................................A-21

Figure A-28. DA Form 3677-R (Reverse)............................................................................A-22

Figure A-29. DA Form 3675-R.............................................................................................A-23

Figure A-30. Ballistic MET message identification line........................................................A-24

Figure A-31. Ballistic MET message body...........................................................................A-25

Figure A-32. DA Form 3675-R.............................................................................................A-26

Figure A-33. DA Form 3675-R (Reverse)............................................................................A-27

Figure A-34. Sound ranging MET message format .............................................................A-31

Figure A-35. WMO MET message identification line...........................................................A-31

Figure A-36. Format for part A (TTAA) of WMO MET message..........................................A-32

Figure A-37. Format for section 1, part A (TTAA) of WMO MET message .........................A-32

Figure A-38. Format for section 2, part A (TTAA) of WMO MET message .........................A-33

Figure A-39. Surface pressure reporting .............................................................................A-36

Figure A-40. Format for section 3, part A (TTAA) of WMO MET message .........................A-36

Figure A-41. Format for section 4, part A (TTAA) of WMO MET message .........................A-37

Figure A-42. Format for part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message..........................................A-37

Figure A-43. Section 1, part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message ..........................................A-38

Figure A-44. Section 5, part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message ..........................................A-38
Contents 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 vii 

Figure A-45. Section 7, part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message.......................................... A-38

Figure A-46. Section 8, part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message.......................................... A-39

Figure A-47. Section 9, part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message.......................................... A-39

Figure A-48. Format for part B (PPBB) of WMO MET messages....................................... A-39

Figure A-49. Format of part C (TTCC) of WMO MET message.......................................... A-41

Figure A-50. Format of part D (TTDD) of WMO MET message.......................................... A-41

Figure A-51. Format of part D (PPDD) of WMO MET message ......................................... A-42

Figure A-52. DA Form 3676-R ............................................................................................ A-43

Figure A-53. MMS–P MET message format ....................................................................... A-45

Figure A-54. Cloud cover .................................................................................................... A-47

Figure A-55. Quadrant visibility ........................................................................................... A-49

Figure B-1 Format for part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message ...............................................B-1

Figure C-1. Message request structure................................................................................. C-1

Figure C-2. MET message request ....................................................................................... C-5

Figure E-1. GPS satellite constellation...................................................................................E-2

Figure F1. LORAN-C, Calcutta chain GRI 5543 ....................................................................F-7

Figure F-2. LORAN-C, Canadian east coast Chain GRI 5930...............................................F-8

Figure F3. LORAN-C, Russian-American chain GRI 5980Figure F4. LORAN-C, 

Canadian west coast chain, GRI 5990 ...............................................................F-9

Figure F4. LORAN-C, Canadian west coast chain, GRI 5990.............................................F-10

Figure F5. LORAN-C, Bombay chain GRI 6042 ..................................................................F-11

Figure F6. LORAN-C, Lessay chain GRI 6780 ....................................................................F-12

Figure F7. LORAN-C, China south sea GRI 6780 ...............................................................F-13

Figure F8. LORAN-C, Bo chain GRI 7001 ...........................................................................F-14

Figure F-9. LORAN-C, south Saudi Arabian chain, GR 7030..............................................F-15

Figure F10. LORAN-C, Newfoundland east coast GRI 7270...............................................F-16

Figure F11. LORAN-C, China north sea GRI 7430..............................................................F-17

Figure F12. LORAN-C, Sylt chain GRI 7499........................................................................F-18

Figure F13. LORAN-C, eastern Russia Chayka chain GRI 7950 ........................................F-19

Figure F-14. LORAN-C, Gulf of Alaska chain, GRI 7960.....................................................F-20

Figure F-15. LORAN-C, southeast United States chain, GRI 7980.....................................F-21

Figure F-16. LORAN-C, Mediterranean chain, GRI 7990 ....................................................F-22

 Figure F-17. LORAN-C, north central United States chain, GRI 8290 ...............................F-23

Figure F-18. LORAN-C, north Saudi Arabian chain, GRI 8830 ...........................................F-24

Figure F-19. LORAN-C, Great Lakes chain, GRI 8970........................................................F-25

Figure F-20. LORAN-C, south central United States chain, GRI 9610................................F-26

Figure F-21. East Asia GRI 9930 .........................................................................................F-27

Figure F-22. LORAN-C, United States west coast chain, GRI 9940....................................F-28

Figure F-23. LORAN-C, northeast United States chain, GRI 9960......................................F-29

Figure F-24. LORAN-C, north Pacific chain, GRI 9990 .......................................................F-30

Figure I-1. Time zones, octants, and regions..........................................................................I-2
Contents 

viii FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Tables 

Table 3-1. Atmospheric Structure of MET Message............................................................ 3-14

Table 5-1. Radar Scattering Camouflage Modules ............................................................... 5-5

Table 5-2. AN/TMQ-41 Section Personnel (U.S. Army) and AN/TMQ-41 Section 

Personnel (U.S. Marine Corps) .......................................................................... 5-6

Table 6-1. Radar Scattering Camouflage Modules ............................................................... 6-5

Table 6-2. AN/TMQ-52 Section Personnel (US Army) .......................................................... 6-6

Table 7-1. Balloon Ascent Rate, Free Lift, Weight, and Bursting Altitude ............................. 7-6

Table 7-2. Weights of Attachments........................................................................................ 7-7

Table 7-3. Additional Weights for Adverse Weather Conditions (Sounding only) ................. 7-7

Table A-1. Security Classification Field Entries.....................................................................A-3

Table A-2. FATDS MET Message Heading Fields ................................................................A-5

Table A-3. FATDS Computer MET Message Body Symbols ................................................A-7

Table A-4. FATDS Fallout MET Message Body Symbols .....................................................A-7

Table A-5. FATDS Target Acquisition Message Symbols .....................................................A-8

Table A-6. FATDS Ballistic MET Message Heading Symbols...............................................A-8

Table A-7. Ballistic MET Message Body Symbols.................................................................A-9

Table A-8. WMO MET Message Heading Symbols ............................................................A-10

Table A-9 Octant of Globe Q Code......................................................................................A-20

Table A-10. TA MET Message Groups................................................................................A-28

Table A-11 Cloud Code .......................................................................................................A-29

Table A-12. Zone Number Code..........................................................................................A-29

Table A-13. Codes for Last Millibar Level That Winds Are Available ..................................A-33

Table A-14. Temperature Tenths Value Code.....................................................................A-33

Table A-15. Dew Point Depression Code............................................................................A-34

Table A-16. Mandatory Pressure Levels .............................................................................A-35

Table A-17. Fixed Regional Levels......................................................................................A-40

Table A-18. Fixed Regional Level Data ...............................................................................A-42

Table A-19. Na-Total Amount of Cloud Cover.....................................................................A-47

Table A-20. Additional Codes ..............................................................................................A-47

Table A-21. D-Direction From Which Surface Wind is Blowing...........................................A-48

Table A-22. F-Force of Surface Wind (Beaufort Scale).......................................................A-48

Table A-23. V-Visibility at Surface .......................................................................................A-49

Table A-24. w-Present Weather and Obstructions to Vision ...............................................A-50

Table A-25. A’-Amplification of Phenomenon Reported by w..............................................A-51

Table A-26. R-State of Road in Vicinity of the Observation Point .......................................A-52

Table A-27. T-State of Terrain in the Vicinity of the Observation Point...............................A-52

Table A-28. A-Sate of Water Surface ..................................................................................A-52

Table A-29. Nh-Amount of Cloud Reported at Height ha ....................................................A-53
Contents 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 ix 

Table A-30. ha-Height of the Lowest Cloud Layer Above the Observation Point............... A-54

Table A-31. Hs-Average Height of Breakers....................................................................... A-54

Table A-32. Ps-Period of Breakers (Seconds) Time Required for Successive 

Breakers to Pass a Given Point....................................................................... A-54

Table A-33. Dw-Direction of Approach of Waves To Beach (Observers Back to Sea) ...... A-54

Table A-34. Ws-Width of Surf Zone (Distance from Edge of Water to the Point 

Seaward that the White Caps of the Surf Begin to Appear) ............................ A-55

Table B-1. Amount of Low/Middle Cloud, Nh..........................................................................B-2

Table B-2. Coding of Low Cloud, CL ......................................................................................B-2

Table B-3. Height of Cloud Base Above Ground, h ...............................................................B-3

Table B-4. Coding of Middle Cloud, CM..................................................................................B-4

Table B-5. Coding of High Cloud, CH .....................................................................................B-5

Table C-1. Symbols in Message Request for MET Support ................................................. C-1

Table C-2. Q Code for Octant of the Globe........................................................................... C-2

Table C-3. Line Codes for Ballistic MET Messages (Type 2 or 3)........................................ C-2

Table C-4. Zone Number Codes for Target Acquisition MET Message ............................... C-3

Table C-5. Zone Number Codes for Computer MET Messages........................................... C-4

Table D-1. Acronyms and Abbreviations............................................................................... D-1

Table F-1. LORAN Chains’ Stations.......................................................................................F-1

Table H-1 Material Safety Data Sheet................................................................................... H-3

Table H-2. Environmental Laws and Regulations................................................................. H-5

Table H-3. Regulatory Training Requirements...................................................................... H-6

Table H-4. Common Environmental Hazards ....................................................................... H-8

Table H-5. Examples of Environmental Controls .................................................................. H-9
Contents 

x FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Preface 

This publication provides the United States Army and United States Marine Corps (USMC) commanders, 

artillerymen, and meteorology (MET) crew members with tactics, techniques, and procedures for the 

employment of MET sections. This publication describes the equipment and tasks required to develop MET 

data from the selection of the MET station location to the dissemination of the MET data. 

This publication implements the following North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) standardization 

agreements (STANAGs). 

• STANAG 4044, Adoption of a Standard Atmosphere. 

• STANAG 4061, Adoption of a Standard Ballistic Meteorological Message. 

• STANAG 4082, Adoption of Standard Artillery Computer Meteorological Message. 

• STANAG 4103, Format of Request for Meteorological Message for Ballistic and Special 

Purposes. 

• STANAG 4140, Adoption of a Standard Target Acquisition Meteorological Message. 

• STANAG 4168, Characteristics of Hydrogen Generating Equipment. 

This publication applies to U.S. Army and Marine Corps planning and warfighting personnel, the Active Army, 

the Army National Guard/Army National Guard of the United States, and the United States Army Reserve 

unless otherwise stated. 

The proponent of this publication is United States Training and Doctrine Command. Send comments and 

recommendations on DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) directly to: 

Commandant 

U.S. Army Field Artillery School 

ATTN: ATSF-DD 

Fort Sill, OK 73503-5600 
Commander and Staff Considerations 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 1-1 

Chapter 1 

Commander and Staff Considerations 

Combat experience has proven the importance of providing accurate and timely 

meteorological data to both artillery and other units. MET sections provide data to 

enhance first round accuracy, effective downwind predictions, intelligence 

preparation of the battlefield, and forecast capabilities of the staff weather officer. 

The commander and staff must include meteorology in the planning process. The 

planning process focuses on what data is needed, who needs it, and how will they get 

it. Artillery meteorology, as one of the five requirements for accurate predicted fires, 

plays an increasingly vital role in today’s changing operational environment. 

Accuracy of indirect fires increases the lethality and directly relates to other issues of 

strategic importance such as collateral damage. 

1-1. Since MET is one of the five requirements for accurate and predicted fires it is considered part of the 

precision fires system of systems. MET sections provide data to enhance first round accuracy, effective 

downwind predictions, intelligence preparation of the battlefield, and forecast capabilities of the staff 

weather officer. The commander and staff who include meteorology in the planning process should always 

use the most accurate MET data available as it will benefit the most. The planning process focuses on what 

data is needed, who needs it, and how will they acquire it. 

SECTION I OVERVIEW 

NOTE: The U.S. Army Intelligence Center and Fort Huachuca is the proponent for Army 

general and tactical weather requirements, except those relating to artillery MET. 

MISSION 

1-2. The mission of the MET section is to produce and disseminate valid and timely MET data in 

formatted messages. Example messages and checking procedures are at appendix A. These messages are as 

follows: 

z Computer 

z Ballistic (type 2 and type 3) 

z Target acquisition 

z Target area MET (Meteorological Measuring Set–Profiler [MMS-P] only) 

z Basic wind report (MMS–P only) 

z Fallout MET (FOMET) 

z World Meteorological Organization (WMO) messages 

z Sound ranging messages to allied units. 
Chapter 1 

1-2 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

U.S. ARMY MET SECTIONS 

1-3. Under the modular structure, Army MET sections are deployed as follows: 

z Each brigade combat team (BCT) will have one Fires Battalion that will include a MET section. 

z Each STRYKER Brigade will have one field artillery (FA) battalion (BN) that will include a 

MET section. 

z Each Fires Brigade will have three MET sections as part of the Target Acquisition Battery. 

U.S. MARINE CORPS MET SECTION 

1-4. The MET section is divided into four MET teams in an artillery regiment. These teams provide 

support to the battalions and batteries of the regiment. The teams are given tactical missions based on 

current as well as future operations. 

MET SYSTEMS 

1-5. There are two basic MET systems deployed throughout the field artillery: The Meteorological 

Measuring Set (MMS), AN/TMQ-41, and the Meteorological Measuring Set–Profiler (MMS–P), 

AN/TMQ-52. These systems are highly mobile, automated data processing and MET data acquisition 

systems. Both systems operate in any type of climatic condition and over any type of terrain where tactical 

operations require employment of FA. The preferred meteorological support assets during traditional 

maneuver warfare are the MMS-P and the MMS. Both systems are vehicle-borne systems. The MMS-P 

provides localized now-casts of atmospheric numerical weather predictions, whereas the MMS provides 

meteorological data to using units by tracking a balloon borne radiosonde, which provides vertical zoned 

atmospheric numerical meteorological output. 

MMS (AN/TMQ-41) 

1-6. The AN/TMQ-41 uses three passive modes to track a balloon-borne radiosonde that transmits the 

upper air data to the ground station. These are the radio navigational aid (NAVAID), radio direction 

finding (RDF), and Global Positioning System (GPS) modes. The NAVAID and GPS modes have a remote 

launch capability. The AN/TMQ-41 can track the radiosonde and process data while on the move. 

MMS-P (AN/TMQ-52) 

1-7. The AN/TMQ-52 uses mesoscale modeling (MM5) with 4-kilometer grid spacing granularity, as 

well as software coupled with the Unified Post Processing System (UPPS) to generate MET data upon 

request. The MM5 model ingests upper air data (NAVAID and GPS modes), surface observation data, 

terrain data, regional observations, and large scale weather data. The MM5 model also takes into 

consideration historical, topographical, climatological weather data, as well as vertical and horizontal 

resolutions. The resulting model output is transferred to the UPPS to eliminate model biases. The model 

restarts every 30 minutes, providing data with a staleness of no more than 30 minutes. Using this data, the 

MMS-P generates MET data for the mid point of the trajectory, which is based on the gun location and the 

target location as well as target area MET. Additionally, the AN/TMQ-52 is capable of operating in two 

degraded modes (see paragraph 1-9). Future block improvements to MMS–P include decreasing the 

reliance on radiosondes, decreasing the amount of section equipment, and decreasing the number of section 

personnel. The ultimate goal of profiler is to be imbedded on to the firing platform. 

CAPABILITIES 

1-8. The capabilities of the met section vary based on the specific system being used. Both systems 

provide met data for use by the field artillery. The mms system is the older system and operational concept 

is based on providing met data from radiosonde observations. The mms-p operational concept is based on 

the system ingesting a variety of sources of raw met input and producing met data via a model. 
Commander and Staff Considerations 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 1-3 

1-9. While both systems retain the essential capabilities of obtaining, processing, and disseminating 

met data, the operational concept of the MMS-P provides the met section with more capabilities than the 

mms. 

MMS EQUIPPED SECTION

1-10. The MMS is equipped to produce electronic soundings of the atmosphere to 30,000 meters, day or 

night, in various types of weather. An important factor in providing MET data is the time required for a 

balloon to reach a required height. Generally, altitude requirements for artillery MET messages are low, 

10,000 meters or less. Air Force weather (AFW) and chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear 

(CBRN) support are high altitude soundings requiring more time. The MET section can provide hourly 

artillery MET data if necessary during high-intensity battle. The artillery meteorologists do not forecast 

weather; that is the responsibility of the staff weather officer (SWO). However, the MET crew member can 

distinguish major types and changes of weather that will affect the validity of MET messages. This 

knowledge allows the crew member to recommend changes to MET sounding schedules to provide 

accurate MET data during changing weather conditions. 

MMS-P EQUIPPED SECTION

1-11. The MMS-P utilizes sounding data, but requires fewer soundings to maintain continuous MET 

coverage. The important factor in providing MET data for the MMS-P is the availability of large scale 

atmospheric data. Large scale atmospheric data is generated by the Naval Operational Global Atmospheric 

Prediction System (NOGAPS) and is transmitted every 12 hours by the Air Force Weather Agency 

(AFWA) via satellite. Each NOGAPS transmission provides the system with 72 hours of valid large scale 

atmospheric data. The profiler is capable of providing MET out to a distance of 500 kilometers from the 

MMS–P location. This has been characterized with excellent results, but has only been certified to 60 

kilometers. Additionally the MMS–P characterization results demonstrated that with 48-hour-old 

NOGAPS, the radiosonde provided only minimal improvement to model accuracy. Commanders should 

consider using MMS–P without the radiosonde as a viable solution for MET when radiosondes are scarce 

or not available and current NOGAPS is available. Degraded operations mode is defined as either no 

radiosonde and current NOGAPS or no current NOGAPS and operating with only radiosondes. 

1-12. The AN/TMQ-41 and AN/TMQ-52 contain external backup systems for obtaining meteorological 

data when electronic systems are unavailable. The Extrapolated MET Program incorporated into the 

AN/TMQ-55 tactical meteorology (TACMET) sensor will provide a nine-line extrapolated computer 

message. Initial development and statistical evaluation demonstrate that the extrapolated MET message 

provides estimated vertical profile data with the same accuracy as 3-hour-old electronic met data. 

Simulated artillery firing results show a significant improvement over the default (standard) computer 

MET message. The extrapolated MET message is to be used only when there is no electronic means to 

collect upper air sounding data. Additionally, FA units should be advised when the MET section provides 

MET data using the Extrapolated MET Program. 

1-13. USMC MET sections have an additional back-up capability consisting of visual MET. Visual MET 

is also used when the electronic means of collecting MET is not available. Visual MET procedures will be 

discussed in chapter 4. Visual MET messages contain accurate winds data as a result of data gathered from 

visually tracking a pilot balloon with a theodolite. Temperature and pressure data are measured at surface, 

which serves as a basis for developing temperature and pressure profiles. The accuracy of a visual MET 

message is dependent on the stability of the atmosphere. The more stable the atmosphere, the more 

accurate the temperature and pressure profile. 
Chapter 1 

1-4 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

COMMAND AND CONTROL 

1-14. Command and control (C2) of artillery MET sections is exercised at the artillery headquarters to 

which the MET section is assigned or attached. During periods when there are multiple MET sections 

located in proximity, a senior MET representative may be appointed to coordinate flight schedules, 

logistics, and MET section location to ensure adequate coverage of the area of operations. He may 

recommend tasking the mission for high-altitude soundings (WMO and FOMET messages) to MET 

sections on a rotational basis. An example of decentralized control of MET assets is a MET section 

deployed forward to support the covering force battle. In this situation, it is best to attach the supporting 

MET section to the force artillery headquarters of the covering force. 

1-15. In the modular force, each BCT, whether heavy or light, will have one MET system. Each fires 

brigade will have three MET systems; however, owing to lack of assets, each fires brigade will initially be 

fielded with one MET system. 

ARTILLERY S3 

1-16. The artillery operations officer (S3) has primary staff responsibility for the control and operations of 

artillery MET assets. The operations officer is advised on the technical aspects of MET systems by the 

MET station leader. For MET employment, the operations officer— 

z Prepares the MET plan, which is a tab to the FA support plan. During the preparation of the 

MET plan, considers the following: 

 Commander’s intent and concept of the operation. 

 Tactical situation. 

 Terrain features and wind direction. 

 MET assets available. 

 Location of units to be supported. 

 Communications means required. 

 Scheduling requirements. 

z Coordinates with the SWO to determine AFW requirements. 

z Coordinates with MET station leader and unit signal staff officers to prioritize means of 

communication and dissemination of messages and to assign radiosonde frequencies. 

z Coordinates all radiosonde flight schedules of MET sections within the area of operations (AO) 

to provide optimal coverage to supported units. This is very important when providing MET 

support for other than artillery requirements, since flight times are longer for these missions. 

z Monitors the operational status of MET sections regarding personnel, maintenance, and 

logistics. 

z Advises the commander on factors affecting MET section mission capabilities. 

z Coordinates with adjacent units and the assistant operations officer at the next higher command 

echelon to maximize MET message coverage. MET messages from adjacent units may be used. 

z Coordinates with the MET station leader to develop a positioning scheme for all MET assets in 

support of the mission. 

z Coordinates with maneuver and supported units to gain approval to move MET sections through 

and to occupy terrain. 

z Coordinates with the MET section and supported units to execute remote launch procedures to 

expand areas of validity. 

MET STATION LEADER

1-17. The MET station leader is the primary advisor to the artillery in all matters pertaining to MET 

support in the division area. With the operations officer, he plans the tactical employment of all MET 
Commander and Staff Considerations 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 1-5 

 assets. He also is responsible for the day-to-day operations of the MET section. Specifically, the MET 

station leader— 

z Helps the operations officer prepare the MET plan. 

z Advises the operations officer on the employment and operation of the MET assets within the 

division area. 

z Supervises MET section operations. 

z Coordinates with the logistics officer for logistical support. 

z Performs site selection and location. 

z Directs the operation, emplacement, and displacement of the MET section. 

z Performs first sergeant type duties when operating independently. 

z Maintains quality control of MET data. 

z Organizes and supervises the MET section training program. 

z Advises the operations officer on all factors affecting mission capabilities, such as personnel, 

maintenance, and logistics. 

SECTION II OPERATIONAL CONSIDERATIONS 

SCHEDULING AND POSITIONING 

1-18. Proper scheduling and positioning of met sections can enhance the effectiveness of a single met 

section and maximize the effectiveness of multiple met sections. 

1-19. Scheduling and positioning of met sections should be accomplished based on each systems 

capabilities to best support the mission. 

NOTICE TO AIRMEN

1-20. Routine radiosonde observations are, in general, exempt from the provisions of Federal Aviation 

Regulation 101 relative to filing a notice to airmen (NOTAM) for the following reasons: 

z Radiosondes do not weigh more than 4 pounds (1.8 kilograms) or have a weight/size ratio of 

more than 3 ounces per square inch on any surface of the package. 

z Balloons do not carry a total payload package weighing more than 6 pounds (2.72 kilograms). 

z Balloons do not transport two or more packages that weigh more than 12 pounds (5.44 

kilograms). 

z Trains do not use a rope or other devices for suspension of the payload that require an impact 

force of more than 50 pounds (22.88 kilograms) to separate the suspended payload from the 

balloon.

NOTE: In most cases, local aviation policies and regulations require aviation tower or flight 

operations to be notified prior to release of a balloon in an aviation operations area.

SCHEDULING

1-21. Scheduling considerations are different for the MMS and MMS–P systems. The MMS system 

determines MET data from balloon-borne radiosondes. The resulting MET data is broadcast to users (Push 

method) based on a schedule of balloon flights determined by operational requirements. The MMS–P 

system determines MET data from a mesoscale model of the area of operations. Data produced by the 

MMS-P may be disseminated by a user querying the system (Pull) or met data may be broadcast to users 

(Push). 

MMS Scheduling 

1-22. The operations officer is responsible for scheduling flights within the area of operations. Users who 

require MET support and who are not in normal MET message dissemination schemes forward their 
Chapter 1 

1-6 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

request for MET support to the artillery operations officer. The format for the request is in appendix C. The 

operations officer will coordinate with firing units and other MET data users (especially the SWO for 

AFW requirements and the chemical officer for downwind prediction requirements) to determine if there 

are any special requirements that must be considered. This includes the flight schedule in the MET support 

plan. MET data will be transmitted to subscriber units (Push method) based on this schedule. In 

coordination with the MET station leader, the operations officer develops a flight schedule based on the 

following: 

z Mission requirements (low and high altitude flights).

z Area of validity (terrain).

z Prevailing winds.

z Transition periods.

z Availability of supplies.

MMS–P Scheduling 

1-23. The MMS–P system provides more scheduling flexibility owing to the nature of how the MMS–P 

obtains MET data. The MMS–P does not solely rely on a balloon borne radiosonde to provide a MET data. 

When operating under normal conditions, the MMS–P primarily relies on a mesoscale model to develop 

MET data. Modeling provides the MMS–P the capability of producing an updated MET message every 30 

minutes. Options for scheduling MET from an MMS–P equipped section are— 

z MET may be requested (pull method) by subscriber units. 

z MET may be scheduled at predetermined times (Push method). 

z MET may be scheduled based on changes in weather conditions as determined by the MET 

section leader. 

z MET may be scheduled on call as determined by the artillery mission.

1-24. When operating in MMS only degraded mode, the MMS–P relies on balloon-borne radiosonde 

soundings to develop a MET message. MET messages are generated upon request, but the area of MET 

validity is reduced from 60 to 30 kilometers. 

NOTE: A practical approach should be observed when scheduling MET from MMS or MMS–P 

equipped sections. Scheduling should be based on times when MET data will make the greatest 

contribution to correcting MET error. MET station leaders are encouraged to provide the 

artillery operations officer information relating to routine and nonroutine changes in the 

weather. This allows the operations officer to schedule MET at time most beneficial to the 

artillery.

1-25. Request for MET for an MMS–P equipped section may take the form of— 

z Manual plain text message (or secure) digital message. 

z Automated digital message request. 

z Voice (radio or landline). 

z Courier. 

NOTE: All requests for MET for an MMS–P equipped section must include the gun and target 

information. If the MET request is for multiple firing units, the gun location will be the battery 

center. 

Scheduling MET for Firing Units Supporting Maneuver Units on the Move 

1-26. Scheduling MET for firing units that are supporting maneuver units on the move will be different as 

a result of the different capabilities of the MMS and MMS-P. The different areas of validity for the two 

system will dictate scheduling MET for firing units supporting maneuver on the move. 
Commander and Staff Considerations 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 1-7 

1-27. Another consideration when scheduling MET for firing units supporting maneuver units on the move 

is the process by which met data is produced. When scheduling MET from a MMS, consideration should 

be given to the time required to conduct a radiosonde observation. Whereas the MMS-P does not have the 

limitation of waiting on the completion of a Radiosonde Observation prior to producing Met Data. MET 

Data (Push Method) 

MET Data (Push Method) 

1-28. If data is pushed, the MET section chief will coordinate a schedule of broadcast times and ensure the 

user provides gun and target locations for the requested MET messages. If the firing units are operating in 

close proximity to each other and firing on the same target, the gun location for all guns may be the battery 

center. This will preclude having to process multiple MET messages resulting from the different locations 

of the guns. Additionally, the MET chief will coordinate a means of broadcasts (radio, LAN, wire, courier, 

phone, others) 

MET Data (Pull Method) 

1-29. When data is pulled (Protocol 220C), MET data is requested by the user via the user’s 

communications system using the K02.56 Message Request or the K01.03 Information Request Message. 

The messages require the requestor to provide the unit reference number (URN), gun and target location, 

and the type message requested. The profiler automatically generates the MET data in the requested 

format. The request is automatically sent to the MMS–P where the system generates MET data based on 

the user’s request. The MET data generated by the system is validated and sent to the requester by the 

operator. If the MMS–P is equipped with Protocol 220A, the user requests MET using a free text message 

containing the required information. 

Scheduling MET for Firing Units Supporting Fixed Locations 

1-30. Scheduling MET for firing units supporting fixed locations is less complex than scheduling MET 

for firing units supporting maneuver units on the move. The required area of coverage is usually such that 

both systems will operate from fixed locations. 

1-31. When providing MET with the MMS, consideration must be given to the time required to conduct 

Radiosonde Observations. The MMS-P does not have the limitation of waiting on the completion of a 

Radiosonde Observation to provide data. 

MET Data (Push Method) 

1-32. When providing MET to firing units providing counter-fire support, the MET section chief 

coordinates a schedule of broadcasts. If the gun and target locations are known, the MET section chief will 

ensure the correct gun and target locations are entered for message processing. 

1-33. When providing MET to firing units supporting fixed locations, the gun location is known; however, 

the target location may not be known until just before the firing unit conducts a fire mission. In this case, 

enter the gun location data in the target location fields (gun and target location will be the same). 

MET Data (Pull Method) 

1-34. When data is pulled (Protocol 220C), MET data is requested by the user via the user’s 

communications system using the K02.56 Message Request or the K01.03 Information Request Message. 

The messages require the requestor to provide the URN, Gun and target location and the type message 

requested. The profiler automatically generates the MET data in the requested format. The request is 

automatically sent to the MMS–P where the system generates MET data based on the user’s request. The 

MET data generated by the system is validated and sent to the requester by the operator. If the MMS–P is 

equipped with Protocol 220A, the user requests MET using a free text message containing the required 

information. 
Chapter 1 

1-8 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

MMS Mission Requirements 

1-35. A limiting factor in determining mission assignments is the time required for a sounding balloon to 

reach a required altitude. When in position, a MET section can produce all types of MET messages for 

low-level artillery fire about 30 minutes after releasing the balloon. A high-altitude mission requires about 

90 minutes from the release time. When units are coordinating MET requirements, they must be careful not 

to request higher altitudes (more lines) than required. Requesting higher altitudes causes a delay of 

message delivery times due to the increased time needed to reach the higher altitudes. See appendix C for 

MET message request format. 

MMS–P Mission Requirements 

1-36. The MMS–P, with the mesoscale model initialized, produces requested MET messages without the 

time considerations associated with the Radiosonde Observation (RAOB). When the MMS–P is operating 

in a MMS-only degraded mode, the time constraints associated with flying a RAOB will exist prior to 

producing a MET message. 

Positioning MET Sections and Area of MET Validity 

1-37. The operations officer consults with the MET station leader to analyze the terrain and its effect on 

the area of meteorology validity (AMV). The following is a planning guide based on the meteorological 

datum plane (MDP). See figure 1-1 for the AMV for the MMS. 

Figure 1-1. MMS MET message area of validity 

1-38. The area of validity for the MMS–P is 60 kilometers. This extended AMV gives planners additional 

flexibility in providing MET coverage. The MMS–P uses terrain data when calculating MET data negating 

the effects of terrain on AMV. If the MMS–P is operating in degraded mode (valid NOGAPS data is not 

available), the AMV for the MMS–P is 30 kilometers. See figure 1-2 for the AMV for the MMS–P. 
Commander and Staff Considerations 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 1-9 

Figure 1-2 MMS–P MET message area of validity 

1-39. The MMS–P generates MET data based on the midpoint between the requesting unit’s location and 

the target location. This capability coupled with the 60-kilometer AMV provides planners with increased 

flexibility when positioning the MMS–P. 

PROFILER CHARACTERIZATION 

1-40. Characterization of the Profiler can be looked at as an evaluation to determine its strengths and 

weaknesses. There have been three characterizations of the Profiler to determine how well the system 

could perform out to 500 KM from its’ position without the radiosonde. The characterization results 

indicate the radiosonde had little effect on accuracy of the MET DATA produced by the Profiler when 

current NOGAPS is used by the system. The overall accuracy of the system was similar to that seen during 

the Developmental Test. 

1-41. Based on the characterization results, Profiler without a balloon and radiosonde should be considered 

a viable solution for accurate MET data when radiosondes are scarce or not available. 

PREVAILING WINDS

1-42. Prevailing winds has a greater effect on positioning mms equipped sections than MMS-P equipped 

sections. The manner in which met data is produced and the increased area of validity for the mms-p 

removes much of the effect of prevailing winds on the positioning of the MMS-P. 

1-43. MMS equipped sections are significantly affected by prevailing winds due to the need to produce 

data from radiosonde observations. 

MMS Equipped Sections 

1-44. The prevailing winds and their effects on the flight path of the balloon are important factors in 

positioning the MMS equipped MET section. The soundings made by the MET section only begin at the 

location where the instrument is released. The remainder of the data is acquired along the balloon path as it 

rises. The ideal MET section location allows for the balloon to travel to the horizontal and vertical location 

corresponding to the maximum ordinate of the projectile. Using knowledge of the prevailing winds in the 

area, the MET station leader advises the operations officer on the sites that will provide the best MET 

coverage of the battlefield. Information on prevailing winds in general may be obtained from the 

climatological data provided in the operation order (OPORD). This data can also be obtained from the 

supporting SWO. 

1-45. If the prevailing wind pattern is such that the contemplated balloon path is beyond the forward line 

of own troops (FLOT), the section may be employed farther from the FLOT. (See figure 1-3, [A]). 
Chapter 1 

1-10 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

1-46. If the prevailing wind pattern is from a flank, (see figure 1-3, [B]), the MET section is employed so 

that the sounding balloon will measure the atmosphere in the zones where most of the weapon trajectories 

will pass. 

MMS–P Equipped Sections 

1-47. Wind is not a critical consideration when positioning the MMS–P. The MMS–P determines MET 

data based on the midpoint between the gun location and the target location. The MMS–P also provides a 

target area Met message. 

Figure 1-3. Examples of positioning for wind 

TRANSITION PERIODS 

1-48. The validity of a MET message decreases over time. There are no specific rules for determining how 

long a MET message is usable because that determination depends on the atmospheric conditions. The 

general guidance to help the operations officer prepare flight schedules for soundings is discussed below. 

(See figure 1-4.) 

1-49. During and just after sunrise, temperature changes occur as the atmosphere becomes heated. 

Temperatures are more stable throughout the afternoon. Therefore, soundings are performed more often 

(every 2 hours) in the morning and less often (every 4 hours) in the afternoon. 

1-50. As sunset approaches, the air cools rapidly. During this time, changing temperatures are monitored 

closely. Flight schedules may need adjusting (to one every 2 hours) as the atmosphere cools. The cooling 

of the air stabilizes about 2 hours after sunset. 

1-51. During night and early morning hours, the atmosphere reaches maximum cooling and becomes 

stabilized. During this time, soundings could be taken at intervals that exceed 2 hours, and 4-hour intervals 

between flights are common. 
Commander and Staff Considerations 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 1-11 

Figure 1-4. MET day 

NOTE: The MMS–P provides more flexibility during transition periods as a result of the 

systems capability to generate a new MET message every 30 minutes. 

FRONTAL PASSAGES 

1-52. The passage of a weather front is associated with changes in current conditions. Because of this, the 

MET section should conduct a sounding immediately following the passage of a front. As a result, MET 

schedules may be adjusted. The modeling capability of the MMS–P predicts the effects of frontal activity 

when processing data for MET messages. The effects of frontal passages are similar for the MMS and the 

MMS–P when the MMS–P is operating in a degraded mode. 

COMMANDER’S INTENT 

1-53. Regardless of the above, the tactical situation and the immediate needs of the field artillery 

commander are the main considerations that determine positioning and scheduling. 

MET MESSAGE SELECTION

1-54. Met message selection is selecting the best met message from multiple sections for a particular 

mission. When multiple met sections are producing met in a single area of operations, the most appropriate 

(best) met data for the mission should be provided to firing units. 

1-55. there is selection criteria for mms equipped sections that should be applied to provide the best met 

data. The message selection criteria is not as important for MMS-P equipped sections because the MMS-P 

produces MET data on demand. 
Chapter 1 

1-12 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

MMS EQUIPPED SECTION 

1-56. When MET messages from several sections are available, the selection criteria below should be used 

to determine which MET section should provide support to a given unit. The following criteria are 

established and proven by controlled live-fire testing. Variations of this priority may exist. The MET 

station leader can provide guidance in this area and advise when the use of one MET message is better than 

the use of another. 

z The best data are current and provided by a MET section and balloon flight path within 20 

kilometers of the midpoint of the projectile trajectory. 

z The second best data are less than 2 hours old and from the nearest section within 80 kilometers 

from the trajectory midpoint (upwind is best). 

z The third best data are between 2 to 4 hours old and from a section within 20 kilometers of the 

trajectory midpoint. 

z The fourth best data are from a 4-hour old message, if provided by a section and balloon flight 

path within 20 kilometers of the projectile trajectory midpoint. 

MMS–P EQUIPPED SECTION 

1-57. The MMS–P generates MET data upon demand based on the gun location and the target location. 

Units request MET messages as required. 

1-58. The MET data provided by the MMS–P is provided for a location at the center-point of the gun 

location and target location. 

1-59. MET messages provided by the MMS–P, when operating in MMS degraded mode, are NATO 

formatted Met messages. 

EMPLOYMENT PLANNING 

NOTE: Army MET sections may use hydrogen gas for inflation. This gas is extremely volatile. 

Leaders at all levels must consider safety and environmental protection requirements during the 

planning process. For MMS–P equipped sections, hydrogen gas is only available in commercial 

bottles. See appendix H for additional information 

1-60. When planning the employment of artillery assets in the division area, the commander and staff use 

the staff planning process outlined in FM 5-0. The planning of MET operations in support of the 

commander's intent and concept of the operation should be included in this process. This planning is done 

by the operations officer and the MET station leader. 

MISSION, ENEMY, TERRAIN, TROOPS, TIME AVAILABLE, AND CIVIL 

CONSIDERATIONS 

1-61. Selection of modes of operation and general position areas for MET sections is influenced by a 

thorough analysis of the mission, enemy, terrain, troops, time available, and civilians (METT-TC). 

MISSION 

1-62. The type of mission assigned to a MET section greatly influences its positioning. The main 

consideration in positioning a MET section when it is providing MET data in support of artillery operations 

is to locate the section where it provides optimum coverage for the most firing units. Other (high-altitude) 

MET support requirements, such as AFW support and FOMET message production to support smoke or 

Chemical Biological Radiological and Nuclear (CBRN) operations, also influence the positioning of MET 

assets. 

1-63. The MMS–P has the capability of generating target area meteorology (TAM) data. This data is used 

by planners when selecting the type of munitions to use against a target. Meteorological conditions may 
Commander and Staff Considerations 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 1-13 

limit the effectiveness of certain types of munitions. TAM data allows planners to select the most effective 

munitions to neutralize the target. 

ENEMY 

1-64. The enemy situation, capabilities, and probable courses of action developed by the S2 during 

intelligence preparation of the battlefield (IPB) greatly determine the employment of MET assets. Security 

of the sections must be weighed against mission requirements. 

TERRAIN 

1-65. Terrain acts upon the area of validity of MET messages for the MMS system. Generally, the AMV 

decreases as the distance from the user increases. Mountainous terrain and large bodies of water also affect 

validity areas. The MMS–P system uses terrain data. Using this data, the weather model accounts for the 

affects of terrain. Terrain does not have an effect on the AMV for the MMS–P system. 

TROOPS 

1-66. The size of the area to be covered and the disposition of artillery units greatly govern the way the 

MMS MET section is employed. The section must be positioned where it can provide support for the 

largest number of firing units. MET sections also should be located where logistical support can be 

provided. Finally, MET sections must be within effective and practical communications range of the units 

they support. Positioning of the MMS–P section is less dependent on the location of the firing units owing 

to the 60-kilometer AMV. 

TIME AVAILABLE 

1-67. The operations officer and the MET station leader must consider how much time is required for 

reconnaissance, movement, and occupation of initial and subsequent section positions. Upon arrival at a 

location, the MET section requires about 20 minutes to emplace. Displacement time is approximately 15 

minutes. Travel time is figured at the standard rate for the local conditions for wheeled vehicles.

CIVIL CONSIDERTIONS 

1-68. Civil considerations relate to the civilian population, culture, organizations, and leaders within the 

AO. The operations officer and the MET station leader must consider how all MET operations may directly 

or indirectly affect the civilian population. This will include civilian activities and attitudes in the profiler’s 

employment area 

EMPLOYMENT IN SUPPORT OF INTELLIGENCE PREPARATION OF THE 

BATTLEFIELD 

1-69. The weather analysis has a great impact on both friendly and enemy capabilities. Analyzing the 

weather data in detail to determine their effect on friendly and enemy capabilities to move, shoot, and 

communicate is essential to the IPB process. Because weather also has a tremendous effect on terrain, MET 

section input to terrain and weather analysis is a crucial part of the METT-TC methodology. MET sections 

have the capability of providing limited surface observation data that includes terrain, visibility, water 

surface, and surface atmospheric data. 

1-70. The SWO is responsible for providing weather information for the AO and the area of interest (AI) 

as part of the weather analysis process. The artillery MET section provides critical surface and upper 

atmospheric weather data in support of weather analysis to the SWO. 

1-71. The S-3 considers high-altitude requirements, WMO, and FOMET, as well as artillery requirements 

when positioning and scheduling a MET section. Direct coordination among the intelligence officer, SWO, 

and operations officer is required to determine requirements in support of the weather analysis process. 
Chapter 1 

1-14 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

TACTICAL MOVEMENT 

1-72. A MET section may deploy anywhere on the battlefield to achieve its mission of providing MET 

support. Movement may be toward or away from the frontline trace or laterally, depending on weather 

conditions (mainly prevailing wind direction) and the tactical situation. The requirement to provide 

continuous coverage is an important consideration in determining movement schedules. A number of 

widely separated section positions must be planned. Additionally, an analysis of areas of MET validity is 

necessary. Primary, alternate, and possibly even third-choice position areas are selected. The operations 

officer coordinates with the maneuver element to receive approval for occupation of positions and to obtain 

route clearances. MET sections then must conduct reconnaissance and select the most suitable sites within 

the areas. 

1-73. The increased AMV and capability of the MMS–P to generate MET data based on the midpoint 

between the firing unit location and target provides greater flexibility to planners when deploying 

MMS–P equipped MET sections. The ability of the MMS–P to generate MET data is not affected by 

prevailing winds and terrain and is not a limiting factor when positioning the system. 

MET SUPPORT IN THE OFFENSE 

1-74. Each MET section must be prepared to increase the frequency of message production. For MMS 

equipped MET sections, planning in support of the operation must ensure adequate supplies are available 

to meet increased demand. Prior planning allows the MMS equipped MET section to increase frequency of 

flights and transmissions of MET data. The MMS–P equipped MET section, using the weather model, is 

not required to increase balloon flights to respond to increased demands for MET data. 

MOVEMENT TECHNIQUE 

1-75. The basic movement technique is leapfrogging. When the battle is fluid and the rate of movement is 

rapid, MET sections may employ the leapfrogging technique to keep pace. In this technique, one MET 

section, having established a position, remains in operation while a second displaces to a new location. 

When the second section becomes operational, the first section is displaced by moving past the newly 

occupied position of the second section. This procedure is repeated as often as necessary. (See figure1-5.) 

Figure 1-5. Leapfrog movement technique 
Commander and Staff Considerations 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 1-15 

1-76. The leapfrogging technique is still a valid movement technique for the MMS–P equipped section. 

The increased AMV of the MMS–P system requires less movement to keep up with the flow of the 

battlefield. Movement planners will have to monitor the AMV of the MMS–P systems and reposition 

systems as necessary to maintain continuous coverage. 

MET SUPPORT IN THE DEFENSE 

1-77. Accurate, concentrated artillery fire is a key element in any defense. MET messages improve the 

effectiveness of the artillery response by increasing the accuracy. Control of the MET section in the 

defense is normally centralized once the main battle commences. Movements are limited to ensure 

continuous support. 

COMMUNICATIONS 

1-78. Disseminating met data to the firing units is an important part of the mission of the met section. A 

specific plan for disseminating met data is necessary. 

1-79. The communications plan will provide critical information relating to methods of communication, 

coordination procedures, and operational procedures. 

COMMUNICATIONS PLANS 

1-80. MET data is perishable. The timely dissemination of messages is essential. Digital communications 

is the primary means of MET message distribution. MET messages may be disseminated in a centralized or 

decentralized manner, depending on the tactical situation. Centralized dissemination normally is used when 

the tactical situation is stable. Decentralized dissemination may be used when the controlling headquarters 

is continually relocating or its capability to relay data was terminated. The communications plans must 

support the deployment of MET assets within the AO. The operations officer establishes communications 

priorities and means of dissemination and incorporates them into the MET plan. Unit plans and procedures 

documents should address the following: 

z Communications means. 

z Assignment of radiosonde frequencies. 

z Procedures for coordinating MET support from adjacent units. 

z Network identification information. 

z Procedures for passing AFW and FOMET messages to the staff weather officer.

METHODS OF COMMUNICATIONS 

1-81. The MMS equipped MET section normally transmits all messages (Push method) to its controlling 

headquarters’ fire direction center (FDC). The FDC then passes the MET messages electronically to the 

using elements. The FDC must pass the AFW and FOMET messages to the controlling fire support 

element (FSE) for dissemination to the SWO and chemical officers. This data is used for forecasting, 

downwind predictions, and close air support. 

1-82. The MMS–P equipped MET section (220C Protocol) transmits MET messages upon request (pull 

method) directly to the using unit with the controlling headquarters acting as a relay. (MMS–P sections 

using 220A Protocols uses the push method of disseminating MET.) 

RADIO COMMUNICATIONS 

1-83. Each MET section is authorized the single-channel ground and airborne radio system (SINCGARS). 

The section operates in two tactical radio nets as directed by the controlling headquarters. Normally, these 

are the FA command net for C2 and a FA operations/fire net for MET message dissemination. When 

digital radio communication is not possible, the MET section may disseminate messages by frequency 

modulation voice. 
Chapter 1 

1-16 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

WIRE 

1-84. Whenever practical, wire lines are installed for voice and digital communications with the supported 

units. Radios serve as a backup means of dissemination. 

MESSENGERS 

1-85. Messengers may be used when communications systems are not functioning or if the supported unit 

is nearby. However, extensive travel time for delivery may exhaust the validity time. 

MET PLAN DEVELOPMENT 

1-86. The MET plan contains the information needed to understand how MET assets will be used during a 

specific operation. The MET plan conforms to the standard five-paragraph OPORD format. The heading of 

the plan includes the security classification, the title line, references, and the time zone used throughout. 

The classification is shown at the top and bottom of each page of the document. Major paragraphs of the 

plan are the same as the five-paragraph OPORD format. See appendix D for an example of a MET plan.

STABILITY OPERATIONS 

1-87. Field artillery MET sections can provide upper air data, wind speed and direction, temperature, and 

pressure in support of these operations. Military and civilian authorities use this information to maintain 

current weather maps and to assist them in predicting future conditions. The MET sections are also 

equipped with SINCGARS, which could support the operation as the commander deemed necessary. 

SAFETY IN STABILITY OPERATIONS 

1-88. During these operations helium should be used for inflating balloons. If the section must use 

hydrogen gas, extreme caution must be taken especially in built-up areas. 

NONLINEAR BATTLEFIELD 

1-89. Operating in an area where the enemy operates in small groups and there are no defined enemy 

concentrations creates a nonlinear battlefield. (see figure 1-6) In a nonlinear battlefield, forward operating 

bases (FOBs) are created. Each FOB has a responsibility for a specified area based on the capabilities of 

the assigned units. 

1-90. MET operations in a FOB are outlined in the MET plan portion of the operations order. While 

operating from a FOB, it may be practical for MMS–P equipped sections to push MET data to units. This is 

not the normal procedures for MMS–P, but can be accomplished because the gun locations are known to 

the section. Using the message generation function, the section can enter the gun location into both the gun 

location fields and the target location fields. The system will generate MET data for the gun location. The 

MET message is then transmitted based on an established schedule. 
Commander and Staff Considerations 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 1-17 

Figure 1-6. Nonlinear battlefield 

 
This page intentionally left blank. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 ) 2-1

Chapter 2 

Additional Sources of Meteorological Information 

There are additional sources of meteorological (MET) information when MET data is 

not available from organic assets. This chapter discusses these sources. 

ALLIED NATIONS 

2-1. Because there will be occasions when the artillery of one nation may wish to use the MET data 

produced by the MET services of another, standard forms of MET message structure and standards have 

been agreed upon. Through North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) standardization agreements 

(STANAGs) the U.S., along with several of its allies, has adopted a standard database from which all MET 

information is derived. This means that atmospheric data can be freely exchanged among member 

countries with the assurance that the same atmospheric standards were used. Member countries produce 

ballistic data that is applicable to U.S. Army weapons systems. When exchanging data between member 

countries, commanders and operations officers must ensure that the validity criteria explained in chapter 1 

are applied. MET station leaders can advise commanders and operations officers on these matters. The 

following is a list of countries that have adopted these standards: 

z Belgium 

z Bulgaria 

z Canada 

z Czech Republic 

z Denmark 

z Estonia 

z France 

z Germany 

z Greece 

z Hungary 

z Iceland 

z Italy 

z Latvia 

z Lithuania 

z Luxembourg 

z Netherlands 

z Norway 

z Poland 

z Portugal 

z Romania 

z Slovakia 

z Slovenia 

z Spain 

z Turkey 

z United Kingdom 

z United States 
Chapter 2 

2-2 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

U.S. AIR FORCE 

2-2. The United States Air Force (USAF) currently has fixed and deployable weather teams deployed 

throughout the world capable of performing upper air soundings. The information they gather cannot be 

used for ballistic solutions to the gunnery problem; however, this information can be used by chemical 

sections for downwind predictions when fallout messages from organic MET sections are not available. 

This additional source of MET does not relieve U.S. Army MET sections of the responsibility; however, 

this information can be provided when the U.S. Army cannot produce the data. When available, these 

teams will normally be employed at corps or higher; however, they could be positioned in areas forward of 

the division main. Other USAF assets include special observation weather teams (SOWTs) attached to 

Special Forces Groups. When approved by the group commander, SOWT members may assist operational 

detachments in gathering critical weather observations in denied areas to support deep strike operations. 

This SOWT-derived information is obtained through coordination with the Special Operations Command 

and Control Element normally attached to corps and higher levels. The weather data gathered through 

SOWTs in cross-FLOT/fire support coordination line (FSCL) areas are similar in scope to that derived by 

forward area limited observation program operations conducted in corps/division operational areas. 

Although this information is unsuitable for MET ballistic gunnery solutions, it may prove invaluable for 

deep attack (missile/rocket) targeting solutions for chemical downwind predictive measurements. Fire 

support coordinators (FSCOORDs)/Fires Cell (FC) should consider SOWT capabilities when conducting 

mission analysis for deep strike operations. 

U.S. NAVY 

2-3. The U.S. Navy has mobile environmental teams capable of sounding the atmosphere and producing 

ballistic data. The message produced is in STANAG format. These teams are deployed on a mission basis. 

The teams are composed of one to five members. They typically support their own units, but also support 

joint operations and could be requested to support U.S. Army artillery operations. Requests for support 

must be coordinated well in advance of the time of need. 

2-4. The U.S. Navy produces the worldwide forecast model data using the Navy Operational Global 

Atmospheric Prediction System (NOGAPS). The data is not direct MET observation data, but resultant 

forecast data created after analysis. The NOGAPS data is broadcast via satellite twice daily (every 12 

hours) by the Air Force Weather Agency (AFWA). Each transmission provides 72 hours of valid data. 

MARINE CORPS 

2-5. The Marine Corps fields four MET teams per artillery regiment. Each team is equipped with the 

AN/TMQ-49 Meteorological Station Group (MSG), which includes the AN/TMQ-41 meteorological 

measuring set (MMS), as well as visual meteorological measuring equipment (PI-BAL). These teams are 

capable of producing meteorological data in useable formats for artillery, mortar, target acquisition assets, 

nuclear biological and chemical downwind data and data that can be incorporated into meteorological 

models. 

NUMERICAL WEATHER PREDICTION 

2-6. Current operational concepts, which address the full spectrum of warfare, require that additional 

capabilities are available to support indirect fires. Marine Air-Ground Task Force (MAGTF) concepts such 

as Distributed Operations, Over the Horizon operations, and Ship to Objective Maneuver (STOM) 

operations must rely on non-hardware based solutions such as numerical weather prediction. Groups such 

as the Joint Air Force and Army Weather Information Network (JAAWIN) and the Fleet Numerical 

Meteorological Oceanographic Center (FNMOC) have implemented web-based interfaces to access 

modeled meteorological data forming the foundation of numeric weather prediction in support of indirect 

fires. Numeric weather prediction has been characterized with excellent results out to 500 kilometers, but 

has not yet been certified by the Army. Any backup capabilities should only be used when MMS or MMSP systems are not available. 
Additional Sources of Meteorological Information 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 2-3 

2-7. Numerical Weather Prediction takes into account historical, topographical, climatological weather 

data, as well as vertical and horizontal resolutions, to form a mesoscale model of the atmosphere. Local 

Upper Air Observations ((Radiosonde Observations) in the form of World Meteorological Organization 

(WMO) messages can be ingested into this model to refine the numerical data and decrease model bias. 

The resolution chosen for a certain region will determine how many MET points are available to pull 

numerical data from a particular area. There are currently three different resolutions used: 45 kilometers, 

15 kilometers, and 5 kilometers. (see figures 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3) 

2-8. The 45-kilometer resolution is the least preferred resolution. When this resolution is chosen for an 

area of operations, the using unit could be a maximum of 22.5 kilometers away from the closest MET 

point. The 45-kilometer resolution can produce a numerical forecast every 3 hours for up to 72 hours in 

advance. 

Figure 2-1. 45 kilometers 

NOTE: Using 45-kilometer resolution, your MET point can be up to 22.5 kilometers away from 

the requesting unit. 

2-9. The 15-kilometer resolution is available in most regions. When using the 15 kilometers for an area, 

the using unit could be a maximum of 7.5 kilometers away from the closest MET point. The numerical 

forecast from the 15-kilometer resolution can be produced every 3 hours for up to 48 hours in advance. 

Non-classified Internet Protocol Router Network (NIPRNET) is required to obtain 45 kilometers and 15 

kilometers data. 
Chapter 2 

2-4 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure 2-2. 15 kilometers 

NOTE: Using 15-kilimeter resolution, your MET location can be up to 7.5 kilometers away 

from the requesting unit. 

2-10. The 5-kilimeter resolution is the preferred resolution when available. However, it is currently only 

available in contingency areas and other locations for brief periods of time during testing operations or 

upon special requests. Five-kilometer resolutions are only available on the Secret Internet Protocol Router 

Network (SIPRNET). When the 5-kilometer resolution is selected for an area, the using unit could be a 

maximum of 2.5 kilometers away from the closest MET point. The 5-kilometer resolution can produce a 

numerical forecast every hour on the hour for up to 24 hours in advance. Currently, 5 kilometers is the best 

resolution available. A 1.66-kilometer resolution will soon be available via the SIPRNET as well. Data 

obtained from Numerical Weather Prediction is usually manually entered into fire direction programs. 

Remember that when operating in contingency areas, the best resolution possible will always be available. 

Figure 2-3. 5 kilometers 
Additional Sources of Meteorological Information 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 2-5 

NOTE: Using 5-kilometer resolution, your MET location can be up to 2.5 kilometers away from 

the requesting unit. 

2-11. Commanders should consider this capability as a viable option for Meteorological support, if their 

MMS or MMS–Profiler are not operational and should always; whenever possible, consult Meteorological 

personnel for the best available option of Meteorological support for a specific area of operations. For 

more information on numerical weather prediction, contact the Meteorology Instruction School, Fort Sill, 

Oklahoma. 

NOTE: If the altitude on the Computer Meteorological Message (METCM) is different from the 

firing battery altitude, the Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS) will adjust 

the pressure and temperature to the altitude of the firing battery, however the winds will not be 

changed. 
This page intentionally left blank. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 3-1

Chapter 3 

Weather and Its Effects 

Weather greatly impacts military operations. Weather data is part of the intelligence 

information required to plan and conduct combat operations. This chapter discusses 

terms and the impact weather has on the field artillery operations. 

SECTION I ELEMENTARY METEOROLOGY 

3-1. Meteorology is the science dealing with the earth's atmosphere and its phenomena, including weather 

and climate. Besides the physics, chemistry, and dynamics of the atmosphere, MET includes many of the 

direct effects of the atmosphere on the earth's surface, the oceans, and life in general. MET effects such as 

wind, temperature, air density, and other phenomena influence military operations. 

ATMOSPHERE 

3-2. The atmosphere (figure 3-1) is the envelope of air that surrounds the earth in several distinct layers. 

It is the lower portion of the atmosphere that concerns artillery meteorologists. 

Figure 3-1. Earth’s atmosphere 
Chapter 3 

3-2 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

TROPOSPHERE

3-3. About three-quarters of the air in the atmosphere is compressed into the lowest layer, which is called 

the troposphere. In this layer, the change of temperature in relation to height is relatively large. It is the 

region where clouds form and air masses continuously mix. Within the troposphere, air consists of 78 

percent nitrogen; 21 percent oxygen; and 1 percent argon, carbon dioxide, and minute amounts of other 

gases. Air also contains variable amounts of water vapor and a mixture of minute impurities, such as 

particles of dust and salt. The thickness of the troposphere varies with the season of the year. However, it is 

generally 8 kilometers thick at the poles and 18 kilometers thick at the equator. 

TROPOPAUSE

3-4. The top of the troposphere is known as the tropopause. It is a transition zone between the 

troposphere and the stratosphere. It acts as a lid that tends to hold in the lower atmosphere. This lid 

contains occasional breaks and overlaps that provide paths for high-velocity winds called jet streams. The 

jet streams cause constant turbulence and mixing of the lower atmosphere. It is this mixing of air masses 

that causes our weather. The weather below the tropopause has the greatest effect on artillery operations. 

STRATOSPHERE

3-5. The layer immediately above the tropopause is the stratosphere. It has a stable temperature in the 

lower half of the layer and an almost complete lack of clouds. In the upper half of the stratosphere, at about 

25 kilometers, the temperature begins to increase with height up to about 50 kilometers at the stratopause. 

In the stratopause, the temperature is about the same as that at the earth’s surface. This warm region is 

caused by the presence of ozone, which absorbs part of the ultraviolet radiation from the sun. Without the 

ozone layer, life on earth would be difficult, if not impossible. Further layers are not discussed because 

artillery data is gathered only to an altitude of 30,000 meters. 

HEAT 

3-6. Determining the level of heat and how heat is transferred is significant when considering weather 

effects. 

3-7. Understanding the correlation of the different temperature scales enhances accuracy when utilizing 

or converting between the different temperature scales. 

CONVECTION

3-8. Convection is the transfer of heat by the physical movement of heated substances, such as liquid or 

gas. In MET, convection denotes vertical air motion.

CONDUCTION

3-9. Conduction is the transfer of heat between two parts of a stationary system caused by a temperature 

difference between the parts. Conduction warms the layer of air in contact with the earth's surface during 

daylight, which causes it to expand and become less dense. The less dense air rises and is replaced by 

cooler air, which is warmed in turn, thus creating a convective cell. 

TURBULENCE

3-10. On a small scale, this vertical motion is called turbulence and is quite irregular because of unequal 

heating and cooling over various types of terrain. On a large scale, the vertical motion in conjunction with 

the horizontal motion carries excess heat from equatorial regions to the cooler areas at higher latitudes. 

This mass transfer of heat by means of large-scale movement of the atmosphere is essential in the overall 

heat balance of the world. 
Weather and Its Effects 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 3-3 

TEMPERATURE SCALES

3-11. There are three different scales used to express temperature. The most familiar is the Fahrenheit (F) 

scale. On the Fahrenheit scale, the freezing point of water is 32 degrees. Another scale is the Celsius (C) 

scale on which the freezing point of water is O degrees. The third scale is the Kelvin (K) scale on which 

the freezing point of water is 273.2 degrees. The Kelvin scale has no negative values and is often used for 

temperature computations. A direct relation exits between these scales (figure 3-2). 

Figure 3-2. Temperature scales 

MOISTURE 

3-12. The various forms of moisture are more involved with weather than any other weather aspects. 

Almost no important weather takes place without it. Without some form of moisture, there would be no 

clouds or precipitation. 

3-13. The discussion of water vapor and relative humidity is essential to understanding the development 

process of many significant aspects of weather. 

WATER VAPOR

3-14. The oceans provide the major source of moisture for the air. Every day the energy from the sun 

transforms millions of tons of water into water vapor. Air currents then distribute the water vapor within 

the atmosphere. Though water vapor represents only a small percentage of the atmospheric gases, it is by 

far the most important in relation to weather processes. There is an upper limit to the amount of water 

vapor that can be contained in any given volume of air at a specific temperature. Warm air can hold more 

water than cool air. 
Chapter 3 

3-4 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

RELATIVE HUMIDITY

3-15. The moisture content of air can be expressed in several different terms. However, the most common 

term is relative humidity. Relative humidity is the ratio (percentage) of the actual amount of water vapor 

present in the air to the maximum amount of water vapor the air could hold at the existing pressure and 

temperature. As the air cools and its ability to hold water vapor decreases, the percentage of relative 

humidity increases until saturation (100 percent) occurs. At this saturation point, water vapor begins to 

condense into water droplets around particles of salt or dust in the atmosphere. As droplets grow bigger 

and heavier, they eventually fall toward the earth as rain or snow, depending on the temperature of the 

atmospheric levels through which they pass. 

ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE 

DEFINITION

3-16. Since the atmosphere is a mixture of gases, it is quite natural to think of air as being very light in 

weight. However, the total weight of the entire atmosphere is tremendous. If the entire weight of the 

atmosphere were replaced by an equal weight of water, the water would cover the earth's entire surface to a 

depth of 10 meters. The weight of the air pressing down upon itself produces atmospheric pressure. 

Pressure is continuously changing, mainly because of changes in air density brought about by variations in 

temperature and moisture content. At higher altitudes in the air column, the air pressure is less because 

there is less air above the higher altitude. More specifically, atmospheric pressure is the weight of a column 

of air that extends upward to the top of the atmosphere. (See figure 3-3.) 

Figure 3-3. Atmospheric pressure 

PRESSURE MEASUREMENT

3-17. Air pressure is measured with barometers and reported in millibars (mb). One type of barometer is 

mercurial, which is very accurate but not portable. A mercurial barometer measures air pressure in inches 
Weather and Its Effects 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 3-5 

of mercury, which are then converted to millibars. Another type of barometer is the aneroid, which 

measures air pressure in millibars and is portable. A third type of barometer is a digital device that 

measures and displays pressure. Artillery MET sections use the aneroid and digital barometers. 

CLOUDS 

3-18. Most weather phenomena are associated either directly or indirectly with clouds. Therefore, observer 

personnel must understand the significance of clouds. This enables them to make pertinent and timely 

decisions on the effect of weather on operations. 

CLOUD COMPOSITION

3-19. Clouds are composed of millions of water droplets and/or ice crystals suspended in the atmosphere. 

Condensation 

3-20. Condensation is the process whereby water vapor is changed into small droplets of water. For 

condensation to occur there must be something present in the atmosphere upon which the water vapor can 

condense. Virtually billions of minute particles, which result from ordinary dust, combustion products, and 

sea salt crystals, exist in the atmosphere. These particles are condensation nuclei. Condensation of water 

vapor upon these particles forms clouds and fog. Condensation may result from a decrease in temperature, 

a decrease of pressure, or an increase of water vapor in the air. In the atmosphere, condensation normally 

occurs when warm, moist air rises and cools by expansion. Frontal activity, terrain features, and unequal 

heating of land and sea surfaces cause the air to be lifted. 

Precipitation 

3-21. Precipitation is visible moisture, either liquid or solid, that falls from a cloud to the surface of the 

earth. It occurs when the cloud particles become so large that the pull of gravity overcomes the buoyant 

force of the surrounding air in the cloud. The size of cloud droplets may be increased by collisions with 

other droplets or by the freezing of super-cooled water droplets on ice crystals. 

Virga 

3-22. Clouds do not always produce precipitation since the initial water droplets are extremely small and 

simply float in the atmosphere. Precipitation may fall from clouds without reaching the earth’s surface 

because on many occasions it evaporates before reaching the surface. This phenomenon is called virga. 

CLOUD CATEGORIES

3-23. Clouds are classified by their appearance and the physical processes that produce them. All clouds, 

by their shape, fall into two general categories, cumuliform (cumulus) and stratiform (stratus) (Seefigure3-

4.) 

Cumulus 

3-24. Cumulus means heaped or accumulated. Cumulus clouds look that way because they are always 

formed by rising air currents. Cumulus clouds may produce local showers or severe thunderstorms and 

extremely strong vertical air currents. 

Stratus 

3-25. Stratus or sheets like, clouds are formed when a layer of air is cooled below its saturation point 

without pronounced vertical motion. The vertical thickness of stratiform-type clouds may range from 

several meters up to a few kilometers. Precipitation, if any, from stratiform clouds is generally continuous 

with only gradual changes in intensity and covers a relatively large area. 
Chapter 3 

3-6 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

CLOUD CLASSIFICATION

3-26. Clouds may be further classified as high, middle, low, and towering. (See figure 3-4.) 

Low 

3-27. When the bases of clouds are lower than 2,000 meters above the surface of the earth, the clouds 

generally are designated as cumulus or stratus, unless they are producing precipitation. In that case, they 

are referred to as cumulonimbus or nimbostratus. Nimbus means rain cloud. Another common low cloud, 

with some of the characteristics of both cumulus and stratus clouds, is called stratocumulus.

Middle

3-28. Between 2,000 and 6,000 meters, clouds generally are identified with the prefix alto preceding the 

cloud name. Altocumulus and altostratus clouds are in this category.

High 

3-29. Above 6,000 meters, clouds are composed of ice crystals and generally have a delicate appearance. 

These clouds are designated as cirrocumulus and cirrostratus. At still greater altitudes, a fibrous type of 

cloud, which appears as curly wisps and is composed of ice crystals, is designated as cirrus. 

Towering 

3-30. Bases of towering clouds may be as low as the typical low clouds, but their tops may extend to, or 

even above, the tropopause. 
Weather and Its Effects 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 3-7 

Figure 3-4. Cloud types 

AIR CIRCULATION

3-31. Simple atmospheric circulation is the movement of air over the surface of the earth. Solar radiation is 

the energy source that heats the atmosphere and sets it into motion. The equator receives the greatest 

amount of solar heating, whereas the poles receive the least. This unequal heating creates temperature 

differences between various locations on the earth. The temperature differences produce pressure changes 

that cause air motion in our atmosphere. 

General Circulation 

3-32. General air circulation can be explained by the three-cell theory. Hot, moist air near the equator rises 

to high altitudes and flows toward the poles. As the air rises and travels away from the equator, it cools and 

dries, becoming denser. Some of the cold, dry air sinks back to the surface at about 30 degrees latitude. 

Some of the descending air returns to the equator, replacing the rising, less dense air. Thus, the first cell of 

circulation is complete. The remainder of the descending air at 30 degrees latitude travels toward the poles 

along the earth's surface. At about 60 degrees latitude, this cool air meets the very cold air flowing along 

the surface away from the poles. The cool air is forced upward until it rejoins the remaining upper air 

moving from the equator to the poles. Thus, the second and third cells of circulation are formed. (See 

figure 3-5.) Within this general pattern of circulation, several semi-permanent pressure regions exist. Low-
Chapter 3 

3-8 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

pressure regions exist at the equator and at 60 degrees latitude. High-pressure regions exist at 30 degrees 

latitude and in the polar regions. 

Figure 3-5. General circulation pattern 

Earth’s Effect on General Circulation 

3-33. Irregular formations of land and water, the rotation of the earth, and the tilted axis of the earth affect 

air circulation. Because water heats and cools much slower than does land, local patterns are set up and 

superimposed on the general flow. High pressures form over land during winter and over the oceans during 

summer. This results in large-scale seasonal circulation, such as the monsoon. On a smaller scale, this 

unequal heating causes a daily circulation pattern along the shoreline. During fair weather, the land is 

warmed by the sun during the day and cooled by terrestrial radiation at night. This creates a sea breeze by 

day and a land breeze by night. The rotation and tilted axis of the earth affect circulation patterns. 

Secondary Circulation 

3-34. When air circulates, several forces act to create disturbances and irregularities in the lower levels of 

the troposphere. The result is secondary circulation, which consists of moving pressure systems that are 

smaller than the general circulation patterns. These forces are as follows: 

z Pressure gradient force. 

z Coriolis force. 

z Centrifugal force. 

z Frictional force. 
Weather and Its Effects 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 3-9 

Pressure Gradient Force 

3-35. The pressure gradient force tends to move air from high to low pressure, normally both vertically 

and horizontally. Since pressure decreases with altitude, an upward force exists. Vertical air motion may 

occur over large areas where the mean vertical velocities generally are very slow. Vertical air motion that is 

restricted to a small column (an updraft) may have velocities greater than 20 knots. Pressure also varies in 

the horizontal between surface pressure systems. This produces horizontal pressure gradients, which tend 

to displace the air in the direction of the lower pressure. Although vertical air motion is important in cloud 

formation and weather, the large-scale wind systems throughout the world consist mainly of horizontal air 

motion. 

Coriolis Force 

3-36. If the earth did not rotate, the air would always move directly toward lower pressure. However, the 

rotation of the earth causes a deflective force, Coriolis force, which tends to counteract both the vertical 

and horizontal pressure gradient forces. Coriolis force causes moving air to deflect to the right in the 

Northern Hemisphere and to the left in the Southern Hemisphere. 

Centrifugal Force 

3-37. Lines of constant pressure (isobars) usually are curved around pressure systems. This curvature 

results in a centrifugal force upon the wind. The effect of the centrifugal force depends on the speed and 

the existing path of the air. In high latitudes, the Coriolis force has a greater effect than does the centrifugal 

force. However, near the equator, centrifugal force has a greater effect. 

Friction 

3-38. Friction tends to slow air movement. Frictional effects on the air are greatest near the ground, but 

they also are carried aloft by turbulence. Surface friction has a slowing effect on the wind up to about 

2,000 feet. Above 2,000 feet, altitude friction effects are negligible. 

AIR MASSES 

3-39. The physical properties of air masses are largely determined by the type of surface over which they 

form. A source region for an air mass is an extensive portion of the earth’s surface on which temperature 

and moisture properties are fairly uniform. The time required for a mass of air to acquire the properties of 

an underlying surface varies greatly with the surface and, in some cases, may take a period of weeks. 

CONTINENTAL AND MARITIME MASSES

3-40. The type of surface determines the basic moisture properties of an air mass. The latitude establishes 

the basic temperature characteristics of an air mass. The two types of surfaces are continental (land) and 

maritime (oceanic). The location at which the air mass is formed is either polar or tropical. Therefore, air 

masses originating in polar regions over land are called continental polar, and air masses formed in tropical 

regions over the ocean are called maritime tropical. 

MOVEMENT OF AIR MASSES

3-41. When an air mass leaves its source region, the state of equilibrium that existed with the underlying 

surface becomes disturbed and the air mass undergoes a modification. The degree of modification depends 

on the contrast with the underlying surface and the speed at which the air mass is traveling. The 

modification process is important. It affects the stability of the air mass, which, in turn, influences the type 

of weather that may be expected. For example, when a continental polar air mass moves over a warmer 

surface, it absorbs heat from the surface and develops instability in its lower levels because cold air is lying 

on top of a warm surface. This unstable condition leads to convective activity and the formation of 

cumulus clouds. The cumulus clouds may provide showers or possibly thunderstorms. 
Chapter 3 

3-10 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Fronts 

3-42. When two or more different air masses come together, the boundary on the surface between the air 

masses is called a front. Fronts are classified by the relative motion of the warm and cold air masses. The 

frontal system may be from 10 to 500 kilometers wide, the width varying with the type of front. The height 

of the front may vary considerably because the frontal surface is not vertical. This is due to the differing 

densities of the two air masses. The colder air, which is denser (and thus heavier), always wedges under the 

warmer air mass, causing the warmer air to be lifted. All true fronts actually separate distinct air masses of 

different densities. A frontal position is characterized by a distinct change in wind direction. The weather 

associated with fronts is called frontal weather and is more complex and variable than air mass weather. 

The type and intensity of frontal weather largely depend on such factors as the slope of the frontal surface, 

the amount of moisture, the stability of the air masses, and the speed of frontal movement. Because of the 

variability of these factors, frontal weather may range from a minor wind shift with no clouds to 

thunderstorms, hail, and severe turbulence. The passage of a front may cause rather abrupt changes in the 

weather. 

Cold Front 

3-43. When cold air displaces warm air at the earth's surface, it is called a cold front (figure 3-6). A slowmoving cold front has a rather gentle slope. However, as the front accelerates, the slope becomes steeper 

(more vertical) near the surface because of the friction of the terrain. Cold fronts normally move faster and 

have steeper slopes than warm fronts. The advancing wedge of cold air lifts the lighter warm air mass and 

produces a relatively narrow band of clouds. 

Figure 3-6. Cold front 

3-44. The type of clouds formed by the cold front depends on the properties of the air masses involved and 

the speed of the frontal system. Fast-moving cold fronts, when lifting moist, unstable air, generate 

cumuliform clouds that are slightly ahead of the front. A line of thunderstorms that frequently develops 

parallel to and some distance ahead of rapidly moving cold fronts may have cloud systems that extend to 

the rear of the surface position of the front. The clouds are mainly stratiform when the warm air is moist 

and stable. When the warm air is quite dry, little or no cloudiness occurs with the passage of a cold front. 

At the surface, the passage of a cold front is characterized by— 

z An abrupt decrease in temperature. 

z A marked shift of surface wind, usually greater than 90 degrees. 
Weather and Its Effects 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 3-11 

z A decrease in moisture content of the air. 

z A marked decrease in pressure as the front approaches, followed by a rising pressure after the 

front passes. 

Warm Front 

3-45. When warm air replaces cold air at the surface, it is called a warm front (figure 3-7). The speed of 

the advancing warm air is greater than that of the retreating cold air. Therefore, the warm air flows upward 

over the sloping wedge of dense, cold air. The force of the rising warm air slowly pushes the cold air back. 

The effect of the earth's surface causes the slope of the warm front to be very flat. The dimensions of a 

warm front wedge range from 100 to 300 kilometers horizontal distance with an altitude from 0 to 1 

kilometer. With the same winds, the speed of a warm front is about half that of a cold front. The clouds 

associated with a warm front are mainly stratiform and extend well ahead of the surface position of the 

front. The weather depends largely on the stability and moisture content of the overrunning air. Steady 

precipitation with low ceiling and limited visibility is normal in advance of warm fronts. At the surface, the 

passage of a warm front is characterized by— 

z A marked increase in temperature. 

z A slight shift of surface wind, usually less than 90 degrees. 

z An increase in moisture content of the air. 

z A decrease in pressure as the front approaches, followed by a leveling off or slowly rising 

pressure after the front passes. 

Figure 3-7. Warm front 

Occluded Front 

3-46. An occluded front is formed when a cold front overtakes a warm front and forces aloft the warm air 

that originally occupied the space between the two fronts. There are two types of occlusions: the warm 

front occlusion (figure 3-8) and the cold front occlusion (figure 3-9). The type that will occur depends on 

whether the cold air of the advancing cold front is colder or warmer than the retreating wedge of cold air in 

advance of the warm front. However, the essential point in both warm and cold front occlusions is that two 

cold air masses meet and force the warm air aloft. This causes extensive cloudiness. The weather 

associated with an occlusion depends on the properties of the three air masses involved. 
Chapter 3 

3-12 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Stationary Front 

3-47. On occasion, both warm and cold air masses contain almost equal amounts of energy and neither can 

move appreciably. During the period when little or no frontal movement takes place, the system is known 

as a stationary front. The weather associated with a stationary front is quite similar to that with a warm 

front. 

Figure 3-8. Warm front occlusion 

Figure 3-9. Cold front occlusion 

SECTION II WEATHER AS IT APPLIES TO THE ARTILLERY 

FIELD ARTILLERY MET 

3-48. Field artillery MET deals with the techniques and procedures for determining current atmospheric 

conditions. Atmospheric conditions along the trajectory of a projectile or rocket directly affect its accuracy 

and may cause the projectile or rocket to miss the desired point of impact. A 5 to 10 percent effect on the 
Weather and Its Effects 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 3-13 

firing tables is possible even with stable atmospheric conditions. For example, tests in Southwest Asia have 

shown that firing artillery at maximum ranges in extreme heat and low air density resulted in MET 

corrections up to 4,700 meters. 

3-49. MET data is one of the prerequisites for accurate predicted fire. With today's emphasis on first round 

fire for effect and trends toward longer distances, accurate MET corrections for artillery fires are crucial. 

The use of invalid or no MET corrections could cause artillery projectiles to impact on friendly troops. 

Accurate MET data must be obtained and appropriate corrections applied to all fires to— 

z Conserve ammunition. 

z Decrease time in adjustment. 

z Obtain a greater surprise effect. 

z Reduce the potential for fratricide. 

3-50. Despite automation, all MET section crew members should have a common understanding of certain 

atmospheric and ballistic terms and the effects of MET conditions on artillery fires. Supervisors also must 

be able to recognize adverse weather changes that could abruptly negate the accuracy of MET messages. 

ATMOSPHERIC TERMS

3-51. In addition to the weather-related terms identified earlier in this chapter, there are other atmospheric 

terms used consistently by the FA MET crew member. They are called ballistic terms and are discussed in 

the following paragraphs. 

Standard Atmosphere 

3-52. When computing trajectories, ordnance ballisticians use the International Civil Aviation 

Organization (ICAO) standard atmosphere. This standard atmosphere is the basis for all data of the ballistic 

solution as well as a point of departure for ballistic MET corrections. The ICAO atmosphere at sea level is 

described as follows: 

z Dry air. 

z No wind. 

z Surface temperature of 15 Celsius degrees with a decrease, or lapse rate, of -6.5 Celsius degrees 

per 1,000 meters up to a height of 11,000 meters and a constant temperature of -56.5 Celsius 

degrees between 11,000 and 25,000 meters. 

z Surface pressure of 1,013.25 millibars, decreasing with height. 

z Surface density of 1,225 grams per cubic meter (gm/m3), decreasing with height. 

Atmospheric Zones 

3-53. For convenience in computing, reporting, and applying corrections, the standard atmosphere is 

further identified by atmospheric zones. The atmospheric zones for various MET messages and the 

thickness and heights of the zones are in table 3-1. 
Chapter 3 

3-14 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table 3-1. Atmospheric Structure of MET Message 

HEIGHT LINE (ZONE) NUMBERS 

(meters) COMPUTER BALLISTIC TARGET 

ACQUISITION 

SOUND 

RANGING 

FALLOUT 

SURFACE 0 0 0 0 0 

50 1 

100 2 

200 

1 1 

3 

1 

300 4 

400 5 2 

500 

2 2 

6 

600 7 3 

700 8 

800 9 4 

900 10 

1,000 

3 3 

11 

1,100 12 

1,200 13 

1,300 14 

1,400 15 

1,500 

4 4 

16 

1,600 17 

1,700 18 

1,800 19 

1,900 20 

2,000 

5 5 

21 

1 

2,100 22 

2,200 23 

2,300 24 

2,400 25 

2,500 

6 

26 

2,600 27 

3,000 7 

6 

3,500 8 

4,000 9 7 

2 

4,500 10 

5,000 11 8 

6,000 12 9 

3 

7,000 13 

8,000 14 10 4 

9,000 15 

10,000 16 11 5 

11,000 17 

12,000 18 12 6 

13,000 19 

14,000 20 13 7 

15,000 21 

16,000 22 

18,000 24 

14 8 

19,000 25 

20,000 26 10 

 ****** ***** 

30,000 15 
Weather and Its Effects 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 3-15 

Ballistic Wind 

3-54. Ballistic wind is a wind of constant speed and direction that has the same effect on a projectile 

during its flight as all the varying winds serially encountered by the projectile. 

Ballistic Density 

3-55. Ballistic density is a constant density, expressed as a percentage of standard density that has the same 

effect on a projectile's trajectory as the varying densities serially encountered by the projectile. 

Ballistic Temperature 

3-56. Ballistic temperature is a constant vertical temperature, expressed as a percentage of standard 

temperature that has the same effect on a projectile in flight as the varying temperatures serially 

encountered by the projectile. 

MET EFFECTS ON ARTILLERY

3-57. It is important to identify the weather effects on artillery because it provides MET personnel an 

understanding of the importance of the met section’s mission. 

3-58. The following text provides detailed information and a graphical explanation of how certain aspects 

of weather affects the artillery. 

Wind 

3-59. The effects of wind on a projectile are easy to understand. A tail wind causes an increase in range, 

and a head wind causes a decrease in range. A crosswind blows the projectile to the right or left, which 

causes a deflection error. FDC personnel convert ballistic wind measurements into range and deflection 

and apply corrections to the deflection and elevation of the artillery piece. Figures 3-10 and 3-11 show the 

effects of a 20-knot wind on a 155-millimeter howitzer firing at a range of 11,000 meters, charge 7 white 

bag (WB). 
Chapter 3 

3-16 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure 3-10. Effect of a 20-knot tail wind 

Figure 3-11. Effect of a 20-knot crosswind 

Temperature 

3-60. Variations in air temperature cause two separate effects on a projectile. One effect is caused by the 

inverse variation of density with temperature (equation of state). This effect is compensated for when 

density effects are considered. The second effect is regarded as the true temperature effect. It is the result 

of the relationship between the speed of the projectile and the speed of the air compression waves that form 

in front of or behind the projectile. These air compression waves move with the speed of sound, which is 

directly proportional to the air temperature. The relationship between the variation in air temperature and 

the drag on the projectile is difficult to determine. This is particularly true for supersonic projectiles since 

they break through the air compression waves after they are formed. As firing tables indicate, an increase 

in air temperature may increase, decrease, or have no effect on achieved range, depending on the initial 

elevation and muzzle velocity of the weapon. Figure 3-12 shows the effect of a 5-percent deviation from 

standard temperature. 
Weather and Its Effects 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 3-17 

Figure 3-12. Effect of temperature 

Density 

3-61. Density of the air through which a projectile passes creates friction that affects the forward 

movement of the projectile. This affects the distance the projectile travels. The density effect is inversely 

proportional to the projectile ranges; that is, an increase in density causes a decrease in range. Figure 3-13 

shows the effect of a 5-percent deviation from the standard air density. Air density decreases rapidly with 

height. Therefore, the altitude of the firing battery and the ordinate of the trajectory have a direct effect on 

the magnitude of the density correction. Given equal deviations from standard of each MET effect on the 

flight of a projectile, air density has the greatest range effect. 

Figure 3-13. Effect of density 

MESOSCALE MODELING 

3-62. Throughout history, man has attempted to predict weather and its effects. Advances in technology 

have allowed meteorologists to measure weather phenomenon on a global scale. This large scale data is of 

little use in predicting weather until it is evaluated against the factors affecting weather (terrain, 

temperature, bodies of water, vegetation, and others) and applied to a specific area. Scientists have 
Chapter 3 

3-18 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

developed computer modeling programs to evaluate the massive amounts of data, giving meteorologist a 

tool to accurately predict weather. 

3-63. Artillery MET sections are concerned with creating a vertical profile of the atmosphere, which is 

used by artillery units to develop more accurate firing solutions. Traditionally, this vertical profile of the 

atmosphere was created from surface observations and data collected from balloon-borne sondes. While 

this method provides accurate data at the MET section’s location, the further away the firing unit is located 

from the MET section the less effective the data for computing firing solutions. 

3-64. The Mesoscale model has been developed in order to provide sufficient data to create accurate 

vertical profiles. The vertical profiles can be generated anywhere within a 60-kilometer radius of the MET 

section location. The MMS–P equipped MET section, using the Mesoscale model, can generate MET data 

on demand. 

3-65. The capability of the model to generate a vertical profile within a 60-kilometer radius of the MET 

section allows the system to generate target area MET for targets within the radius. The system generates a 

vertical profile over the target that is used to increase the accuracy of smart munitions. 

INITIALIZING THE MODEL

3-66. Model processing is done automatically by the MMS-P computers. Data from all available sources 

are incorporated into the model. The more data provided to the model, the more accurate the model output 

will be. 

3-67. While MET personnel cannot see the numerical values processed by the model, they can observe the 

system building each domain on the model status screen. The model status screen will indicate when each 

domain has completed processing. Additionally, the model status screen will provide information when 

output is available from each model run. 

Domains 

3-68. Initialization of the Mesoscale model begins with establishing domains. A domain is a grid system 

defining the geographic area for which MET data will be collected and processed. 

3-69. The MMS–P equipped MET section establishes three domains when initializing the system by 

entering each domain’s center point. The outer and largest domain measures 3,600 x 3,600 kilometers. It is 

divided into a grid of 36-kilometer squares and is referred to as the “36-kilometer domain.” Nested within 

the 36-kilometer domain, and using the same center point, lies a 1,500 x 1,500-kilometer area divided into 

a grid of 12-kilometer squares and referred to as the “12-kilometer domain.” Nested within the 12-

kilometer domain, and using a center point that does not have to be the same as the other grids, lies a 500 x 

500-kilometer area divided into a grid of 4-kilometer squares known as the “4-kilometer domain.” Figure 

3-14 shows the nested domains. 
Weather and Its Effects 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 3-19 

Figure 3-14. Nested domains 

3-70. The MM5 model first builds the 36-kilometer domain. The model applies terrain data to the grid 

acquired from the National Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA) Digital Terrain Elevation Data (DTED) 

database contained on the system computers. Terrain data includes elevation, land use (vegetation), and 

land-water mask information. 

3-71. The MM5 model next applies worldwide forecast model data generated by the Naval Operational 

Global Atmospheric Prediction System (NOGAPS). NOGAPS data is not direct MET observation data, but 

resultant forecast data created after analysis. NOGAPS data is broadcast via satellite twice daily by the Air 

Force Weather Agency (AFWA). Each transmission provides the MMS–P equipped section with 72 hours 

of forecast data. The MM5 model requires a minimum of 24 hours of valid NOGAPS data to be able to 

initialize. 

3-72. In addition to the NOGAPS data, the model applies surface observations and local observations 

(upper air data generated by balloon-borne sondes) acquired by the MET section. Additional local 

observations acquired by other MET sections in the area of operations can also be used by the model to 

increase the accuracy of the output. 

3-73. The MM5 model data from the computation of the 36-kilometer domain is used to compute the 12-

kilometer domain. The data generated from the computation of the 12-kilometer domain is used to compute 

the 4-kilometer domain. This results in a refined vertical profile of the atmosphere in each domain up to 

30,000 meters. The MM5 model reinitializes every 30 minutes using the newest inputs. This allows the 

MM5 model to generate freshest possible data. Figure 3-15 shows the atmospheric profile. 
Chapter 3 

3-20 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure 3-15. Atmospheric profile 

3-74. The MET domain establishes for the mesoscale model and the post processor its “area of 

operations.” The default location for the MET domain is the profiler location in the center of the 4-

kilometer resolution of 500 x 500-kilometer grid. This coverage should be sufficient for most operations. 

The MET domain center however can be different than the profiler location. This is useful if the line of 

march/operational area is known for the mission. For example, given a line of march moving in a due north 

direction, a profiler could be located at the southern edge (60 kilometers from the MET domain end) of the 

MET domain (figure 3-16). This gives the profiler greater coverage as it moves north with friendly forces. 

This is important as the model reduces its error over time if left running without a change in domain. If 

either the MET domain changes or the system is shutdown the model will need to rerun. 
Weather and Its Effects 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 3-21 

Figure 3-16. MET Domain Profiler Location 

UNIFIED POST PROCESSING SYSTEM

3-75. Once the MM5 model is initialized, the MMS–P equipped system is prepared to generate MET data 

upon demand based on type of MET data required. The data from the model alone is not sufficiently 

accurate for use by artillery units. The data from the model is transferred to the Unified Post Processing 

System (UPPS). 

Nowcasts 

3-76. The UPPS processes the MM5 model output, surface observations data, and upper air data to reduce 

model bias to produce a nowcast, which can be reformatted into the type of MET message requested by the 

user. The UPPS repeatedly recycles, creating nowcasts using the newest available data. 

3-77. A request for MET from a user contains the gun location and the target location. The UPPS 

identifies the gun location and the target location within the model domain. Using the current nowcast, the 

UPPS generates the requested MET data based on the midpoint between the gun location and the target 

location. The resulting data is input into the appropriate message format and sent to the Common Message 
Chapter 3 

3-22 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Processor for verification and transmission to the requesting user. Figure 3-17 shows the reference point 

where MET data was generated when requested. 

Figure 3-17. MET data reference point 

MET EFFECTS ON SMART MUNITIONS 

3-78. MET conditions at the target location effects the accuracy of smart munitions. Smart munitions are 

subject to the same affects of wind, temperature, and humidity as a free flight projectile. These effects are 

moderated by the ability of smart munitions to make in-flight corrections using passive guidance methods. 

The greatest effect of MET conditions on smart munitions is the effect of conditions on the ability of the 

smart munitions acquiring targets. Smart munitions that acquire targets by visual means can have difficulty 

identifying targets when the target area is obscured by clouds or blowing sand and other adverse 

conditions. 

3-79. The MMS–P equipped section can generate a target area MET message. This knowledge of the 

target area MET can be used to increase the accuracy of smart munitions or can influence the decision to 

utilize these expensive munitions. The MET conditions may be such that fire planners will select a 

different asset to engage the target. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 4-1 

Chapter 4 

Operating Principles 

Although the operating principles of the Meteorological Measuring Set (MMS) 

system and the Meteorological Measuring Set – Profiler (MMS–P) system are very 

different, the principles of data collection are basically the same with a few 

exceptions. This chapter discusses these principles and differences beginning with the 

navigational aid systems and then describes the operating modes. 

SECTION I MMS SECTIONS 

4-1. The MMS equipped section produces MET data from upper-air data collected by balloon-borne 

radiosondes. The MMS uses one of three operating modes to track the radiosonde. These operating modes 

are Long-Range Aid to Navigation (LORAN) , Radio Direction Finding (RDF), and Global Positioning 

System (GPS) 

NAVIGATIONAL AID (NAVAID) SYSTEM 

4-2. The NAVAID system producing signals suitable for use by MET sections is Long Range Aid to 

Navigation (LORAN). A NAVAID signal receiver inside a radiosonde in flight receives transmissions 

from groups of fixed stations. The radiosonde then transmits the NAVAID information to the ground 

equipment. The differences in the time of arrival of the signal and the phases of the signals are computed 

by using triangulation to determine the geographical position of the radiosonde. 

4-3. The LORAN system is an established low-frequency commercial navigational system. The LORAN 

produces a highly stable ground wave that can be received about 2,000 kilometers from the system 

transmitters. Ideal atmospheric conditions can extend the range of LORAN system transmitters to 8,000 

kilometers. 

4-4. The LORAN system currently has several operational groups of stations called chains. These chains 

cover a substantial part of the world's coastal areas. One station of each chain is the primary transmitting 

station, identified as the master station. The others are secondary stations. The primary and secondary 

transmitters emit synchronized signals that radiate away from the antenna. 

4-5. The map at figure 4-1 represents a LORAN chain in the southeastern part of the United States. It has 

five transmitting stations. Station M, or Malone, is the primary station. Assume, for example, that a 

NAVAID radiosonde is operating aloft at point R on the map. The signals received by the radiosonde from 

stations W, M, and Z arrive at different times. The met system receives and processes these different arrival 

times. The met system then determines the phase relationship of the signals received from the radiosonde. 

Finally, the met system converts the information into wind data aloft. A list of LORAN chains is at 

appendix F. 
Chapter 4 

4-2 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure 4-1. Southeast U.S. chain 

4-6. In the NAVAID mode the met section can operate from a fixed location, while on the move, or the 

section can conduct a remote launch. 

4-7. Fixed location operations allow the met section to provide continuous met coverage for a particular 

area of interest. 

4-8. Mobile operations allow a met section to start a NAVAID sounding before moving to another site. 

The system will continue to process data while the section is moving and messages can be transmitted once 

the section has stopped in the new location. Mobile operations allow an uninterrupted sounding schedule. 

The operations officer should consider this capability when planning met section employment. 

4-9. Remote launch allows the section to release balloon-borne radiosondes from a position up to 20 

kilometers from the primary section location. Remote launch allows data to be collected close to the area of 

interest without displacing the entire section. When coordinated properly, this capability can greatly 

increase the AMV of one section. Limiting factors of remote launch are detailed in the paragraphs below. 

4-10. During offensive operations, supported units may move quickly forward out of AMV coverage. 

Remote launch helps to provide continuous availability of valid MET data to rapidly moving artillery units. 

An example of a routine use of the NAVAID remote launch capability is to deploy a balloon launch team 

forward with artillery advance parties. The launch team receives commands from the primary section 

location by radio. On arrival at the remote launch site, the team takes surface measurements and launches 

the balloon on command of the section headquarters. The launch team either returns immediately to the 

primary section location, travel to a second remote launch site, or remain at its present location. Figure 4-2 

shows a graphic example of remote launch capability. 
Operating Principles 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 4-3

Figure 4-2. Remote launch capability 

4-11. Each remote launch mission is different and requires extensive planning before execution. The 

operations officer and the MET station leader plan remote launches and incorporate them into the MET 

section positioning scheme. 

RDF OPERATIONS 

4-12. The RDF operating mode is designed to be used whenever NAVAID systems are unavailable. It only 

operates from a fixed location. A ground device tracks the path of a radiosonde as it rises in the 

atmosphere. Angular and meteorological data are passed on to the equipment shelter for processing and 

dissemination. 

GPS OPERATIONS 

4-13. The GPS operating mode uses satellites to track the path of the radiosonde as it rises in the 

atmosphere. Angular and meteorological data are passed to the equipment shelter for processing and 

dissemination. See appendix E for an explanation of GPS satellite coverage. 

SECTION II MMS–P SECTIONS 

4-14. Previous MET systems used upper air data collected from a balloon-borne radiosonde to generate 

MET data required to support operations. The MMS–P produces MET data from an atmospheric model of 

the operational area. While upper air data is collected by balloon-borne radiosondes, it is but one of the 

inputs utilized by the mesoscale modeling software (MM5). The additional inputs required by the MM5 

model are large-scale weather data received via satellite and area observations. 

4-15. Operational Modes for the MMS–P are described as operational mode (with model initialized) and 

degraded mode (without model initialized). In the operational mode, the AMV for the MMS–P is 60 

kilometers. When in degraded mode, the AMV for the MMS–P is reduced to 30 kilometers. This reduction 

in AMV requires the operations officer and MET station leader to adjust the MET section positioning 

scheme when the system is in degraded mode. 
Chapter 4 

4-4 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

SURFACE OBSERVATION DATA

4-16. Surface observation data is acquired using the TACMET surface sensor and provides the system 

with surface wind speed/direction, temperature, and air pressure at the section location. 

SOUNDING DATA

4-17. MMS–P equipped sections uses two modes for determining upper air data, LORAN-Commercial 

(LORAN-C) and GPS. 

LORAN-C MODE

4-18. A NAVAID signal receiver inside a radiosonde in flight receives transmissions from groups of fixed 

stations. The radiosonde then transmits the NAVAID information to the ground equipment. The 

differences in the time of arrival of the signal and the phases of the signals are computed by using 

triangulation to determine the geographical position of the radiosonde. 

4-19. The MMS–P is currently not capable of mobile operations. LORAN-C can only be performed from a 

fixed location. 

GPS MODE

4-20. The GPS operating mode uses satellites to track the path of the radiosonde as it rises in the 

atmosphere. Angular and meteorological data are passed to the equipment shelter for processing and 

dissemination. See appendix E for an explanation of GPS satellite coverage. 

4-21. The MMS–P is currently not capable of mobile operations. GPS can only be performed from a fixed 

location. 

NOGAPS DATA

4-22. The MMS–P requires large-scale weather data to initialize the MM5 model. This data is generated 

by the Naval Operational Global Atmospheric Prediction System (NOGAPS). This data is transferred to 

the Air Force Weather Agency (AFWA) where it is broadcast via satellite. Each transmission of NOGAPS 

data contains 72 hours of valid data. 

4-23. The MMS–P equipped section downloads NOGAPS transmissions using the Tactical-Very Small 

Aperture Terminal (T-VSAT). The NOGAPS data is processed by the system and made available to the 

MM5 model. A secondary method for input of NOGAPS data is using a CD-ROM. The CD-ROM can be 

created by another MMS–P with valid data or the data can be downloaded from the internet and written to 

a disk. The CD-ROM should be destroyed once the NOGAPS data is downloaded to the profiler. 

AREA OBSERVATIONS

4-24. Area observations are meteorological observations that come in via messages over the SINCGARS 

network from other MMS and MMS–P systems in the current theater of operations. While not required for 

the MMS–P to be operational, the area observation data is used to increase the accuracy of the model 

output. 

REGIONAL OBSERVATIONS

4-25. Regional Observations are transmitted hourly by Air Force Weather Teams. This information is 

downloaded via satellite using the T-VSAT and ingested by the MM5 Mesoscale model. 

DEGRADED MODE OPERATIONS 

4-26. When sufficient NOGAPS data is not available to initialize the MM5 model, the MMS–P system 

operates in degraded mode. In degraded mode, the MMS–P equipped section must conduct a sounding in 
Operating Principles 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 4-5

order to generate MET messages with valid data. The sounding data is processed by the Unified Post 

Processing System (UPPS). 

4-27. From the time the sonde is launched, it takes approximately 35 to 65 minutes for sounding data to be 

processed to the point where a MET message can be populated with data. Typically, the first run of the 

UPPS cycle that ingests sounding data contains data for MET zones zero through six. As the sounding 

progresses in altitude and feeds data to the system, subsequent MET zones will be populated. The operator 

can generate a MET message following each cycle of the UPPS until the number of levels required for the 

message is achieved. See figure 4-3 for an example timeline showing how degraded mode operates when 

initializing the system without valid NOGAPS data. 

NOTE: Times may vary depending on startup, initialization and sonde launch times. The 

timeline shows a scenario where it takes 35 minutes for sonde data to be made available and to 

be ingested by the UPPS. 

Figure 4-3. Example degraded mode timeline 

4-28. The MMS–P system returns to a fully operational mode upon receipt of valid NOGAPS data 

downloaded via T-VSAT antenna or input using a CD-ROM. The system computers have to be rebooted in 

order to return to a fully operational mode. 

SECTION III VISUAL MET 

PILOT BALLOON (PIBAL) OBSERVATIONS (USMC) 

4-29. The primary means to determine meteorological data is using electronic meteorological equipment. 

When electronic meteorological equipment fails or is not available, MET data may be determined from 

observation of pilot balloons along with approved MET software. MET data determined from PIBAL 

observation is not as accurate as MET data determined from electronic meteorological equipment. PIBAL 

is only accurate in the form of wind speed and wind direction. Temperature and pressure are derived from 

a set lapse rate based off the surface readings the operator provides to the Visual Meteorology Computer 

Program. 

4-30. PIBALs are issued in two sizes, 30-gram and 100-gram (representing the weights of the deflated 

balloons). Under various sky conditions, some colors are more easily detected by the eye than others. For 

this reason, PIBALs are issued in several colors, the most common being white, red, and black. The rule to 

remember when deciding which color balloon to use is “darker the sky the darker the balloon.” 

4-31. The rate of rise of the 30-gram balloon is approximately 180 meters per minute, after a steady rate of 

rise is attained. The rate of rise of a 100-gram balloon is approximately 300 meters per minute after a 

steady rate of rise is attained. 

4-32. Approximate cloud heights may be determined by timing the ascent of PIBAL, multiplying the time 

by the rate of rise to determine the height of the balloon. When timing the ascent of the PIBAL to 
Chapter 4 

4-6 FM 3-09.15/ MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

determine cloud height, the balloon is timed until it is obscured by the lowest level of clouds. Computing 

cloud height in this manner provides an approximate cloud height. 

INFLATING PIBALS

4-33. When inflating PIBALs, the nozzle ML-373/GM is connected to the hose ML-81. The ML-81 is 

connected to the gas cylinder. The ML-373/GM provides a valve for controlling the flow of gas, and to act 

as a calibrated weight to determine the correct amount of gas needed for inflation. The ML-373/GM may 

be used when inflating with helium or hydrogen. Therefore, when using the ML 373/GM with helium, you 

must use locally produced work sheet with properly computed times for tops of zones. 

4-34. The ML-373/GM nozzle has two connections at opposite ends: a large connection for PIBALs with a 

large neck and a small connection for PIBALs with a small neck. Most commercially purchased balloons 

must be connected to the smaller connection on the ML-373/GM nozzle. Projecting from the middle of the 

nozzle is the fitting for the hose ML-81. Opposite the hose fitting is a wing nut, which controls the valve. 

The nozzle alone weighs 132 grams, which is the correct free lift weight for a 30-gram PIBAL during a 

daytime flight. Adding the 443-gram weight to the nozzle brings the complete nozzle weight to 575 grams, 

the correct free lift for a 100-gram PIBAL during a daytime flight. 

4-35. When a nighttime flight is flown, additional weights are added to the nozzle to compensate for the 

greater air resistance caused by increased size of the balloon. The additional weights required are 70 grams 

for the 30 gram PIBAL and 50 grams for the 100-gram PIBAL. Also, remember when using nonstandard 

night lighting devices during nighttime flights, the devices should be connected to the nozzle during 

inflation to account for the additional weight. 

4-36. Once the proper weights are attached to the nozzle, free lift must be obtained. Free lift is the net 

upward force required for the balloon to ascend at a given rate. Simply stated, the balloon must be inflated 

until it is suspended in midair with the nozzle and additional weights (if any were needed) still attached to 

the balloon without the hose ML-81. Once free lift is achieved, you may now disconnect the balloon from 

the nozzle and tie the balloon off. The balloon is now properly inflated and ready for release. 

TRACKING AND RECORDING PROCEDURES

4-37. The primary function of the theodolite in the meteorology section is to visually observe an ascending 

PIBAL while providing azimuth and elevation angles from the theodolite to the pilot balloon. The azimuth 

and elevation angles are observed and recorded at predetermined times. These times are the time it takes 

the PIBAL to reach specific heights. The times for specific heights are determined based on a known 

ascent rate of the balloon. For example, if the balloon rises at 200 meters per minute, it would take 5 

minutes for the balloon to reach 1,000 meters. 

4-38. Recording worksheet will contain the times at which azimuth and elevation angles should be read 

and recorded. This form will also contain all of the surface readings and information needed by the 

operators prior to release of the balloon. Ensure before release of the balloon that the balloon is downwind 

from the theodolite so it does not fly directly over the theodolite and that the recorder records the offset 

azimuth. The offset azimuth is the azimuth from the theodolite to the balloon just before it is released. It is 

important that the azimuth and elevation angles are read at the exact time identified on the worksheet. 

4-39. Additionally, when the elevation and azimuth angles are read, the balloon should be centered in the 

crosshairs of the eyepiece of the theodolite. The timer/recorder must alert the theodolite operator when it is 

approaching the time the azimuth and elevation angles are to be read. The timer/recorder must alert the 

theodolite operator in order that the operator will ensure the balloon is in the center of the crosshairs at 

precisely the moment the azimuth and elevation angles are read. 

4-40. The timer/recorder must alert the operator at least 5 seconds before the azimuth and elevation angles 

are to be read. The timer/recorder alerts the theodolite operator with the command ‘WARNING’. Once the 

command ‘WARNING’ is given, the theodolite operator should ensure the balloon is exactly centered in 

the crosshairs of the theodolite’s eyepiece. 
Operating Principles 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 4-7

4-41. After the ‘WARNING’ command is given, the timer/recorder should voice the command ‘Read’ at 

the moment the predetermined times are reached. The timer/recorder may record the azimuth and elevation 

angles from one of the digital displays on the theodolite, or the theodolite operator may read the angles 

from the mechanical angles located in the eyepiece of the theodolite. 

4-42. The azimuth and elevation angles are recorded on the form provided to“tenth of a degree” accuracy. 

The azimuth and elevation angles from the form will be entered in data fields of a visual meteorology 

computer program. The computer program will process the information and produce a formatted 

meteorology computer message (METCM) that may be delivered by courier, voice radio or entered into a 

digital communication device for digital transmission. For more information on PIBAL operations, refer to 

Operations Manual 79-95M01. 

4-43. All forms and MET messages are to be maintained in the manner of electronic MET messages and 

forms. 
This page intentionally left blank. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 5-1

Chapter 5 

Meteorological Measuring Set (MMS), AN/TMQ-41 

This chapter discusses the components, site considerations, and personnel of the 

AN/TMQ-41 equipped section. 

SECTION I MMS AN/TMQ-41 EQUIPMENT 

SHELTER EQUIPMENT GROUP 

5-1. The AN/TMQ-41 is an automated meteorological data processing system. It consists of two main 

equipment groups, the Shelter Group and the Radio Direction Finding (RDF) group. This section discusses 

the AN/TMQ-41 and additional equipment. Figure 5-1 shows the AN/TMQ-41 equipment. 

Figure 5-1. AN/TMQ-41 equipment 

5-2. The shelter equipment group contains the equipment needed to receive and process MET data 

transmitted by a radiosonde. The shelter equipment group consists of the systems described below. 

NAVIGATIONAL AID (NAVAID) ANTENNA SYSTEM

5-3. When the AN/TMQ-41 operates in the NAVAID mode, the NAVAID antennas receive signals from 

very low frequency (VLF) antenna. 
Chapter 5 

5-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

RECEIVING SYSTEM

5-4. This system amplifies and converts signals received by the Global Positioning System (GPS), 

NAVAID and RDF antennas and passes them to the Marwin processor. The Marwin processor contains a 

GPS card that processes GPS signals enabling the Marwin to determine wind speed and direction. 

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

5-5. The Marwin receives and processes MET data and position information. It formats the data into 

MET messages for transmission to using units. 

PAGE PRINTER

5-6. The printer provides a hard copy record of all MET messages. 

POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

5-7. The AN/TMQ-41 operates from a 230 volts alternating current (VAC) or +28 volts direct current 

(VDC) primary power input. A power entry assembly and power control unit convert the supplied power to 

the correct voltage for operating the equipment. The RDF and air conditioners can be operated only when 

alternating current AC power is used. 

RDF EQUIPMENT GROUP

5-8. The RDF is a tripod-mounted antenna system that automatically tracks the radiosonde in the 

atmosphere. It receives MET data and detects position information used for wind computation. The RDF 

passes this data to the shelter equipment for processing and dissemination. A hand terminal connected to 

the antenna by cable allows for manual control of the positioning system as well as the receiver tuning 

circuit. 

GENERATOR CABLE EQUIPMENT

5-9. The cable equipment provides primary AC power to the system. It consists of two 50-foot cables and 

a pigtail cable to connect the generator or commercial power source to the power entry assembly at the 

shelter. A cable reel is provided for storing one cable on the back of the equipment shelter. The second 

cable and the pigtail are stored in the tunnel. 

ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

Radiosonde 

5-10. The radiosonde is a small electronic instrument carried aloft by a free-flight balloon. The aloft 

radiosonde senses and transmits pressure, temperature, and relative humidity to the MET section. The 

AN/TMQ-41 uses different types of radiosondes, depending on the operating mode selected for the 

planned sounding. 

Power Equipment 

5-11. The AN/TMQ-41 operates either from vehicle power or an external power source. When performing 

mobile operations, power is supplied by the vehicle on which it is mounted. When the air conditioners are 

on or when operating the RDF, an external source of power is required. A trailer-mounted power plant is 

towed by one of the sections vehicles to provide power. 

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT

5-12. The met section usually disseminates met data via on-board communications equipment. There are 

multiple options available to the met section to disseminate met data. 
Meteorological Measuring Set-(MMS), AN/TMQ-52 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 5-3

5-13. Care must be taken to use the appropriate communications equipment when disseminating met data. 

The communications equipment will be identified during the section planning process 

Radios 

5-14. The MET section is authorized single-channel ground and air-borne radio system (SINCGARS). 

They are used for communications with MET users and command and control. 

Digital Computer System, Lightweight Computer Unit 

5-15. This two-way interface device is used for routing digital communications between the MET section 

and remote users. 

Digital Nonsecure Voice Terminal 

5-16. This telephone, with associated wire connections, is a mobile subscriber equipment (MSE) device 

that allows for voice and digital communications. The digital nonsecure voice terminal DNVT provides 

access to the common user area communications network. 

VEHICULAR EQUIPMENT

5-17. Each section is authorized three high-mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicles (HMMWVs) and three 

trailers. The three vehicles are the heavy-variant HMMWV, and each is equipped with a 200-amp kit. 

Vehicle one transports the operations shelter and tows the power generator. Vehicle two transports 

supplemental equipment and tows the trailer containing the balloon inflation equipment and expendable 

supplies. Vehicle three transports section equipment. Section IV provides example load plans. 

SECTION II AN/TMQ-41 SECTION SITE OPERATIONS 

SITE SELECTION 

5-18. MET sections are positioned by the S-3 and MET station leader to provide the best possible area of 

coverage and most valid MET data. Section deployment depends largely on the location of firing units, 

targets, terrain, and weather. When selecting a site, the MET section leader must weigh the following 

considerations: 

z Safety. 

z Tactical situation. 

z Weather forecast and prevailing winds. 

z Availability of NAVAID signals. 

z Security. 

z Communications modes and nets. 

z Operating frequencies. 

z Electronic warfare activities. 

z Areas of coverage. 

z Terrain. 

z Availability of adequate supply of water. 

z Logistical support. 

z Unit attachment. 

SURVEY REQUIREMENTS 

5-19. The met station leader conducts a ground reconnaissance to determine the exact positions for major 

items of equipment. Once this is done, the station leader selects two reference points to facilitate orienting 
Chapter 5 

5-4 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

the RDF to true north. Reference points should be fixed, easily identified objects, such as a tall pole or the 

fork of a large tree. 

SURVEY AVAILABLE

5-20. The MET station leader emplaces the system to fifth-order accuracy or with the GPS. The survey 

section will provide the MET section with the latitude, longitude, and height of the MET section. 

SURVEY NOT AVAILABLE

5-21. If survey support is not available, the MET station leader determines station altitude and location 

from an area map. The map datum is World Geodetic System 84. 

RDF EMPLACEMENT 

NOTE: If the soundings are performed in the NAVAID or GPS modes, the RDF is not 

emplaced. 

5-22. The RDF cannot be emplaced more than 100 feet (30 meters) from the equipment shelter owing to 

cable length. The RDF should be placed on reasonably level terrain. It should not be screened by large 

obstacles that may interfere with signal reception. The position selected for the RDF should have a clear 

area downwind to observe balloon release. There must be no tall objects to obstruct line of sight from the 

RDF to a radiosonde in flight. 

EQUIPMENT SHELTER EMPLACEMENT 

5-23. The MET station leader positions the shelter on firm level ground. The shelter cannot be positioned 

more than 100 feet (30 meters) from the RDF or power equipment owing to cable length. It should not be 

positioned under power lines. 

POWER EQUIPMENT EMPLACEMENT 

5-24. The power plant provides the shelter with power. It can be no more than 100 feet (30 meters) from 

the shelter. Once the power equipment trailer is disconnected from the vehicle that tows it, the vehicle 

moves to a concealed area. 

BALLOON INFLATION SITE 

5-25. Upon entering the area of operation, the vehicle transporting the balloon inflation and launching 

equipment moves to the inflation site. The necessary equipment is unloaded, and the vehicle moves to a 

concealed area. The inflation site should be downwind of the equipment shelter and RDF, if possible. 

5-26. Figure 5-2 provides an example of a site occupation. Because the maximum cable length is 100 feet 

(30 meters), the distance between the shelter and its interfacing equipment cannot exceed the following: 

z Shelter to RDF antenna (one cable W103) - 100 feet (30 meters) maximum. 

z Shelter to generator trailer (two cables W401 and one cable W405) - 100 feet (30 meters) 

maximum. 

z Shelter to remote NAVAID antennas (one cable W111, one cable W112) - 100 feet (30 meters) 

maximum. 
Meteorological Measuring Set-(MMS), AN/TMQ-52 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 5-5

Figure 5-2. Site occupation 

CAMOUFLAGE 

5-27. The modules of radar-scattering camouflage in table 5-1 are required for camouflaging the system. 

Camouflage procedures are outlined in TM 5-1080-200-13&P. 

Table 5-1. Radar Scattering Camouflage Modules 

Equipment Modules 

1 1/4-ton truck with shelter 2 

1 1/4-ton truck (transports MHG if 

issued)* 

3 

1 1/4-ton truck 2 

1 1/4-ton trailer (3 each) 3 

NAVAID Antenna Set 1 

RDF 1 

Tent 2 

*Ensure the generator chimney is not covered with 

camouflage when generator is operating. 

5-28. Commanders move MET sections as needed to maintain MET support. Therefore, crew members 

must be trained and able to displace, move, and occupy a new site rapidly during critical periods of the 
Chapter 5 

5-6 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

battle. The MET station leader informs the operations officer when the validity of the last message from the 

current position will expire and how much time is required to march-order the section. He recommends the 

best time to make the displacement and a course of action to relay MET data from adjacent sections while 

the section is displacing. The MET station leader’s briefing of section personnel before each displacement 

should include, as applicable, the following: 

z Broadcast time of the last met message from the current position. 

z Broadcast time of the first met message from the next position. 

z Procedures for monitoring, copying, and transmitting met data from adjacent met sections on 

both the left and right flanks. 

z Section march-order sequence and when the camouflage systems will be dropped, packed, and 

loaded. 

z Departure time and whether the section has road clearance to move independently. 

z Where the MET vehicles will be positioned in the battery column. 

z Route of march and any significant landmarks. 

z Designation of the section representative on the reconnaissance party. 

SECTION III AN/TMQ-41 SECTION PERSONNEL 

Table 5-2. AN/TMQ-41 Section Personnel (U.S. Army) and AN/TMQ-41 Section Personnel (U.S. 

Marine Corps) 

5-29. The MOS and Rank for personnel in a MMS Section is directly related to the level of responsibility 

and knowledge required. The more senior the Rank, the more responsibility and knowledge the individual 

is expected to possess. 

5-30. All personnel within the MMS section will possess the 13W MOS. However, two positions will 

have an Additional Skill Identifier (ASI) that indicates they have successfully completed the Unit level 

maintenance course for Meteorology Equipment. 

U.S. ARMY 

Title MOS Rank Quantity 

MET station leader 13W40 SFC 1 

FA MET section sergeant 13W30 SSG 1 

FA MET equipment repairer 13W20H1 SGT 1 

FA MET equipment repairer 13W10H1 SPC 1 

FA MET crew member 13W10 SPC 1 
Meteorological Measuring Set-(MMS), AN/TMQ-52 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 5-7

Table 5-2. AN/TMQ-41 Section Personnel (U.S. Army) and AN/TMQ-41 Section Personnel (U.S. 

Marine Corps) 

5-29. The MOS and Rank for personnel in a MMS Section is directly related to the level of responsibility 

and knowledge required. The more senior the Rank, the more responsibility and knowledge the individual 

is expected to possess. 

5-30. All personnel within the MMS section will possess the 13W MOS. However, two positions will 

have an Additional Skill Identifier (ASI) that indicates they have successfully completed the Unit level 

maintenance course for Meteorology Equipment. 

FA MET crew member 13W10 PFC 1 

 Total 6 

Legend: 

 SFC = Sergeant First Class 

 SSG = Staff Sergeant 

 SGT = Sergeant 

SPC = Specialist 

PFC = Private First Class 

U.S. MARINE CORPS 

Title MOS Rank Quantity 

Team chief 0848 SSGT 1 

Arty MET man 0847 SGT 1 

Arty MET man 0847 CPL 1 

Arty MET man/driver 0847 LCPL 1 

Arty MET man/driver 0847 PFC 2 

 Total 6 

Legend: 

 SSGT = Sergeant First Class 

 SGT = Staff Sergeant 

CPL = Corporal 

LCPL = Lance Corporal 

PFC = Private First Class 

NOTE: Duties are the same for both Army and Marine Corps personnel. 

FIELD ARTILLERY (FA) MET STATION LEADER (SFC, MOS 13W40) 

5-31. The FA met station leader will— 

z Help the operations officer prepare the MET plan. 

z Advise the operations officer on the employment and operation of the MET assets within the 

division area. 

z Supervise MET section operations. 

z Coordinate with the S4 for logistical support. 

z Coordinate with the signal staff officer to prioritize means of communication and dissemination 

of messages. 

z Perform site selection and location. 

z Perform first sergeant-type duties when operating independently. 

z Direct the operation, emplacement, and displacement of the MET section. 
Chapter 5 

5-8 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

z Maintain quality control of MET data. Submit necessary reports, and maintain a flight log 

showing the following: 

 Dates. 

 Location. 

 Flight number. 

 Expendables consumed. 

 Other pertinent information. 

z Retain the flight log and copies of messages in accordance with AR 25-400-2. 

z Advise the operations officer on all factors affecting mission capabilities, such as personnel, 

maintenance, and logistics. 

z Review, consolidate, and prepare technical, personnel, and administrative reports covering MET 

section and station activities. 

z Organize and supervise the MET section training program. 

z Supervise operator maintenance of MET, communications, and vehicular equipment. 

z Supervise preparation and distribution of all MET messages. 

z Ensure adherence to safety procedures during inflation. 

z Manage met section logistics for repair parts and expendable items. 

z Assign personnel to MET teams. 

z Instruct and lead crew members in MET procedures. 

FA MET SECTION SERGEANT (SSG, MOS 13W30) 

5-32. The FA met section sergeant will— 

z Provide leadership and technical guidance to subordinate personnel. 

z Serve as off-shift senior sergeant during periods of extended operation. 

z Check data and records. 

z Examine data samples for quality control. 

z Inspect grounding equipment. 

z Decode wind messages. 

FA MET EQUIPMENT REPAIRER (SGT, MOS 13W20H1) 

5-33. The FA met equipment repairer sergeant will— 

z Supervise the second shift during 24-hour operations. 

z Perform unit maintenance on section MET equipment. 

z Ensure communications are maintained with all users. 

z Perform administrative duties as required. 

FA MET EQUIPMENT REPAIRER (SPC, MOS 13W10H1) 

5-34. The FA met equipment repairer specialist will— 

z Operate MET equipment on his assigned shift. 

z Perform unit maintenance on section MET equipment. 

z Operate organic communications equipment. 

z Drive the vehicle. 

FA MET CREWMEMBER (SPC, MOS 13W10) 

5-35. The FA MET crew member specialist will— 

z Operate MET equipment on his assigned shift. 
Meteorological Measuring Set-(MMS), AN/TMQ-52 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 5-9

z Help prepare the balloon train. 

z Drive the vehicle. 

FA MET CREWMEMBER (PFC, MOS 13W10) 

5-36. The FA MET crew member private will— 

z Operate MET equipment on his assigned shift. 

z Help prepare the balloon train. 

z Drive the vehicle. 
Chapter 5 

5-10 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

SECTION IV SUGGESTED LOAD PLANS 

5-37. The loading plan for the MMS Section is extremely important. Loading plans are the key to 

ensuring everyone knows where each component or piece of equipment is located. 

5-38. A good load plan will cut down on the time required to find items as well as store items for transport 

(for examples see figures 5-3, 5-4, and 5-5. 

Figure 5-3. Vehicle 1 with trailer 
Meteorological Measuring Set-(MMS), AN/TMQ-52 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 5-11

Figure 5-4. Vehicle 2 with trailer 
Chapter 5 

5-12 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure 5-5. Vehicle 3 with trailer 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 6-1

Chapter 6 

Meteorological Measuring Set-Profiler, AN/TMQ-52 

This chapter discusses the components, site considerations, and personnel of the 

AN/TMQ-52 equipped section. 

SECTION I MMS–P AN/TMQ-52 EQUIPMENT 

SHELTER EQUIPMENT GROUP 

6-1. The AN/TMQ-52 is a mobile upper air meteorological data collection, processing, and dissemination 

system. The AN/TMQ-52 system consists of the S-832/G non-expandable shelter housing the system 

components mounted on a high mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle (HMMWV) M-1113, the TacticalVery Small Aperture Terminal (T-VSAT) antenna, and the Meteorological Station, Automatic, AN/TMQ55 (TACMET). This section discusses the AN/TMQ-52 and additional equipment. Figure 6-1 shows the 

AN/TMQ-52 equipment. 

Figure 6-1. AN/TMQ-52 equipment 
Chapter 6 

6-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

6-2. The shelter equipment group contains the equipment needed to receive and process MET data 

transmitted by a radiosonde, obtained by a surface sensor, and received via satellite. The shelter equipment 

group consists of the systems described below. 

NAVAID ANTENNA SYSTEM

6-3. When the AN/TMQ-52 operates in the NAVAID mode, the system receives signals from a 

radiosonde using a VLF antenna. The signal is amplified and passed to the Marwin processor to be used in 

wind finding. 

GPS ANTENNA SYSTEM

6-4. When the AN/TMQ-52 operates in the GPS mode, the system receives signals from satellites using 

the GPS antenna. 

6-5. Signals received by the GPS antenna are sent to the Marwin III through the PLGR II/DAGR to be 

used in GPS wind finding. Using the PLGR II/DAGR provides the MMS–P the capability for using the 

Precise Positioning Service (PPS) provided by the GPS system. This will allow future Selective 

Availability Anti-Spoofing Module (SAASM) compliance. 

RECEIVING SYSTEM

6-6. In both NAVAID and GPS modes, temperature, pressure, and humidity (PTU) data is received by 

either the omni or directional antenna, amplified by the system and passed to the Marwin processor. 

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM

6-7. The Unified Post Processing System (UPPS) generates the MET data required to populate the 

requested MET message. The data is formatted and transferred to the common message processor (CMP) 

located on the operator interface computer (OIC). The data is available for review in the CMP and is 

transmitted via SINCGARS radio to the requesting unit. 

LIGHTWEIGHT LASER PRINTER (LLP 2) 

6-8. The printer provides a hard copy record of all MET messages. 

POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

6-9. The AN/TMQ-52 operates from an onboard 10-kilowatt auxiliary power unit (APU) providing 240 

VAC primary input. The power entry panel and shelter control panel converts the supplied power to the 

correct voltage for operating the equipment. The system has the capability to be powered by an external 

power source or can operate using the HMMWV battery and generator system (28 VDC). The air 

conditioners can be operated only when AC power is used. 

T-VSAT ANTENNA

6-10. The T-VSAT antenna is the primary communications method for receiving a large volume of 

weather data from the Air Force Weather Agency (AFWA). AFWA transmits, via satellite, NOGAPS data 

every 12 hours and regional observations each hour. The data is downloaded by the MMS–P using the TVSAT antenna. 

TACMET (AN/TMQ-55) 

6-11. The TACMET is a tripod-mounted system that measures barometric pressure, temperature, humidity, 

and wind speed and direction at the earth’s surface. The TACMET is connected to the shelter signal entry 

panel and surface meteorological data is routed to the OIC. The OIC makes this data available to the 

modeling software and the Marwin III in support of radiosonde launches. 
Meteorological Measuring Set-Profiler, AN/TMQ-52 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 6-3

ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

6-12. The radiosonde is a small electronic instrument carried aloft by a free-flight balloon. The radiosonde 

senses and transmits pressure, temperature, and relative humidity to the MET section. Wind direction and 

speed are determined through relative measurements of the position of the radiosonde while in flight. The 

AN/TMQ-52 uses different types of radiosondes (NAVAID or GPS), depending on the operating mode 

selected for the planned sounding. 

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT

6-13. The communications equipment of previous MET system was configured to transmit MET data 

based on a planned schedule (push method). The MMS–P communications equipment is configured to 

allow units to request MET data on demand (pull method). This is accomplished by establishing 

communications with the Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS) device located at the 

controlling headquarters. The AFATDS device relays requests for MET data to the MMS–P and the 

resulting MET message to the requesting unit. (Only MMS–P systems using 220C protocol can autoprocess MET requests). 

Radios 

6-14. The MET section is authorized SINCGARS. They are used for communications with MET users and 

command and control. 

Operator Interface Computer 

6-15. The operator interface computer contains the CMP software. The CMP allows the operator to view 

and generate digital message traffic. The OIC interfaces with the tactical communications interface module 

(TCIM) and the SINCGARS radios used for sending and receiving digital communications between the 

MET section and remote users. 

Interface Unit, Automatic Data Processing (CA-67) 

6-16. This telephone, with associated wire connections, is a MSE device that allows for voice and digital 

communications. The CA-67 provides access to the common user area communications network. 

VEHICULAR EQUIPMENT

6-17. Each section is authorized three HMMWV and three trailers. The three vehicles are the heavyvariant HMMWV, and each is equipped with a 200-amp kit. Vehicle one transports the operations shelter. 

Vehicle two transports helium bottles and tows the trailer containing the balloon inflation equipment and 

expendable supplies. Vehicle three and trailers transport supplementary equipment. Section IV provides 

example load plans. 

SECTION II AN/TMQ-52 SECTION SITE OPERATIONS 

SITE SELECTION 

6-18. MET sections are positioned by the operations officer and MET station leader to provide the best 

possible area of coverage. The modeling capability and the large size (60-kilometer radius) of the MMS–P 

coverage area gives planners increased flexibility when positioning the system. When selecting a site, the 

MET section leader must weigh the following considerations: 

z Safety. 

z Tactical situation. 

z Line of sight to satellite (NOGAPS). 

z Availability of LORAN and GPS signals. 
Chapter 6 

6-4 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

z Security. 

z Communications modes and nets. 

z Operating frequencies. 

z Electronic warfare activities. 

z Areas of coverage. 

z Terrain. 

z Logistical support. 

z Unit attachment. 

SURVEY AVAILABLE

6-19. The MET station leader conducts a ground reconnaissance to determine the exact positions for major 

items of equipment. The MET station leader emplaces the system to fifth-order accuracy or with the GPS. 

The survey section will provide the MET section with the latitude, longitude, and height of the MET 

section. The MET station leader can determine station location using the PLGR II. When using the PLGR 

II, the MET station leader needs to verify the station altitude. 

SURVEY NOT AVAILABLE

6-20. If survey support is not available, the MET station leader determines station altitude and location 

from an area map. The map datum is World Geodetic System 84. 

EQUIPMENT SHELTER EMPLACEMENT 

6-21. The MET station leader should take into consideration the following when positioning the shelter: 

z The shelter should be positioned on firm level ground. 

z The shelter cannot be positioned more than 100 feet (30 meters) from the T-VSAT antenna or 

TACMET because of cable length. 

z The shelter should not be positioned under power lines. 

z The GPS antenna requires a clear view of the sky for best satellite visibility. 

z The T-VSAT antenna requires line of sight to the satellite for the operational area. When 

locating the T-VSAT antenna, ensure there is no upslope exceeding 3 degrees in front of the 

antenna. 

BALLOON INFLATION SITE 

6-22. Upon entering the area of operation, the vehicle transporting the balloon inflation and launching 

equipment moves to the inflation site. The necessary equipment is unloaded, and the vehicle moves to a 

concealed area. The inflation site should be downwind of the equipment shelter if possible. 

6-23. Figure 6-2 provides an example of a site occupation. Because the maximum cable length is 100 feet 

(30 meters), the distance between the shelter and its interfacing equipment cannot exceed the following: 

z Shelter to T-VSAT antenna - 100 feet (30 meters) maximum. 

z Shelter to TACMET sensor- 100 feet (30 meters) maximum. 
Meteorological Measuring Set-Profiler, AN/TMQ-52 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 6-5

Figure 6-2. Site occupation 

CAMOUFLAGE 

6-24. The modules of radar-scattering camouflage in table 6-1 are required for camouflaging the system. 

Camouflage procedures are outlined in TM 5-1080-200-13&P. 

Table 6-1. Radar Scattering Camouflage Modules 

Equipment Modules 

1 1/4-ton truck (shelter) with trailer 3 

1 1/4–ton truck with trailer 3 

1 1/4–ton truck with trailer 3 

DISPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 

6-25. Commanders move MET sections as needed to maintain MET support. Therefore, crew members 

must be trained and able to displace, move, and occupy a new site rapidly during critical periods of the 

battle. The MET station leader informs the operations officer when the validity of the last message from the 

current position will expire and how much time is required to march-order the section. He recommends the 

best time to make the displacement and a course of action to relay MET data from adjacent sections while 

the section is displacing. The MET station leader’s briefing of section personnel before each displacement 

should include, as applicable, the following: 

z Broadcast time of the last MET message from the current position. 

z Broadcast time of the first MET message from the next position. 
Chapter 6 

6-6 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

z Download time for current NOGAPS data. (NOGAPS data is transmitted every 12 hours and 

provides the section with 72 hours of valid data. If the section is displacing during the NOGAPS 

download period, coordination is made with adjacent MMS–P to acquire NOGAPS download.) 

z Procedures for monitoring, copying, and transmitting MET data from adjacent MET sections on 

both the left and right flanks. 

z Section march-order sequence and when the camouflage systems will be dropped, packed, and 

loaded. 

z Departure time and whether the section has road clearance to move independently. 

z Where the MET vehicles will be positioned in the battery column. 

z Route of march and any significant landmarks. 

z Designation of the section representative on the reconnaissance party. 

SECTION III AN/TMQ-52 SECTION PERSONNEL 

6-26. The MOS and Rank for personnel in a MMS Section is directly related to the level of 

responsibility and knowledge required. The more senior the Rank, the more responsibility and 

knowledge the individual is expected to possess (see Table 6-2). 

6-27. All personnel within the MMS section will possess the 13W MOS. However, two positions will 

have an Additional Skill Identifier (ASI) that indicates they have successfully completed the Unit level 

maintenance course for Meteorology Equipment. 

Table 6-2. AN/TMQ-52 Section Personnel (U.S. Army) 

U.S. ARMY 

Title MOS Rank Quantity 

MET station leader 13W40 SFC 1 

FA MET section chief 13W30 SSG 1 

FA MET equipment repairer 13W20H1 SGT 1 

FA MET equipment repairer 13W10H1 SPC 1 

FA MET crew member 13W10 SPC 1 

FA MET crew member 13W10 PFC 1 

 Total 6 

Legend: 

 SFC = Sergeant First Class 

 SSG = Staff Sergeant 

 SGT = Sergeant 

SPC = Specialist 

PFC = Private First Class 

NOTE: Marine Corps do not currently field MMS–P system. 

FA MET STATION LEADER (SFC, MOS 13W40) 

6-28. The MET station leader will— 

z Advise the operations officer and staff of tactical and technical considerations affecting 

employment of the MMS–P and assist in preparing the MET plan. 

z Supervise MET section operations. 

z Coordinate with the S4 for logistical support. 

z Coordinate with the signal staff officer to prioritize means of communication and dissemination 

of messages. 
Meteorological Measuring Set-Profiler, AN/TMQ-52 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 6-7

z Perform site selection and location. 

z Direct the operation, emplacement, and displacement of the MET section. 

z Maintain quality control of MET data, submit necessary reports, and maintain a flight log. 

z Retain the flight log and copies of messages in accordance with AR 25-400-2. 

z Advise the operations officer on all factors affecting mission capabilities, such as personnel, 

maintenance, and logistics. 

z Review, consolidate, and prepare technical, personnel, and administrative reports covering MET 

section and station activities. 

z Organize and supervise the MET section training program. 

z Supervise operator maintenance of MET, communications, and vehicular equipment. 

z Supervise preparation and distribution of all MET messages. 

z Ensure adherence to all safety procedures. 

z Manage met section logistics for repair parts and expendable items. 

z Assign personnel to MET teams. 

z Instruct and lead crew members in MET procedures. 

z Determine information relative to NOGAPS download (transmission times and satellite 

information). 

z Perform first sergeant type duties when operating away from the unit for extended periods of 

time. 

FA MET SECTION SERGEANT (SSG, MOS 13W30) 

6-29. The FA MET section sergeant will— 

z Provide leadership and technical guidance to subordinate personnel. 

z Serve as off-shift senior sergeant during periods of extended operation. 

z Check data and records. 

z Examine data samples for quality control. 

z Inspect grounding equipment. 

z Decode wind messages. 

FA MET EQUIPMENT REPAIRER (SGT, MOS 13W20H1) 

6-30. The FA MET equipment repairer sergeant will— 

z Supervise the second shift during 24-hour operations. 

z Perform unit maintenance on section MET equipment. 

z Ensure communications are maintained with all users. 

z Perform administrative duties as required. 

z Supervise subordinate equipment repairer during maintenance procedures. 

FA MET EQUIPMENT REPAIRER (SPC, MOS 13W10H1) 

6-31. The FA met equipment repairer specialist will— 

z Operate MET equipment on his assigned shift. 

z Perform unit maintenance on section MET equipment. 

z Operate organic communications equipment. 

z Drive the vehicle. 

FA MET CREWMEMBER (SPC, MOS 13W10) 

6-32. The FA MET crew member specialist will— 

z Operate MET equipment on his assigned shift. 

z Help prepare the balloon train. 

z Drive the vehicle. 
Chapter 6 

6-8 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

FA MET CREWMEMBER (PFC, MOS 13W10) 

6-33. The FA met crew member private will— 

z Operate MET equipment on his assigned shift. 

z Help prepare the balloon train. 

z Drive the vehicle. 

SECTION IV SUGGESTED LOAD PLANS 

6-34. The loading plan for the MMS Section is extremely important. Loading plans are the key to 

ensuring everyone knows where each component or piece of equipment is located (for examples see figure 

6-3, 6-4, and 6-5. 

6-35. A good load plan will cut down on the time required to find items as well as store items for transport. 

Figure 6-3 Vehicle 1 (shelter) load plan 
Meteorological Measuring Set-Profiler, AN/TMQ-52 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 6-9

Figure 6-4 Vehicle 2 load plan 
Chapter 6 

6-10 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure 6-5 Vehicle 3 load plan 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 7-1

Chapter 7 

Balloon Inflation and Launching Procedures 

This chapter describes the procedures for inflating and launching balloons. 

SECTION I OVERVIEW 

WARNING 

HYDROGEN GAS IS EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE AND SHOULD BE 

CONSIDERED EXPLOSIVE WHEN CONFINED UNDER PRESSURE 

IN THE PRESENCE OF AMBIENT AIR. STORAGE, HANDLING, 

AND DISPOSAL PROCEDURES MUST BE STRICTLY FOLLOWED. 

SEE APPENDIX G FOR DETAILED INFORMATION. 

7-1. While the MET equipment is being emplaced, powered, and initialized, the MET station leader 

dispatches two crew members to the balloon inflation area to prepare a balloon for the sounding. Since 

balloon inflation is the most time-consuming of all the section tasks, the section should begin this task as 

soon as possible after it arrives at the site (MMS equipped sections). The MET section inflates sounding 

balloons by using the inflation and launching device or an inflation shelter. The balloons are inflated by 

compressed gas. 

SAFETY PROCEDURES 

7-2. In addition to the normal safety measures prescribed for all Soldiers, MET personnel must be 

cautious when using compressed gas. 

HYDROGEN GAS

7-3. Hydrogen gas is highly flammable. Since helium is an inert gas, it should be used, when available, to 

inflate balloons. If hydrogen must be used, the safety precautions below must be carefully followed. MET 

crew members should— 

z Display conspicuous warning signs where hydrogen is generated, used, or stored. For example, 

DANGER-HYDROGEN - No Smoking Within 50 Feet (15 meters). 

z Never light a match, smoke, or create sparks near a site where hydrogen is used. They should 

remove all possible sources of flame and sparks. 

z Wear rubber-soled shoes during inflation. They should not wear shoes with exposed nails, 

which might strike against metal, stones, or concrete floors and produce a spark. Materials such 

as wool and nylon should not be worn when inflating with hydrogen gas. 

z Never drop or strike metal tools against anything that might cause a spark. 

z Remove all metal objects, such as watches and key chains, prior to inflating the balloon. 

z Never mix hydrogen with air. They should expel all air from the balloon before inflating it with 

hydrogen. 

z Never expose the hydrogen cylinders to direct sunlight. Always store hydrogen bottles in the 

shade. 
Chapter 7 

7-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

z Remove all constrictions from the balloon neck; keep all hydrogen passages clear. 

z Use inflation and launching device to minimize balloon handling. 

z Inflate the balloon slowly on days of low relative humidity when static electricity is easily 

generated. If the air temperature is above freezing, MET crew members should lightly sprinkle 

the inflation area with water. 

z Inflate the balloon slowly when using compressed hydrogen or helium in order to avoid bursting 

or over-inflation. They should use the compressed gas regulator. A crew member adjusts the 

regulator so that no more than 10 pounds per square inch (PSI) (.7030696 Kg/Cm squared) of 

gas is being released into the balloon. 

z Never deflate a hydrogen-filled balloon; release it gradually. 

WARNING 

IF THE HISSING SOUND OF A GAS LEAK FROM THE BALLOON 

IS HEARD, CLOSE THE CYLINDER VALVE IMMEDIATELY. TWIST 

THE NECK OF THE BALLOON, REMOVE IT FROM THE 

INFLATION LAUNCHING DEVICE, AND RELEASE IT. 

z Wear a metal wristband connected to a flexible wire that leads to a good ground when in an area 

where inflation is in progress. The band and wire will provide a path to ground for static 

electricity. 

z Ground the inflation equipment to provide a path to ground for any static electricity generated in 

the equipment. They should also use ground cables to interconnect all metal parts of the inflation 

equipment with ground. 

z Follow the two-man rule for safety even though not all procedures require two personnel. 

z See TMs 11-6660-222-12, 11-2413, and 11-6660-287-13, and Federal Meteorological 

Handbook (FMH) No. 3 for further information on hydrogen safety precautions. Safety 

precautions for handling commercial hydrogen are in AR 700-68. 

GROUNDING PROCEDURES

7-4. Whenever hydrogen is used, MET crew members must use ground cables to connect all metal parts 

of the equipment to each other and to a grounding field made of a minimum of two ground rods. On days 

of low relative humidity, when static electricity is high, use additional grounding rods. Metal surfaces are 

cleaned with sandpaper to get a good connection. Then ground clamps or alligator clips are used to connect 

the cables to the metal. A crew member in the immediate area where hydrogen is being used should be 

individually grounded by using the issued grounding strap assemblies. A path to ground for static 

electricity is particularly important for the crew member who actually handles the balloon. Detailed 

grounding techniques are explained in TC 11-6 and FMH No. 3. Also, see figures 7-1 and 7-2 for 

examples. 
Balloon Inflation and Launching Procedures 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 7-3

Figure 7-1. Personnel ground 

Figure 7-2. Completed grounding field 

GASES USED FOR INFLATION 

7-5. The MET section inflates all balloons with either hydrogen or helium gas. Helium and hydrogen are 

available commercially in compressed gas cylinders. MET sections normally use cylinders containing 

approximately 200 cubic feet (5.67 cubic meters) of gas. The MET station leader must plan time carefully 

to ensure that a balloon is fully inflated and ready for release at the scheduled release time. 
Chapter 7 

7-4 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

HELIUM

7-6. Helium is the safest gas to use because it is not explosive, but it cannot be made artificially. Helium 

is extracted from mines, stored in heavy cylinders, and shipped in cylinders for MET section use. Using 

commercially produced helium gas to inflate a balloon is quicker and much safer than inflating with locally 

generated hydrogen; however, it is difficult to resupply. 

HYDROGEN

7-7. Hydrogen gas, unlike helium, is explosive and using it is dangerous. Accordingly, MET 

crewmembers must follow all safety procedures for use of hydrogen to include using the balloon inflation 

launching device. The MET station leader schedules classes on inflation using hydrogen gas to maintain 

section members’ proficiency. 

SECTION III INFLATION PROCEDURES 

BALLOON INFLATION AND LAUNCHING DEVICE, ML-594/U 

7-8. The balloon inflation and launching device, ML-594/U, is a portable inflation shelter and launch 

platform designed for field use. It secures the sounding balloon and protects it from weather during 

inflation and launching. It can be used with a compressed gas supply by using the hydrogen-helium volume 

meter ML-605/U. It should be used whenever hydrogen gas is used for inflation. The balloon inflation and 

launching device is explained in TM 11-6660-238-15. 

COMMERCIAL GAS REGULATORS 

7-9. Pressure regulators are used along with associated couplings with commercial hydrogen or helium 

cylinders to control the pressure of the compressed gas being released for inflation of a balloon. The 

regulator also indicates the amount of gas remaining in the cylinder. The regulators are adjusted to allow 

no more than 10 PSI (.7032 kg/cm) of gas to be released into the balloon. 

BALLOONS 

7-10. Balloons should be kept sealed in their original containers until just before use. They should be 

stored in a dry place and at moderate temperatures. All balloons deteriorate with age; therefore, oldest 

balloons should be used first. 

SOUNDING BALLOONS

7-11. The sounding balloon carries aloft a radiosonde and associated equipment, such as a parachute and a 

night-lighting unit. Sounding balloons are made of neoprene and are designed to lift radiosondes to certain 

minimum altitudes at specified rates of ascent. The bursting altitude of a sounding balloon depends on its 

condition and type and on the inflation procedure used. High-altitude balloons weigh 1,000 to 1,200 grams 

and burst near an altitude of 32,000 meters. At night, the balloons normally burst at lower altitudes. 

Bursting altitudes are with respect to mean sea level. 

PILOT BALLOON

7-12. This balloon provides a means of determining the speed and direction of winds aloft. The 100-gram 

pilot balloon also can be used as a sounding balloon up to 3,000 meters. The theodolite operator can 

observe a pilot balloon to a height of about 14,000 meters. Under various sky conditions, some colors are 

more easily detected by the eye than others. For this reason, pilot balloons are issued in several colors. The 

most common colors are white, red, and black. A general rule in selecting the color of the balloon is the 

darker the sky, the darker the balloon. 
Balloon Inflation and Launching Procedures 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 7-5

7-13. Pilot balloons are also used to determine cloud height. This is done by inflating the balloon to a 

known rate of rise and timing the balloon until it goes into the clouds. 

PREPARATION OF BALLOONS 

7-14. After exposure to relatively low temperatures and extended periods in storage, neoprene balloons 

lose some of their elasticity through the crystallization of the balloon film. Neoprene balloons burst 

prematurely if used in this state. MET personnel should inspect balloons prior to their use and discard any 

that are brittle,-especially when using hydrogen. MET personnel should also discard any balloons older 

than 5 years. 

BALLOON CONDITIONING

7-15. Usually, exposure of the balloon to room temperature (21°C) for 24 hours is all the conditioning 

required. Store balloons in their sealed package and do not expose to direct light or heat. Discoloration has 

no effect on the balloon film as long as it is not the result of exposure to direct sunlight for several hours. 

In direct sunlight and in most types of artificial lighting, discoloration is caused by the antioxidant included 

in the compounding. 

INFLATION

7-16. A balloon may be inflated immediately after conditioning, or it may be kept under normal storage 

conditions and then inflated. All balloons should be at room temperature before inflation. 

NIGHT-LIGHTING UNIT 

7-17. The night-lighting unit provides a light source that allows the tracking of pilot and sounding balloons 

at night. The lighting unit is called a light stick. A light stick is a small transparent tube containing a liquid 

chemical. When the light stick is snapped, the chemical begins to emit enough light for tracking balloons. 

DETERMINING LIFT FOR BALLOONS 

7-18. A crew member determines the amount of gas required for the balloon to be used before beginning 

the inflation process. The procedure below is used to determine the amount of gas required. 

DETERMINING REQUIRED FREE LIFT

7-19. Free lift is the net upward force required for the balloon to ascend at a given rate. The ascent rate of 

the balloon mainly depends on the amount of gas in the balloon. Other factors affecting ascent rate are the 

shape, size, and physical texture of the balloon and the state of the atmosphere through which the balloon 

travels. Table 7-1 is used to determine the amount of free lift for sounding and pilot balloons during fair 

weather. 
Chapter 7 

7-6 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table 7-1. Balloon Ascent Rate, Free Lift, Weight, and Bursting Altitude 

Balloon Type Ascent Rate (meters 

per minute) 

Free Lift Weight 

(grams) 

Balloon Weight 

(grams) 

Bursting Altitude 

(meters) 

Sounding Balloons 

(Day) 

200 Gram Balloon 320 510 200 21,200 

ML-635 400 1,100 150 10,668 

ML-537 305 1,600 1,000 30,479 

ML-519 300 1,200 300 16,000 

(Night) 

ML-635 400 1,300 150 10,668 

ML-537 305 1,900 1,000 30,479 

ML-519 300 1,200 300 16,000 

Pilot Balloons 

ML-159A (White) 302 500 100 15,000 

ML-160A (Black) 302 500 100 15,000 

ML-161A (Red) 302 500 100 15,000 

ML-50A (White) 183 140 30 10,000 

ML-51A9 (Black) 183 140 30 10,000 

ML-64A (Red) 183 140 30 10,000 

COMPUTING REQUIRED TOTAL LIFT

7-20. Total lift is defined as the weight (grams) of the balloon with attachments that must be balanced by 

the gas volume in the inflated balloon for the balloon to ascend at a desired rate. Total lift is composed of 

the weight of the balloon, its free lift, the weight of any attachment to the balloon train, and the weight 

added, if any, to compensate for adverse weather. See table 7-2 for weights of attachments. Table 7-3 

indicates additional weights needed to compensate for adverse weather conditions. 
Balloon Inflation and Launching Procedures 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 7-7

Table 7-2. Weights of Attachments 

Attachment Weight (grams) 

Radiosonde with Battery 

ML-659 823 

ML-662 250 

ML-663 250 

ML-664 250 

ML-665 450 

ML-666 450 

ML-667 450 

RS-92-KL 250 

RS-92-AM 270 

Parachute-ML 132 150 

Commercial Parachute 80 

Lighting Unit 15 

Sounding Balloons 

ML-635 150 

ML-537 1,000 

ML-519 300 

Pilot Balloons (PIBAL) 

ML-159A 100 

ML-160A 100 

ML-161A 100 

ML-50A 30 

ML-51A 30 

ML-64A 30 

NOTE: Balloon weights vary. The weight of the balloon is stamped on the 

box. 

Table 7-3. Additional Weights for Adverse Weather Conditions 

(Sounding only) 

Weather Conditions Additional Weight 

Required (Grams) 

Light precipitation 200 

Heavy precipitation 400 

Zone winds averaging more than 60 knots (1000-

gram or larger balloons only) 

600-1,200 

DETERMINING GAS VOLUME REQUIRED 

7-21. To obtain the proper amount of gas required for total lift, a crew member must convert total lift in 

grams to cubic feet. He does this by using the nomograph (figure 7-3). 
Chapter 7 

7-8 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

TOTAL LIFT LESS THAN 3,000 GRAMS

7-22. If total lift is from 1,400 to 3,000 grams, he enters the nomograph with total lift in grams along the 

left edge. He reads across to the line on the chart that represents the gas to be used (helium or hydrogen) 

and then down from the line to the metered cubic feet required for total lift. 

TOTAL LIFT GREATER THAN 3,100 GRAMS

7-23. If total lift is 3,100 grams or greater, he enters the nomograph with total lift along the right edge. He 

reads across to the line on the chart that represents the gas to be used (helium or hydrogen) and then up 

from the line to the metered cubic feet required for total lift. 

Figure 7-3. Inflation Nomograph 

INFLATION USING THE INFLATION AND LAUNCHING DEVICE 

7-24. The inflation and launching device should be used when inflating with hydrogen. When the inflation 

launching device is used, the crew members inflate the sounding balloon with the required amount of gas 

volume determined from the nomograph. See figure 7-4 for an example. 
Balloon Inflation and Launching Procedures 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 7-9

Figure 7-4. Required total lift example 

7-25. When crew members use commercial gas for inflation, they obtain the correct total lift by inflating 

the balloon until the volume meter ML-605/U reads the cubic feet required as determined from the 

nomograph. 

INFLATION SHELTER 

7-26. There may be times when a MET station is in a fixed position and has some type of inflation shelter. 

If an inflation shelter is available, MET section personnel do not use the inflation and launching device. 

The section uses an inflation shelter; that is., the covered cargo area of a prime mover, to inflate the small 

pilot balloon. 

WEIGHING-OFF PROCEDURE

7-27. When an inflation shelter is used for inflation, the crew members determine when the balloon is 

properly inflated by using a weighing-off procedure. A crew member attaches the balloon to an inflation 

nozzle with appropriate weights to simulate the effect of free lift and the weight of the balloon train. When 

the sounding balloon lifts the inflation nozzle off the surface, it is properly inflated. The pilot balloon is 

properly inflated when it hangs suspended in midair, neither rising nor falling. 

WEIGH-OFF CALCULATIONS

7-28. To achieve weigh-off, a crew member must calculate the required weights to be added to the 

inflation nozzle. For example, to calculate the weight required to be added to the ML-196 nozzle of a 

sounding balloon, a crew member must determine total lift. The weight of the balloon is not figured in the 

total weight because as the balloon is inflated it automatically compensates for itself. The nozzle weight 

(1,500 grams) is deducted, and the remainder is the additional weight required to be placed on the nozzle. 

The nozzle weights are 100, 200, 400, 500, and 1,000 grams. See figure 7-5 for an example. 
Chapter 7 

7-10 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure 7-5. Weigh-Off example 

NOZZLES AND WEIGHTS 

7-29. Inflation nozzle ML-575, ML-373/GM, and ML-196 are component parts of the MET station. They 

are used in the weighing-off procedure performed in an inflation shelter or in an area of still air. They 

provide a connection between the hose ML-81 and the balloon during inflation and act as a calibrated 

weight in determining the correct amount of total lift during weigh-off. 

PILOT BALLOON NOZZLES

7-30. ML-575 or ML-373 nozzles are used to inflate the pilot balloon. The correct free lift for a 100-gram 

pilot balloon is 500 grams. The ML-575 and the ML-373 with its collar weight compensate for the free lift. 

SOUNDING BALLOON NOZZLE

7-31. The inflation nozzle ML-196 weighs 1,500 grams and is issued with five weights. A crew member 

must add the correct combination of weights to the nozzle to simulate free lift and balloon train weight 

before inflation. 

NOZZLE CARE

7-32. Crew members must keep the nozzles free of dirt, lime, or other foreign matter that will alter its 

weight or obstruct the gas passages. 

INFLATING THE PILOT BALLOON 

7-33. A crew member first shakes the balloon to remove the powder inside and rolls it up to expel any air. 

To expel the air and debris from the hose and connections to the gas source, briefly turn the gas on and 

immediately shut the gas off. The balloon is weighed-off properly when it hangs suspended in midair with 

appropriate weights attached. When inflating the pilot balloon, a crewmember must first install weights, 

when required, on the neck of the nozzle. If a night-lighting device is to be attached to the balloon, he must 

add additional weights to the nozzle to compensate for the greater air resistance caused by the increased 

size of the balloon. The additional weights required are 70 grams for the 30-gram pilot balloon and 50 

grams for the 100-gram pilot balloon. Once he has added the weights to the nozzle, he then stretches the 

neck of the balloon over the connection of the nozzle. 

INFLATING THE SOUNDING BALLOON 

7-34. The procedures for inflating the sounding balloon when using the inflation and launching device and 

when using an inflation shelter are discussed below. 
Balloon Inflation and Launching Procedures 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 7-11

INFLATION AND LAUNCHING DEVICE

7-35. The inflation and launching device should be used when inflating with hydrogen. A crew member 

first shakes the balloon to remove the powder inside and rolls it up to expel any air. To inflate the sounding 

balloon with the required volume of gas, crew members use the procedure in TM 11-6660-238-15. Crew 

members must fill the balloon with gas by using the volume meter. 

INFLATION SHELTER

7-36. A crewmember first shakes the balloon to remove the powder inside and rolls it up to expel any air. 

The balloon is attached to the inflation nozzle by tying it with a small piece of twine. The crewmenber then 

attaches to the inflation nozzle the combination of weights required to balance the required total lift. 

TYING OFF THE BALLOON 

7-37. When inflation of either the pilot balloon or the sounding balloon is complete, the crewmember 

firmly seals the balloon neck with twine and disconnects the hose from the inflation nozzle. The inflation 

nozzle and any weights used from the tied off balloon is removed. The crewmember is then ready to attach 

the balloon train to the balloon, if one is required. Figure 7-6 shows the correct tying off procedures. 

Figure 7-6. Tying off the balloon 

BALLOON TRAIN 

7-38. The balloon train is the trailing end of the twine used to seal or tie off the inflated balloon. 

Components such as the radiosonde and parachute are further attached to the balloon train and become a 

part of it. A night-lighting device may be included in the train between the parachute and the radiosonde to 

aid initial tracking of the balloon-borne radiosonde. The balloon train is normally approximately 20 meters 

long in order to dampen the oscillation of the radiosonde. 

7-39. When a crew member has properly inflated the balloon, he/she removes the inflation nozzle and 

seals and ties off the balloon. The crew member doubles a 20-meter length of twine to a 10-meter length 

(double strength) and ties and seals the neck of the balloon with the open end of the twine. Next, unless the 

crew member is in an active theater of operations, the parachute is secured to the closed end of the doubled 

twine. Normally, the parachute is not used in combat operations. The crew member then doubles another 

20-meter length of twine, secures the open end to the bottom of the parachute suspension lines, and ties the 

radiosonde to the closed end. If the radiosonde being used has an unwinder, the crew member shortens the 
Chapter 7 

7-12 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

length of twine from the balloon to the parachute to approximately 1 meter and ties the radiosonde directly 

to the parachute suspension lines. In moderate to high winds, twine should be manually unwound and 

secured to prevent damage to the radiosonde during release. Figure 7-7 shows the balloon train.

Figure 7-7. Balloon train 

SECTION IV RELEASE PROCEDURES 

NOTE: If operating in the vicinity of an airfield, notify the air traffic control tower prior to 

balloon release. 

7-40. Because of the time it takes to prepare each sounding and the cost of the components, the MET 

section crew members must make every effort to release a balloon without damaging the components. 

Damaging the train during release causes disruption of the scheduled release times. This could affect the 

mission of the artillery. There are several release methods. Which method to use depends on the surface 

weather conditions at the time of release. The release methods for the balloon train are discussed below. 

They should be followed to ensure that the balloon train release is achieved without damaging any 

component. 

RELEASING FROM THE INFLATION AND LAUNCHING DEVICE 

7-41. During periods of no wind, one crewmember can release the balloon train by using the inflation and 

launching device; however, release normally requires two or more persons. During periods of moderate 

winds, two crew members release the balloon train. If there are high winds or rain or if the section is using 
Balloon Inflation and Launching Procedures 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 7-13

a larger sounding balloon, additional crewmembers may need to help in the release. After the balloon is 

inflated, crewmembers move the inflation and launching device with the balloon train attached downwind 

and position it with the front of the inflation and launching device pointing downwind. If there are high 

winds, they may have to stake the skids of the inflation and launching device to the ground to ensure 

stability. Just before release, a crew member removes the safety strap from the lift dot fastener stud and 

manually positions the release strap fastener in the groove on the stud to ensure that the proper release 

action will occur. When the section is ready to release, a crew member takes the radiosonde part of the 

balloon train downwind from the inflation and launching device. The crewmember holding the radiosonde 

pulls on the radiosonde end of the balloon train. This action frees the master loop and allows the end of the 

canopy to open. When the canopy opens, the balloon is released. When the balloon has risen to an altitude 

where the balloon train supports the attached components clear of the ground, the release of the radiosonde 

is completed and the sounding is underway. Figure 7-8 shows a release from the inflation and launching 

device. 

Figure 7-8. Release from the inflation and launching device 

RELEASING FROM AN INFLATION SHELTER 

7-42. When the section uses an inflation shelter to inflate the balloon, the crewmembers release the balloon 

by using either the hand-over-hand method or the two-man running-release method. 

HAND-OVER-HAND

7-43. The section uses the hand-over-hand method when the surface winds are relatively calm. Normally, 

use of this method of release requires two crew members. One crewmember takes the radiosonde and 

moves downwind until the length of the train is taut. This crew member serves as the balloon train anchor 

until time of release. The second crew member grasps the balloon by the neck and removes the balloon 

from the inflation shelter. He/she then plays out the balloon and its attached train in a hand-over-hand 

fashion, moving toward the first crew member and keeping the twine taut until the radiosonde is lifted off 

the ground. 

NOTE: Do not use this method with a hydrogen-filled balloon. 
Chapter 7 

7-14 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

TWO-MAN RUNNING RELEASE

7-44. The section uses the two-man running-release method in moderate to high winds. One crew member 

holds the balloon neck. Another crew member holds the radiosonde upright and assumes a position the full

length of the train downwind from the balloon. The first crew member releases the balloon at the given 

signal, and as the balloon rises, the crew member holding the radiosonde runs with it while trying to keep 

the train taut and maintain a position downwind of the rising balloon. When the balloon is directly 

overhead and the train is taut, the crew member holding the radiosonde allows the balloon to lift the 

radiosonde from the hands. 

RELEASE USING A BALLOON SHROUD 

7-45. When using the inflation shelter in moderate to high wind conditions, the crew member may choose 

to use the shroud to aid in the release of the balloon train. The shroud is designed to protect the sounding 

balloon while it is being moved to the point of release and to aid in releasing it under high wind conditions. 

The shroud consists of a hood, four flaps (each of which terminate in a D handle), and a top cord. The 

procedure for releasing a balloon by using a balloon shroud is discussed below. 

NOTE: Do not use the balloon shroud with a hydrogen-filled balloon. 

SHROUD POSITIONING

7-46. To place the balloon in the shroud, a crew member must lower the balloon as close as possible to the 

ground. The crew member then places two of the shroud flaps over one side of the balloon and allows the 

balloon to rise under the shroud. The top cord is attached to the loop at the top of the shroud so that the 

crew member can handle the bottom end of the top cord. The crew member holds the four D handles with 

one hand and the top cord with the other and moves the balloon to the release point. Ordinarily, the balloon 

can be moved to the release point by one crew member holding the D handles and the top cord while a 

second crew member carries the radiosonde and parachute. In very high winds, two crew members are 

needed to hold the balloon, one to hold the top cord and the other to hold the D handles. 

NOTE: To prevent accidental loss of the shroud if all four D handles are released, the top cord 

should be tied to the crew member releasing the balloon. 

RELEASE PROCEDURE

7-47. Normally, one crew member holds the shroud while the other crew member holds the radiosonde 

downwind from the balloon. The crew member holding the shroud releases the front two D handles at the 

same time while continuing to hold the rear two D handles and the top cord. The balloon slides out from 

under the shroud. As the balloon ascends, the second crew member maintains a position directly under the 

drifting balloon until the radiosonde lifts from the hands. Figure 7-9 shows a release using a shroud. 
Balloon Inflation and Launching Procedures 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 7-15

Figure 7-9. Release using a shroud 
This page intentionally left blank. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 8-1

Chapter 8 

Personnel, Logistics, and Maintenance 

Manning, fixing, and sustaining the force is essential for effective combat operations. 

Sound planning is essential so that MET support is always available in the area of 

operations. Planning is done at force artillery headquarters to ensure MET sections 

receive adequate and timely support. This chapter focuses on logistic planning 

considerations that are the responsibility of the MET station leader and the 

operational supervisors. 

PERSONNEL 

8-1. Strength accounting is the process by which personnel combat readiness is measured. It keeps track 

of the troops on hand, identifies those that have been lost, and identifies those that are needed. 

READINESS MANAGEMENT 

8-2. Commanders must be very cautious when filling vacancies for the MET personnel because of the 

low density and criticality of the 13W MOS. Commanders must request personnel far enough in advance to 

ensure a smooth rotation of MET personnel. Further care must be taken to ensure that the request for repair 

personnel (13WlOHl, 13W2OHl) contains the required additional skill identifier (ASI) of Hl after the base 

MOS. If the Hl ASI is not annotated, only MET crew members without maintenance training will be 

received by the unit. This leaves the MET section without the required maintenance personnel to repair the 

MET equipment. All requests for replacements and evacuation reporting should be handled by the unit S1. 

All shortages of positions that require the H1 ASI should be reported as critical. 

SUSTAINING SOLDIERS

8-3. Commanders and MET station leaders must diligently manage and execute sustainment support for 

MET personnel. Oftentimes the MET section is not with its parent organization; therefore, timely food, 

medical, chaplain, pay, and postal services must be provided to ensure Soldier morale and combat 

effectiveness. MET station leaders must coordinate with supported units for this support. MET station 

leaders must also direct the health and welfare activities of section personnel. These include but are not 

limited to the following: 

z Coordinate for food, water, and other life support. 

z Inspect Soldier’s personal hygiene. 

z Inspect Soldier’s personal gear. 

z Ensure medical problems are promptly attended. 

z Schedule rest periods. 

LOGISTICS PLANNING 

8-4. Logistic planning must include the requirements for sustaining MET sections during extended 

combat operations. The logistic plan based on adequate and timely support of the tactical operation must be 

complete, simple, and flexible. Logistic planning must address the following: 

z Movement and load planning. 

z Basic loads and stock levels. 

z Supply channels and location of reserve stocks. 
Chapter 8 

8-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

z Communications. 

z Maintenance concept. 

BASIC LOAD AND STOCKAGE LEVELS 

8-5. Met Personnel must be fully aware of the status of basic load quantities. The successful 

accomplishment of the mission depends on having the necessary of quantities of expendables to perform 

the mission. 

8-6. The status of the basic load should be monitored at all times to ensure sufficient expendables remain 

available to accomplish the mission. 

8-7. A MET section basic load is the amount of expendables (radiosondes, balloons, parachutes, and so 

forth) required to sustain combat operations for 72 hours. Basic loads for MET sections are determined by 

the amount of expendables needed for the maximum number of balloon releases per section per day of 

operations. A MET section can run one flight per hour, up to a maximum of 12 flights per day. Each 

section is allocated 6 hours per day for maintenance and movement. The maximum numbers of flights cited 

here are for intense battle only. The cost of expendables precludes the maximum number of flights being 

flown for training. 

8-8. Current authorized stockage levels are listed in TM 11-6660-218-20P, TM 11-6660-283-13, and TM 

11-6660-293-12&P (MMS–P equipped sections). 

LOGISTICAL SUPPLY CHANNELS AND LOCATIONS OF RESERVE 

STOCKS 

8-9. In addition to monitoring the status of the basic load, it is necessary to establish a reorder level for all 

expendables. The tempo of operations will be the determining factor in establishing the best reorder level. 

8-10. Met personnel should be aware of the location of all resupply points 

SUPPLY CHANNELS

8-11. With current authorizations of vehicles and personnel, each MET section can only transport a 72-

hour supply of expendables. As supplies are expended, resupply must be done by the division support 

command (DISCOM). Maneuver experience factors indicate that the DISCOM should keep a 14-day 

supply level per MET section and the corps support command (COSCOM) should keep a 30-day supply 

level per MET section. 

RESUPPLY PUBLICATIONS

8-12. The nomenclature and quantities of items authorized per MET section are in TM 11-6660-265-10-

HR, TM 11-6660-218-20P, and TM 11-6660-283-13, and TM 11-6660-293-12&P (MMS–P equipped 

sections). Because MET section expendables are very low-density items, division and corps stockage levels 

must be carefully monitored. Careful management prevents exhaustion of supplies and subsequent 

interruption of MET support on the battlefield. 

ADDITIONAL RESUPPLY

8-13. Met sections require other forms of supplies. The most important supplies are petroleum, oils, and 

lubricants (POL); spare parts; food; water; and ammunition. It is very important that all aspects of resupply 

are considered when developing the resupply rate for MET sections. The MET station leader must develop 

proper usage rates for all supplies to ensure smooth, continuous operations. 
Personnel, Logistics, and Maintenance 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 8-3

COMMUNICATIONS 

8-14. For the MET section to achieve its mission, communications must be established quickly and 

maintained. Primary references for MET section communications are TM 11-5820-401-10-1 and -2. The 

MET station leader must ensure all members of the section are properly trained in correct communications 

procedures and on section communications equipment. The MET section point of contact for 

communications requirements and training is the unit signal officer. The MET station leader is responsible 

for maintaining all aspects of communications to include the following: 

z Familiarity with the unit signal operating instructions (SOI). 

z Communication systems initialization and setup. 

z Assigned frequencies and network protocols. 

z Encryption procedures. 

z Radio procedures. 

z Communications security. 

z Message development and emergency procedures. 

z Alternate forms of communication. 

MAINTENANCE CONCEPT 

8-15. The Army adheres to a two-level maintenance concept as outlined in the maintenance allocation 

chart (MAC) for each system. The MAC designates overall authority and responsibility for the 

performance of all maintenance and repair functions. Under the two-level maintenance concept, the levels 

are organized as follows: 

z The field level includes operator /crew maintenance, unit maintenance, and direct support 

maintenance. 

z The sustainment level includes general support and depot level maintenance. 

8-16. The increasing complexity of equipment has lead to systems designed around the concept of line 

replaceable units (LRU). When a faulty unit is identified, the LRU is replaced and sent to depot for repair. 

Depot level maintenance is often performed by the original equipment manufacturer or contractor through 

a Commercial Logistical Support warranty program. 

8-17. The limited availability of spare LRUs and the time required for faulty units to be repaired at depot 

level places an additional burden on logistics planners to ensure systems are not nonoperational due to lack 

of operational LRUs. When troubleshooting the system, MET equipment repairers need to make every 

effort to ensure an LRU is faulty prior to turning the component in for repair. 

8-18. There is one maintenance standard. This standard is based on TM 10 and 20 series preventive 

maintenance checks and services (PMCS). The goal of all levels of maintenance is to limit the downtime of 

equipment. The objective of maintenance in combat is to fix as far forward as possible. 

FIELD LEVEL 

8-19. Field level maintenance consists of operator, unit, and direct support maintenance. The majority of 

the system maintenance is accomplished as ‘fix forward’ maintenance. 

8-20. The unit level maintainer is charged with all field maintenance. 

Operator/Unit Maintenance 

8-21. Unit level maintenance is the most critical. Unit level maintenance consists of the operator and MET 

equipment repairer. 

z Operator maintenance includes the following: 

 Before, during, and after operations checks. 

 PMCS. 

 Scheduled maintenance. 
Chapter 8 

8-4 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

z Met equipment repairer performs unit maintenance consists of the following: 

 Visual inspections. 

 Execution of diagnostic programs. 

 Services and replacements as authorized by the MAC. 

 Scheduled and unscheduled maintenance, to include adjustments and 

alignments authorized by the MAC. 

8-22. Unscheduled maintenance includes diagnosis and fault isolation as authorized by the MAC. To 

analyze malfunctions, the trained mechanics in the MET section use built-in test equipment (BITE) along 

with appropriate technical manuals. 

Direct Support Maintenance 

8-23. Direct support (DS) maintenance is performed by the supporting DS maintenance unit. DS electronic 

repair personnel provide required maintenance support when maintenance falls outside the echelon of the 

MET section repairer. Most DS repair is performed onsite at the MET section location. If repair cannot be 

performed onsite or the problem requires equipment evacuation to a higher level, the MET equipment is 

evacuated to its supporting DS unit by the most appropriate method. This can be done by the unit supply 

section or S4. Because of the low density of MET equipment and the difficulty in procuring repair parts, 

the DS unit must keep an adequate stock of repair items on hand. This prevents long downtimes due to 

unavailability of parts. 

SUSTAINMENT LEVEL

8-24. Sustainment level maintenance is performed on the MMS-P by the manufacturer. Prior to sending a 

system to the manufacturer, the logistics assistance representative and/or the field support representative 

should be consulted. 

8-25. Sustainment level maintenance is performed on the MMS by the DS maintenance initially. In most 

cases, the entire system should not be sent to depot. Only the affected component is forwarded. Prior to 

forwarding any item to depot, the logistics assistance representative and/or field support representative 

should be consulted. 

General Support Maintenance 

8-26. General support (GS) maintenance is not used for MET systems peculiar items; however, GS 

maintenance is required for associated items of support. MET peculiar equipment that cannot be repaired at 

the DS level must be evacuated to depot. Non-MET peculiar items undergo GS maintenance as identified 

on their particular maintenance allocation chart. 

Depot Maintenance 

8-27. The depot repairs those modules and assemblies that are beyond field-level capability and overhauls 

or rebuilds MET equipment as required. 

SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE (COMPUTER PROGRAMS) 

8-28. Computer software is the responsibility of Headquarters, Communications-Electronics Command 

(CECOM), at Fort Monmouth, NJ. CECOM will distribute updated programs to the user as changes are 

made. 

CAUTION 

 Personnel in field units will not create computer programs or 

update existing programs. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-1

Appendix A 

MET Messages 

All MET messages are coded in a format that is recognized and used by United States 

and allied forces and weather services worldwide. These formats are mandated by 

several standardization agreements and quadripartite standardization agreements and 

the World Meteorological Organization. This appendix discusses these messages. 

This appendix implements STANAG 4061, STANAG 4082, STANAG 4131, STANAG 4140. 

SECTION I MMS FATDS MET MESSAGES 

OVERVIEW 

A-1. Digital transmission is the primary means of sending MET messages to FA units. The MMS 

equipped MET section contains advanced field artillery tactical data system (AFATDS) formats for all 

MET messages. MET messages are sent to FA firing units and FSEs, as required. The MET messages 

normally are transmitted to the controlling headquarters fire control element (FCE). The communications 

aspect (message address, message source, and authentication) of data transmission is in the first message 

element, the communications (comm) line. There are two format differences between a digital MET 

message and a standard MET message. The first is the comm line, which is required to transmit the 

message. The second difference is the format of the MET data provided, which is by data line. 

MET MESSAGE COMMUNICATIONS LINE

A-2. The first line of every message segment is the comm line which contains the same information for all 

MET messages. The comm line consists of nine parts. Each part has a field. A semicolon separates each 

field. The format of the comm line is shown in figure A-1. The numbers above the comm line format 

indicate position spaces only (72 total). These numbers are not part of the message. 

Figure A-1. Comm line format 

HEADER

A-3. The first six character positions in the comm line comprise the header field. The first six positions 

are entry variables. The semicolon (seventh position) signifies the end of the header. The format for the 

comm line header is shown in figure A-2. 
Appendix A 

A-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure A-2. Comm line header format 

Destination 

A-4. The first position in the header field shows the destination of the message. On a received message, 

the first position shows the sender. Specific FDCs may be addressed by using any letter or number, as 

specified by the controlling FDC or FCE, SOI, or standing operating procedures (SOP). 

Transmission Repeat Number 

A-5. The second position contains the transmission repeat number (TRN). The TRN is first set to zero. 

The TRN is advanced by one digit each time the message is retransmitted. After four unsuccessful 

transmissions, voice contact is required to determine the problem. 

Authentication Characters 

A-6. Positions 3 and 4 are the authentication or serialization characters. These characters are the next 

unused authentication codes. If no acknowledgment is received, the next set of numbers is used, and the 

TRN is advanced one number. 

Message Type 

A-7. The message type (position 5) is a single number that represents the type of message being 

composed for transmission or processing. The message type must be entered in the header by the operator 

when he composes the message. MET messages are always type 3. 

Message Source 

A-8. The message source character (position 6) represents the source that transmitted the message as 

specified by the controlling FDC or FCE, the SOI, or the SOP. The source character for a message 

originated by a MET section is entered during initialization. 

PRIORITY

A-9. The message priority is determined by the message category and type. It is specified by the 

controlling FDC at the time of loading or system initialization. The priority scheme is numbered from 1 to 

8, with 1 being highest priority. Message priority should not be altered by the MET system operator. The 

priority field occupies positions 8 through 11. Its format in the comm line is shown in figure A-3. 

Figure A-3. Priority field format 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-3

SUBSCRIBER

A-10. The subscriber is the logical name of the recipient of the message. The subscriber is specified by SOI 

or controlling headquarters SOP. The subscriber field (figure A-4) occupies positions 12 through 27 in the 

comm line and consists of five separate subfields (indicated by slashes and commas). The first subfield 

(position 15) is the section number, and the second (position 17) is the platoon number. These two 

subfields are not used for all subscribers. The third subfield (position 19) designates the battery. The fourth 

subfield designates the battalion and has two positions (21 and 22) for numbers. The fifth subfield 

designates the regiment and has three positions (24, 25, and 26). When the MET section originates a 

message, the subscriber name of the addressee may be specified; however, the destination code in the 

header must be specified. If the subscriber name is left blank, the subscriber name defaults to the logical 

name of the destination code. Therefore, the sender should enter the subscriber name if he wishes to relay 

the message through to another subscriber. 

Figure A-4. Subscriber field format 

SECURITY CLASSIFICATION

A-11. The security classification field occupies positions 28 through 33. It is entered automatically. This 

field contains one of the entries in table A-1. The security classification field format is shown in figure A5. 

Table A-1. Security Classification Field Entries 

Entries Meanings 

UN Unclassified 

ETO Encrypt for transmission only 

C Confidential 

S Secret 

CFR Secret formerly restricted data 

SRD Secret restricted data 

C*C Secret cryptography (crypto) 

S#C Secret Crypto 

Figure A-5. Security Classification Field 

SEGMENT INFORMATION

A-12. The segment information field (figure A-6) occupies positions 34 through 42. Positions 37 and 38 

indicate the message segment. Positions 40 and 41 indicate the total number of segments in the message 
Appendix A 

A-4 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

chain. For example, “SG: 03,10;” means that this message segment is the third of 10 message segments. If 

the field is not specified, one segment is assumed by the receiving computer. Message segment numbers 

are automatically inserted in all transmitted messages. 

Figure A-6. Segment information field format 

DATE-TIME GROUP

A-13. The date-time-group field (figure A-7) occupies positions 43 through 57 of the comm line. For FDC 

originated messages, the FDC enters the time of the last computer action or transmission. For MET section 

originated messages, the date-time group should be left blank since the FDC inserts the time of receipt. 

Positions 46 and 47 indicate the day of the month (1 through 31). Positions 49 and 50 indicate the hour (00 

through 23). Positions 52 and 53 indicate the minutes (00 through 59). Positions 55 and 56 indicate the 

seconds (00 through 59). 

Figure A-7. Date-time-group field format 

MESSAGE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

A-14. This number is a unique serial identification number assigned by the computer at the FCE. This field 

(figure A-8) occupies positions 58 through 65. 

Figure A-8. Message identification number field format 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-5

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

A-15. The automatic transmission field (figure A-9) occupies positions 66 through 69. The initial setting of 

this field is left blank. If automatic transmission is used, the computer inserts the character A in position 

68. 

Figure A-9. Automatic transmission field format 

DIGITAL DATA TERMINAL

A-16. Position 70 indicates the digital data terminal (DDT) at the FDC that is used to transmit the message. 

Positions 71 and 72 are not used. Figure A-10 shows the DDT field format. 

Figure A-10. Digital data terminal field format 

MET MESSAGE BODY 

A-17. The body of the MET message is composed of a heading and up to five data lines. 

HEADING

A-18. The message heading gives the message type, location of the MET section, date and time group in 

Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), altitude above sea level, atmospheric pressure, and for the target 

acquisition (TA) message, the cloud height from surface and the mean refractive index. Figure A-11 is an 

example of the heading of a MET message. Table A-2 identifies individual fields of the heading. 

Figure A-11. FATDS MET message heading format 

Table A-2. FATDS MET Message Heading Fields 

Fields Descriptions 

MET; Designates message category-meteorological.

CM; Designates message type (for this example, computer). Other message 

designator types are as follows: 

BM - ballistic (plaintext message [PTM]). 

CFL - fallout. 
Appendix A 

A-6 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table A-2. FATDS MET Message Heading Fields 

Fields Descriptions 

TA - target acquisition. 

W - WMO (PTM) 

K;t; (ballistic only) Designates the types of ballistic messages as follows: 

2 - surface to air.

3 - surface to surface.

_/_/_/_ _ _; (target 

acquisition only) 

Identifies MET station. The first five spaces are left blank. Fires 

battalion units may use FB1 or FB2 in the last three spaces. FA brigade 

units may use BD1 or what is designated by tactical standing operating 

procedure (TSOP). 

Q:X; Designates octant of the globe. The X is Octant 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 

9. Octant 4 is not used. Octant 9 is used when location is other than by 

latitude and longitude. 

POSI:xxxxxx; Designates location of station in six digits. The first three digits are used 

to encode the latitude and the last three to encode the longitude in 

degrees and tenths of degrees. When longitude is greater than 100, the 

hundreds digit is omitted. The location may be expressed in code. 

DTI:YY/GG.G/V; Designates date-time. The YY is the day of he month. The GG.G is the 

time of day in hours and tenths of an hour (24-hour clock). The V is the 

valid time period. 

NOTE: U.S. Forces use 0 for valid time, since they do not predict a 

period of validity.

HGT:hhh; Designates altitude of the MET station above mean sea level in tens of 

meters. 

ATMS:PPP; Designates MET station pressure to the nearest millibar. For pressures 

greater than 1,000 mb, thousands digit (000 to 999) is omitted. 

NOTE: This field is used for all MET messages except the fallout MET 

message. 

CBMRI:CCC/NNN; Designates cloud height (CCC) above the surface of the lowest cloud at 

the point of observation and the mean refractive index in “N” units. 

Cloud height is in tens of meters. If NNN is not included in the 

message, the spaces are left blank. 

NOTE: This field is used only for the target acquisition MET message. 

DATA LINES

A-19. Each data line contains the MET data for several zones, rather than each zone being transmitted by a 

separate line as in the standard message. Data for each zone within the data line are terminated by a 

comma. The data line is terminated by a semicolon. 

Computer MET Message 

A-20. Each data line in the body of the computer message contains zone data for line number, wind 

direction and speed, and temperature and midpoint pressure. Figure A-12 shows the format for a computer 

MET message. The symbols in the body of the computer MET message are defined in table A-3. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-7

Figure A-12. FATDS computer MET message format 

Table A-3. FATDS Computer MET Message Body Symbols 

Symbols Definitions 

ZZ/ Line number (zone) for message (00 to 26) 

DDD/ Zone wind direction in tens of mils (000 to 640) 

FFF/ Zone wind speed in knots (000 to 300) 

NOTE: When FFF is 000, then DDD is 000. 

TTT.T/ Zone mean virtual temperature to the nearest tenth of a degree Kelvin 

(000.0 to 500.0) 

PPPP Zone midpoint pressure in millibars (0000 to 1,100) 

Fallout MET Message 

A-21. Each data line in the body of the FOMET message contains zone data for zone number and wind 

direction and speed. Figure A-13 shows the format for the FOMET message. The symbols in the body of 

the FOMET message are defined in table A-4. 

Figure A-13. FATDS fallout MET message format 

Table A-4. FATDS Fallout MET Message Body Symbols 

Symbols Definitions 

ZZ/ Line designator for 2,000-meter zones (00 to 15) 

DDD/ Zone wind direction in tens of mils (000 to 640) 

FFF Zone wind velocity in knots (001 to 300) 

A-22. Each data line in the body of the TA MET message contains zone data for zone number, wind 

direction, wind speed, temperature, and relative humidity (RH). Figure A-14 shows the format for the TA 

MET message. The symbols in the body of the TA MET message are defined in table A-5. 
Appendix A 

A-8 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure A-14. FATDS target acquisition MET message format 

Table A-5. FATDS Target Acquisition Message Symbols 

Symbols Definitions 

ZZ/ Line number code (00 to 27) 

DDD/ Wind direction in tens of mils (000 to 640) 

FFF/ Wind speed in knots (000 to 300) 

TTTT/ Air temperature in tenths of Kelvin (000.0 to 500.0) 

UU Relative humidity as a percentage (01 to 00, where 00 is 100 percent) 

PLAIN TEXT MET MESSAGES 

A-23. As stated before, some receiving systems may not have the formats for the ballistic MET message or 

the WMO MET message in their database. However, a ballistic MET message can be transmitted to an FA 

unit in a plaintext message (PTM) and the WMO MET message can be sent to the SWO by PTM. The 

comm line of the PTM is the same as the comm line of the computer, fallout, and TA MET messages. The 

main differences are the heading and the body of the messages. 

BALLISTIC MET MESSAGE

A-24. The heading of the ballistic MET message contains the same information as the formatted messages. 

However, the ballistic MET message is preceded by the words ** BALLISTIC MESSAGE **. Symbols in 

the heading of the PTM format ballistic MET message are defined in table A-6. The body of the PTM 

ballistic MET message (figure A-15) contains four data lines (LNA through LND). Each data line consists 

of four zones separated by commas. Symbols in the body of the PTM format ballistic MET message are 

defined in table A-7. 

Figure A-15. Ballistic MET message (PTM) format 

Table A-6. FATDS Ballistic MET Message Heading Symbols 

Symbols Definitions 

MET Designates message category-meteorological. 

BM Designates message type-ballistic. 

K:t Designates type of ballistic MET message. The t is a 2 for type 2 (surface to 

air) or a 3 for type 3 (surface to surface) message. 

Q:X Designates octant of the globe. The X is octant 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9. 

Octant 4 is not used. Octant 9 is used when location is other than by 

latitude and longitude. 

POSI:xxxxxx Designates location of station is six digits. The first three digits are used to 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-9

Table A-6. FATDS Ballistic MET Message Heading Symbols 

Symbols Definitions 

encode the latitude and the last three to encode the longitude in degrees 

and tenths of degrees. When longitude is greater than 100 degrees, the 

hundreds digit is omitted. The location may be expressed in code. 

TI:YY/GG.G/V Indicates date-time. The YY is day of the month. The GG.G is the time of 

day in hours and tenths of an hour (24-hour clock). The V is the valid time 

period. 

NOTE: U.S. Forces use 0 for valid time, since they do not predict a period 

of validity. 

HGT:hhh Designates altitude of the MET station above mean sea level (MSL) in tens 

of meters. 

ATMS:PPP Designates MET station pressure to 0.1 percent of standard. If pressure is 

greater than 100 percent the hundreds digit is omitted. 

Table A-7. Ballistic MET Message Body Symbols 

Symbols Definitions 

ZZ/ Line number (zone) (00 to 15) 

DD/ Ballistic wind direction in hundreds of mils (00 to 64) 

NOTE: When FF is 00, the DD is 00. 

FF/ Ballistic wind speed in knots (00 to 99). (When wind speed equals or 

exceeds 100 knots, add 80 to the line number [ZZ].) 

TTT/ Ballistic air temperature in percent of standard to the nearest 0.1 percent 

(000 to 999) 

RRR Ballistic air density in percent of standard to the nearest 0.1 percent (000 to 

999) 

WORLD METEOROLOGICAL ORGANIZATION MET MESSAGE 

A-25. The heading of the WMO MET message is included in the SYS;PTM line instead of having a 

separate line as with other messages. The body of the message contains atmospheric data presented in the 

standard WMO message format, not in the data line format. The PTM format for the WMO MET message 

is shown in figure A-16. All of the entries for each part are not shown. The symbols in the heading of the 

PTM format WMO MET message are defined in table A-8. 
Appendix A 

A-10 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure A-16. WMO MET message PTM format 

Table A-8. WMO MET Message Heading Symbols 

Symbols Definitions 

MET Message category-meteorological 

W Message type-WMO 

Q Octant of the globe (0 to 3 or 5 to 9) 

LaLaLa Latitude of the station 

GG Release hour GMT (00 to 23) 

LoLoLo Longitude of the station 

Gg Release minute (GMT) (00 to 59) 

YY Date of release (GMT) 

HHH Altitude of MET station in tens of meters 

SECTION II JVMF MET MESSAGES (MMS–P) 

OVERVIEW 

A-26. Digital transmission is the primary means of sending MET messages to FA units. The MMS–P 

equipped MET section produces MET messages on demand in the format requested by the using unit. This 

is a shift from the manner MET messages were previously disseminated. Previously, a MET message was 

generated on a planned schedule and transmitted to the controlling headquarters FCE. The MET message 

was then broadcast (push method) to using units. The MMS–P processes requests for MET (pull method) 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-11

from using units. Upon the receipt of a request for MET, the MMS–P system generates MET data based on 

the midpoint between the unit’s location and the target location. 

A-27. Requests for MET and the resulting MET messages are normally routed through the controlling 

FCE. Using the primary/indirect option on the Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System (AFATDS), 

the using units can send requests to the MMS–P equipped system. 

A-28. The MMS–P equipped section uses the common message processor (CMP). CMP use is mandated in 

all newer systems to increase interoperability between systems. The MET messages generated by the 

MMS–P display in a format consistent with the requirements of the CMP. The data generated complies 

with all standardized agreements, and can be generated in STANAG format when that option is selected. 

The MMS–P system can produce all messages generated by the MMS if specifically selected during the 

sounding operation. 

A-29. The exception is the target area MET (TAM) message. There is currently no STANAG agreement 

for this message. 

MMS–P MET MESSAGES 

A-30. The MMS–P message generation function generates five different MET messages. The four MET 

messages generated upon request are the computer MET, target area MET, target acquisition MET, and 

basic wind report. The fifth MET message generated by the MMS–P is the upper air message. The upper 

air message is automatically generated by the MMS–P at the termination of a sounding flight. 

Computer MET Message

A-31. The computer MET (local area MET) message contains atmospheric data (that is, wind 

direction/speed, temperature, and air pressure) for the midpoint of the trajectory (highest point a round 

would travel) between the unit grid and the target area grid. Refer to figure A-17 for computer MET 

message format. 

z Atmospheric data at midpoint of the trajectory covers a 4- by 4-kilometer square by 30 

kilometer high area. 

z Target grid is determined from the actual or suspected target location. 
Appendix A 

A-12 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure A-17. Computer MET message format 

Target Area MET (TAM) Message 

A-32. The target area MET (TAM) message figure A-18 contains the atmospheric and visibility data (that 

is, winds, cloud height, precipitation type/rate, and horizontal visibility) at the target location. 

z Target grid is determined from the actual target location. 

z Data can be used to determine the appropriate munitions to use on the target. For example, if the 

winds, precipitation, or visibility conditions in the target area are too great, then instead of using 

laser-guided munitions, where the laser could be refracted off the target, a GPS guided, or dumb 

munitions, may be used instead. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-13

NOTE: There is no STANAG agreement for the TAM messages. Currently the only units that 

will use a target area MET message are Multiple Launch Rocket System (MLRS) equipped 

units. They will use the TAM for a decision aid only. 

Figure A-18. Target area MET message format 

Target Acquisition (TA) MET Message 

A-33. The target acquisition (TA) MET message figure A-19 contains atmospheric data (that is, wind 

speed/direction, temperature, and relative humidity), which is used by the target acquisition systems (that 

is, Ground Surveillance Radars and Firefinder Radars) on the battlefield. 
Appendix A 

A-14 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

NOTE: For the field artillery, the primary requestor will be the Firefinder Radar. 

Figure A-19. Target area MET message format 

Basic Wind Report 

A-34. The basic wind report figure A-20, formally known as the fallout MET message, contains wind data 

(that is, direction and speed) from surface to 30,000 meters that is used by the SWO to produce the 

chemical downwind report, which is used to predict the downwind hazard area and fallout patterns. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-15

Figure A-20. Basic wind report 

Upper Air Message 

A-35. The upper air message, also known as the WMO MET message, consists of high-altitude data (that 

is, wind speed/direction, pressure, height, temperature, and humidity), which is sent to either the SWO for 

weather predictions or the Integrated Meteorological System IMETS for transmission to other weather 

teams. 

COMMON MESSAGE PROCESSOR 

A-36. Common message processor (CMP) is the operator’s interface to the digital communications 

network. The graphical user interface (GUI) for the CMP is the messaging main menu screen. The 

messaging main menu is similar to a typical E-mail browser. Using messaging main menu figure A-21, the 

operator can send and receive, view, and transmit message traffic. The main menu screen is divided into 

areas with different functions. These include— 
Appendix A 

A-16 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

z Title bar, menu bar, and toolbar (1). 

z Folder select area (2). 

z Folder display area (3). 

z Message transmission information (4). 

z Precedence listing (5). 

z User view (6). 

z Status bar (7). 

Figure A-21. Main message menu screen 

Refer to TM 11-6660-293-12&P, appendix G, for a detailed explanation of using the CMP with 

the MMS–P. 

Communications Setup 

Communications GUI 

A-37. The communications GUI provides the MMS–P operator with a method for defining the network 

configuration, establishing the system’s address, and turning the network on and off. The network is 

configured based on the type system with which the MMS–P is to communicate. Consult the unit 

communications SOPs for guidance determining network configuration settings. Refer to TM 11-6660-

293-12&P, appendix I, for a detailed explanation of the use of the communication GUI. 

IP Address 

A-38. The internet protocol (IP) address is used by the TCIM device for sending and receiving 

communications. This is the address other units in the field will use to address the MMS–P section. It is 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-17

entered in dotted decimal format. This address is assigned by unit SOP. Figure A-22 shows an example of 

the local IP address. 

A-39. The subnet mask address establishes defines which parts of the IP address belong to the network 

address and the host address. The subnet mask is entered in dotted decimal format. This address is assigned 

by unit SOP. Figure A-22 shows an example of the subnet mask address. 

Unit Reference Number 

A-40. The unit reference number (URN) is specified by the commanding AFATDS master unit list (MUL) 

and assigned to the MMS–P section. Any incoming messages with a destination URN that matches the 

MMS–P section URN will be delivered to the CMP inbox. Figure A-22 shows an example of the URN. 

Figure A-22. Host address block 

Subscriber Table 

A-41. Prior to establishing communications, the MMS–P operator is required to populate the subscriber 

table. The subscriber table contains the unit name, URN, and IP address for each element communicating 

with the section. 

Address Book 

A-42. After populating the subscriber table, the MMS–P operator adds each of the units listed in the 

subscriber table to the CMP address book. The operator will now be able to send message traffic to all 

elements of the subscriber table. 

JOINT VARIABLE MESSAGE FORMAT 

A-43. The MMS–P message generator automatically populates MET messages with meteorological data in 

the requested format. All other messages are created using message templates. As a common message 

processor, the CMP contains various message sets with the corresponding message templates. This allows 

the CMP to be used on a variety of platforms. The operator will have to determine which message set to 

use for the current operation. 

A-44. The MMS–P was developed to use the joint variable message format (JVMF) message set (baseline). 

Systems not based on the variable message format (VMF) message set will not be able to use information 

request message to request MET data. The information request message is automatically processed by the 

MMS–P systems using 220 Protocols above version A. Requesting units not able to use the information 

request message can request MET using a free text message containing the unit location, target location, 

and the type MET needed. Requests for MET using a free text message is not automatically processed by 

the MMS–P. Refer to TM 11-6660-293-12&P, appendix G, for a detailed explanation of VMF message 

formats. 
Appendix A 

A-18 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

TRANSMITTING MESSAGES

A-45. The manner messages are transmitted is dependent upon the message type and the conditions under 

which the messages is being generated. Messages generated by the message generation function (MET 

messages) are placed in the draft folder of the CMP to allow the section personnel to perform MET 

checking procedures prior to transmitting the message to the requesting unit. These messages are 

transmitted using the Send button on the CMP toolbar. Figure A-23 shows the location of the Send button 

on the CMP toolbar. 

Figure A-23. CMP toolbar 

A-46. Messages created from a message format can be transmitted using the Send button located on 

message format. Messages selected for editing display in the same message format used to create the 

message and can be transmitted in the same manner. Figure A-24 shows the location of the Send button on 

the message format toolbar. 

Figure A-24. Message format toolbar 

SECTION III STANDARD MET MESSAGES 

TRANSMISSION OF STANDARD MET MESSAGES 

A-47. Standard MET messages can be transmitted to users by radio, messenger, or any other means 

necessary. When radio is to be the primary means of transmission, the MET section normally broadcasts to 

all users at the same time. Each standard MET message is discussed in the following paragraphs. 

COMPUTER MET MESSAGE 

A-48. The computer MET message is the primary MET message used by artillery units. The computer 

MET message differs from the ballistic message as follows: 

z Zone structure is different. 

z Zone values are not weighted. 

z Atmospheric pressure is reported instead of air density. 

z Weather elements are reported as zone values. 

COMPUTER MET MESSAGE ENCODING 

A-49. DA Form 3677-R (Computer MET Message [LRA]) is used for recording purposes. A coded 

computer message is shown in Figure A-25. A reproducible copy of this form is at the rear of this manual. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-19

Figure A-25. DA Form 3677-R 
Appendix A 

A-20 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

IDENTIFICATION LINE

A-50. The identification (ID) line is arranged in four 6-digit groups. A symbolic code is used to identify 

and encode the data in the proper format. Thus the symbols for the ID line are METCMQ, LaLaLaLoLoLo, 

YYGoGoGoG, and hhhPdPdPd. In Figure A-26, the ID line is shown encoded. 

Figure A-26. Computer MET message identification line 

Group 1 

A-51. Group 1 consists of METCMQ. The symbol METCM is placed at the beginning of each computer 

message. This symbol indicates that it is a MET message and that it contains computer-type MET data. The 

digit under the symbol Q represents the global octant in which the MET section is located. For convenience 

in determining the geographical location of the reporting MET section, the globe was divided into octants 

numbered 0 through 8. Table A-9 lists the octants of the globe. 

NOTE: The number 4 is not used. The number 9 is used when the location is coded. 

Table A-9 Octant of Globe Q Code 

Symbols Definitions 

0 North latitude-0° to 90° west longitude 

1 North latitude-90° to 180° west longitude 

2 North latitude-180° to 90° east longitude 

3 North latitude-90° to 0° east longitude 

4 Not used 

5 South latitude-0° to 90° west longitude 

6 South latitude-90° to 180° west longitude 

7 South latitude-180° to 90° east longitude 

8 South latitude-90° to 0° east longitude 

9 To be used when the location of the MET station is not indicated by 

latitude and longitude. 

Group 2 

A-52. Group 2 consists of LaLaLaLoLoLo or XXXXXX. These six spaces are used to specify the location to 

the nearest tenth of a degree. The symbol LaLaLa represents the latitude to the nearest tenth of a degree. The 

symbol LoLoLo represents the longitude to the nearest tenth of a degree. When the longitude is over 100 

degrees, the first digit is dropped. 

Group 3 

A-53. Group 3 consists of YYGoGoGoG. The symbol YY represents two digits for reporting the Greenwich 

date of the observation on which the message is based. The Greenwich date may differ from the local date, 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-21

depending on the location and the hour of the day. The symbol GoGoGo represents three digits for reporting 

hours in tens, units, and tenths of hours. Appendix G contains a chart of the world map that gives the 

information needed to convert local standard time and date to GMT and date. The symbol G represents the 

duration of validity of the message in hours. U.S. Forces always enter 0 in the space under G since the 

period of validity is not predicted. Other NATO forces use digits 1 through 8 in this space. A code of 9 

indicates a predicted validity of 12 hours. 

Group 4 

A-54. Group 4 consists of hhhPdPdPd. The symbol hhh represents the MET station altitude in tens of meters 

above mean sea level. The symbol PdPdPd represents the surface pressure in millibars. When the surface 

pressure is 1,000 millibars or higher, the first digit is dropped. 

Explanation Identifiction Line 

A-55. The identification line (for transmittal) is shown in figure A-26 and explained as follows: 

z The METCM1 indicates a computer-type message and a station location in octant 1. 

z The 347984 indicates station location at 34°42’N latitude and 98°24’W longitude. 

z The 251380 indicates the date of the message is the 25th day of the month, GMT date, at 1348, 

and it is from a U.S. Army artillery MET section. (This does not predict the period of validity of 

the message.) 

z The 036974 indicates the station altitude is 360 meters above mean sea level and the surface 

pressure is 974 millibars. 

Message Body 

A-56. The remaining lines of the message (ZZdddFFF TTTTPPPP) represent surface and zone MET data. 

The symbol ZZ represents the line number that identifies the reported MET information with the 

appropriate atmospheric layer. The line numbers begin with 00 (surface) and are numbered consecutively 

through line 26. The symbol ddd represents the true direction from which the wind is blowing. The 

direction is reported in tens of mils. The symbol FFF represents the true wind speed in knots. The symbol 

TTTT represents the virtual temperature. This temperature is expressed to the nearest 0.1°K. The symbol 

PPPP represents the air pressure. This pressure is expressed to the nearest millibar. The lines of the 

computer MET message are encoded and transmitted in eight-digit groups with two groups for each line. 

An example of the first two lines of a computer MET message is shown in figure A-27. The lines are 

explained in the following paragraphs. 

Figure A-27. Example MET message body 

First Line 

A-57. The 00 indicates surface level, 310 is a wind direction of 3,100 mils, 004 is a wind speed of 4 knots, 

2923 is a temperature of 292.3°K, and 0974 is a pressure of 974 millibars. 

Second Line 

A-58. The 01 indicates surface level, 250 is a wind direction of 2,500 mils, 011 is a wind speed of 11 

knots, 2931 is a temperature of 293.1°K, and 0962 is a pressure of 962 millibars. 
Appendix A 

A-22 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Authentication and Dissemination Blocks 

A-59. At the bottom of the form, spaces are provided for entering the units to whom the message was sent 

or from whom it was received, the message number, the names of the persons who recorded and checked 

the message, and the date-time groups. 

Reverse Side 

A-60. The back of DA Form 3677-R (figure A-28) shows a sample computer MET message and explains 

the coding of the message. Also, the coding for octant of the globe is shown. 

Figure A-28. DA Form 3677-R (Reverse) 

BALLISTIC MET MESSAGE 

A-61. The standard ballistic MET message provides for the common use and exchange of ballistic MET 

data among the allied countries during joint combat operations. DA Form 3675-R, Ballistic Message 

(LRA), is used for encoding the standard MET message (Figure A-29). A copy of this form is located at the 

rear of this manual. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-23

Figure A-29. DA Form 3675-R 
Appendix A 

A-24 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

BALLISTIC MET MESSAGE ENCODING 

A-62. A symbolic code is used to conveniently encode the ballistic MET message data in proper format. 

The data are arranged in six-digit groups for transmitting the message. 

IDENTIFICATION LINE

A-63. The first four 6-digit groups pertain to the ID line of the ballistic MET message. The symbols are not 

transmitted; they are only used by the encoder to put the information in proper format and sequence. 

Detailed explanations of the symbols and the coding procedures for the ID line are discussed in the 

following paragraphs. Figure A-30 shows an encoded identification line. 

Figure A-30. Ballistic MET message identification line 

Group 1 

A-64. Group 1 consists of METBKQ. The symbol METB is placed at the beginning of each ballistic MET 

message. These letters indicate that it is a MET message and that it includes ballistic MET data. Either a 2 

or a 3, depending on the type of ballistic MET message, is entered for the symbol K. The type 2 message is 

prepared for surface-to-air trajectories. The type 3 message is prepared for surface-to-surface trajectories. 

The digit under the symbol Q represents the code for the global octant in which the MET section is located. 

For convenience in determining the geographical location of the reporting MET station, the globe was 

divided into octants numbered 0 through 8. 

NOTE: The number 4 is not used. The digit 9 is used when the location is coded. 

Group 2 

A-65. Group 2 consists of LaLaLaLoLoLo or XXXXXX. The symbol LaLaLa represents the latitude to the 

nearest tenth of a degree. The symbol LoLoLo represents the longitude to the nearest tenth of a degree. 

When the longitude is over 100 degrees, the first digit is dropped. 

Group 3 

A-66. Group 3 consists of YYGoGoGoG. The symbol YY represents two digits for reporting the Greenwich 

date of the observation on which the message is based. The Greenwich date may differ from the local date, 

depending on the location and the hour. The symbol GoGoGo represents three spaces for reporting the time 

of commencement of the validity of the message in hours and tenths of hours. Local standard time must be 

corrected to reflect GMT in this block. This correction can be made by referring to the world map in 

appendix G. The symbol G represents the duration of validity of the MET message in hours from 1 to 8. 

The code numeral 9 indicates a period of validity of 12 hours. U.S. Forces always enter a 0 in the space 

under G since the period of validity is not predicted. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-25

Group 4 

A-67. Group 4 consists of hhhPPP. The symbol hhh represents the three digits indicating the altitude of the 

MET station. The three spaces under hhh are used to express the altitude in tens of meters above mean sea 

level. The symbol PPP represents the three digits indicating the atmospheric pressure at the MET station to 

the nearest 0.1 percent of the ICAO standard. When pressure is 100 percent or over, the first digit is 

dropped. 

Explanation 

A-68. The identification line is shown in Figure A-30 and explained as follows: 

z The METB31 indicates a ballistic message type 3, surface to surface, and a station location in 

octant 1. 

z The 347984 indicates a station location at 34° 42’N latitude and 98° 24’W longitude. 

z The 251380 indicates the date of the message is the 25th day of the month, GMT date, at 1348, 

and it is from a U.S. Army MET section (This does not predict validity). 

z The 036961 indicates the station altitude is 360 meters above mean sea level and the surface 

pressure is 96.1 percent of standard.

MESSAGE BODY

A-69. The columns and lines in the body of the message (figure A-31) are used for encoding the ballistic 

data for each line of the ballistic message. The first column is a list of the standard zone heights in meters. 

The zone height data are not transmitted. The second column lists the line numbers identifying each 

artillery zone of the atmosphere. The remaining four columns are used for encoding the ballistic MET data 

pertaining to each line. Each line is transmitted in two 6-digit groups representing the line number and the 

ballistic data in each standard zone. For example, the symbols for a line are ZZddFF and TTT ΔΔΔ. 

Figure A-31. Ballistic MET message body 
Appendix A 

A-26 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Group 1 

A-70. The symbol ZZ indicates 00 for surface, 01 for line 1, 02 for line 2, and so on. The symbol dd 

represents the two digits indicating ballistic wind direction in hundreds of mils. The symbol FF represents 

the two digits indicating ballistic wind speed in knots. 

Group 2 

A-71. The symbol TTT represents the three digits indicating ballistic temperature in percentage of standard 

to the nearest tenth of a percent. For temperatures above 100 percent, the first digit is dropped. The symbol 

ΔΔΔ represents the three digits indicating ballistic density in percentage of standard to the nearest tenth of a 

percent. For densities over 100 percent, the first digit is dropped. 

Explanation 

A-72. The first line, (003104 and 014949), of the MET message (figure A-31) indicates the following: 

z 00-Surface information follows. 

z 31-Surface wind direction is 3,100 mils. 

z 04-Surface wind speed is 4 knots. 

z 014-Surface temperature is 101.4 percent of standard. 

z 949-Surface density is 94.9 percent of standard.

Winds Exceeding 100 Knots 

A-73. Anytime a ballistic wind exceeds 100 knots, 100 is subtracted from the speed (for example, 105 - 

100 = 05). The result (05) is entered in the winds speed column of the ballistic message. To permit easy 

identification of a line number in which the ballistic wind exceeds 100 knots, 80 is added to that line 

number (for example, line 05 + 80 = 85). 

Remarks Section 

A-74. Below the ballistic data (figure A-32), a space is provided for any remarks deemed appropriate, such 

as a comment on any unusual data in the message. 

Figure A-32. DA Form 3675-R 

Authentication and Dissemination Blocks 

A-75. At the bottom of the form, spaces are provided for entering the units to whom the message was sent 

or from whom it was received, the message number, the names of the persons who recorded and checked 

the message, and the date-time groups. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-27

Reverse Side 

A-76. The back of the form (figure A-33) shows a sample ballistic MET message and explains the 

encoding. Also, the information for coding the octant of the globe is shown. 

Figure A-33. DA Form 3675-R (Reverse) 

TARGET ACQUISTION MET MESSAGE 

A-77. The TA MET message defines a format for use with unmanned aerial systems (UASs), remotely 

piloted vehicles (RPVs), drones, and weapons-locating radars (WLRs). The TA MET message standardizes 

the number of information digits in the message and their meanings. This standardization makes it possible 

for all armed forces to understand and use TA MET message information issued by any service of any 

armed forces. 

TARGET ACQUISTION MET MESSAGE ENCODING 

A-78. The sequence and number of symbols for a TA MET message are in table A-10.
Appendix A 

A-28 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table A-10. TA MET Message Groups 

Groups Symbols 

1 METTAQ 

2 LaLaLaLoLoLo or XXXXXX 

3 YYGoGoGoG 

4 hhh PdPdPd

5 CCC NNN 

6 ZtZtddd FFF 

7 ttttUU 

8 99999 

NOTES: 

1. Group 6 and 7 are repeated for each zone number of the message. Only those zones of the 

message that are required by the recipient need be used. 

2. If any data are not available, the missing data are indicated with a slash (/) for each missing 

digit. This note applies also to optional groups such as NNN in group 5. 

GROUP 1 

A-79. Group 1 consists of METTAQ. The symbol METTA indicates that this is a TA MET message. The 

symbol Q represents the octant of the globe. 

GROUP 2 

A-80. Group 2 consists of LaLaLaLoLoLo or XXXXXX. The symbol LaLaLa represents the latitude to the 

nearest tenth of a degree. The symbol LoLoLo represents the longitude to the nearest tenth of a degree. 

When the longitude is over 100, the first digit is dropped. 

GROUP 3 

A-81. Group 3 consists of YYGoGoGoG. The symbol YY represents the day of the month (GMT) of the 

commencement of the period of validity of the message. The symbol GoGoGo represents the time of 

commencement of the period of validity of the message. Time is recorded in tens, units, and tenths of an 

hour (GMT). The symbol G represents the duration of the period of validity in hours from 1 to 8. Code 

figure 9 indicates 12 hours. U.S. Forces use 0 since the period of validity is not predicted. 

GROUP 4 

A-82. Group 4 consists of hhhPdPdPd. The symbol hhh represents the height of the MET section above 

mean sea level in tens of meters. The symbol PdPdPd represents the pressure at the MET section location 

expressed in hundreds, tens, and units of millibars. When the value of the air pressure is 1,000 millibars or 

more, the first digit is omitted. 

GROUP 5 

A-83. Group 5 consists of CCCNNN. The symbol CCC represents the height of the base of the lowest 

cloud at the point of observation. It is given in tens of meters according to the cloud code in table A-11. 

The symbol NNN represents mean refractive index at the surface in N units. If NNN is not to be included 

in the message, these missing data will be indicated by three slashes (///). 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-29

Table A-11 Cloud Code 

Code Description 

000 Indicates sky obscured by fog. 

001-160 Indicates visual estimate of base of lowest cloud, in tens of meters, below 1,600 

meters. 

166 Indicates visual estimate of base of lowest cloud above 1,600 meters. 

199 Indicates clear sky. 

301-460 Indicates base of lowest cloud observed by searchlight or laser. Subtract 300 to 

obtain base of lowest cloud observed by searchlight or laser, in tens of meters, if 

below 1,600 meters. 

466 Indicates base of lowest cloud observed by searchlight or laser above 1,600 

meters. 

477 Indicates searchlight or laser observation unreliable. 

499 Indicates no cloud detected by searchlight or laser. 

501-660 Indicates height at which a balloon was lost in cloud. Subtract 500 to obtain height 

at which a balloon was lost in cloud, in tens of meters, if below 1,600 meters. 

666 Indicates balloon lost above 1,600 meters. 

677 Indicates balloon observation unreliable. 

NOTE: Each service uses that portion of the code appropriate to its own procedures. 

GROUP 6 

A-84. Group 6 consists of ZtZtdddFFF. The symbol ZtZt represents the zone number code. Table A-12 lists 

zone number codes. The symbol ddd represents the mean wind direction for the zone given in thousands, 

hundreds, and tens of mils. For zone number 00, the value is the wind direction at the MET section 

location. The symbol FFF represents the mean wind speed of the zone in hundreds, tens, and units of knots. 

For zone number 00, the value is the wind speed at surface. 

Table A-12. Zone Number Code 

ZtZt Height Of Midpoint Of 

Zone Above MDP 

(Meters)

Height Above MDP Of Zone (Meters)

 Base Top 

00 0 - - 

01 25 0 50 

02 75 50 100 

03 150 100 200 

04 250 200 300 

05 350 300 400 

06 450 400 500 

07 550 500 600 

08 650 600 700 

09 750 700 800 

10 850 800 900 

11 950 900 1,000 
Appendix A 

A-30 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table A-12. Zone Number Code 

ZtZt Height Of Midpoint Of 

Zone Above MDP 

(Meters)

Height Above MDP Of Zone (Meters)

12 1,050 1,000 1,100 

13 1,150 1,100 1,200 

14 1,250 1,200 1,300 

15 1,350 1,300 1,400 

16 1,450 1,400 1,500 

17 1,550 1,500 1,600 

18 1,650 1,600 1,700 

19 1,750 1,700 1,800 

20 1,850 1,800 1,900 

21 1,950 1,900 2,000 

22 2,050 2,000 2,100 

23 2,150 2,100 2,200 

24 2,250 2,200 2,300 

25 2,350 2,300 2,400 

26 2,450 2,400 2,500 

27 2,550 2,500 2,600 

GROUP 7 

A-85. This group consists of ttttUU. The symbol tttt represents the mean air temperature of the zone in 

hundreds, tens, units, and tenths of a degree Kelvin. For zone number 00, the value is the air temperature at 

surface. The symbol UU represents the mean RH expressed as a percentage in tens and units. A mean RH 

of 100 percent is denoted by 00. 

GROUP 8 

A-86. Group 8 consists of 99999. This group is a message terminator. It is used only when the message is 

transmitted by telegraphic means. 

SOUND RANGING MET MESSAGE 

A-87. Sound ranging MET messages are used by sound ranging platoons to determine the location of 

sound sources. Locating sound sources requires hourly updates concerning the atmosphere through which 

the sound waves pass. Required data is the effective temperature characteristics of the atmosphere between 

the sound source and the sound base and the effect of the wind on the rate and direction of travel of the 

sound wave. Sound ranging platoons can provide the required data themselves on an hourly basis. MET 

sections can provide the data only when soundings are made as scheduled, but normally not hourly. Also, 

MET sections may be positioned a great distance from a sound ranging platoon. Because the U.S. Army no 

longer has sound ranging platoons in the force structure, MET sections will probably have a requirement 

for sound ranging MET messages only when supporting allied operations. 

SOUND RANGING MET MESSAGE ENCODING 

A-88. When used, the sound ranging MET message is provided in the format shown in figure A-34. The 

parts of the sound ranging MET message are as follows: 

z The symbol METSR indicates that this is a sound ranging MET message. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-31

z The symbol Q represents the octant of the globe in which the MET station is located. 

z The symbol LaLaLa represents the latitude of the MET station to the nearest tenth of a degree. 

z The symbol LoLoLo represents the longitude of the MET station to the nearest tenth of a degree. 

z The symbol dd represents the day of the month (GMT) of the sound ranging MET message.

z The symbol tttt represents the time message validity begins. 

z The symbol TTT represents the effective (sonic) temperature to the nearest tenth of a degree 

Celsius. 

z The symbol DDD represents the effective wind direction in mils. 

z The symbol SS represents the effective wind speed in knots. 

Figure A-34. Sound ranging MET message format 

WORLD METEOROLOGICAL ORGANIZATION MET MESSAGE 

A-89. The WMO MET message provides high-altitude sounding data. The MET section automatically 

provides the message in the WMO format to support the SWO. 

WORLD METEOROLGICAL ORGANIZATION MET MESSAGE 

ENCODING 

A-90. The automated WMO message consists of a heading and a message body. The encoded format 

conforms to the WMO format for worldwide transmission of MET data. The body of the message is in six 

parts; each part consists of groups of five digits. 

HEADING

A-91. The heading of the WMO MET message is an identification line encoded in the format shown in 

figure A-35. The parts of the MET message identification line are as follows: 

z The symbol METW identifies the MET message as being a MET message in WMO format. 

z The symbol Q represents the octant of the globe. The octant identifies the part of the globe in 

which the MET section is located. 

z The symbol LaLaLa identifies the latitude of the MET station location. 

z The symbol GG identifies the release hour (GMT) of the sounding. 

z The symbol LoLoLo identifies the longitude of the MET station location. 

z The symbol gg identifies the release time to the nearest minute (GMT).

z The symbol YY represents the date of release (GMT). 

z The symbol hhh represents MET station altitude in tens of meters. 

Figure A-35. WMO MET message identification line 

PART A (TTAA)-MANDATORY LEVEL DATA

A-92. Part A consists of mandatory level temperature, dew point (DP), and wind direction and speed below 

100 millibars. The format of part A data is in figure A-36. 
Appendix A 

A-32 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure A-36. Format for part A (TTAA) of WMO MET message 

Section 1 

A-93. Section 1 of part A contains individual position identification data. Individual entries for section 1 of 

part A are discussed below. The format for section 1 is shown in figure A-37. 

z The symbol TTAA identifies the data as Part A (mandatory levels). 

z The symbol YY represents the date of the flight (GMT). 

z NOTE: If wind speeds are recorded in knots, then 50 is added to the date. For example, 15 May 

is encoded 65. If wind speeds are recorded in meters per second, then the date is recorded in the 

normal manner. 

z The symbol GG represents the time of observation to the nearest whole hour (GMT). 

z The symbol Id represents the hundreds' digit of the last millibar level that winds are available. 

See Table A-13 lists the codes for last millibar level that winds are available. 

z The symbol IIiii is a USAF location code. The II identifies the country or geographic area. The 

iii identifies individual stations within the country or geographic area. 

Figure A-37. Format for section 1, part A (TTAA) of WMO MET message. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-33

Table A-13. Codes for Last Millibar Level That Winds Are Available 

Code Figure Wind group reported up to and including the following standard isobaric surfaces: 

Part A Part C 

1 100 OR 15 mb 10 mb 

2 200 or 250 mb 20 mb 

3 300 mb 30 mb 

4 400 mb ..................... 

5 500 mb 50 mb 

6 ..................... ..................... 

7 700 mb 70 mb 

8 850 mb ..................... 

9 ..................... ..................... 

0 1,000 mb ..................... 

/ No wind groups reported for any of 

the standard isobaric surfaces 

No wind groups reported for any of the 

standard isobaric surfaces 

Section 2 

A-94. Surface data and standard isobaric surfaces data comprise section 2 of part A. Entries for section 2 

are discussed in the following paragraphs. The format for section 2 is shown in figure A-38. 

Figure A-38. Format for section 2, part A (TTAA) of WMO MET message 

A-95. The number 99 is the surface indicator. 

A-96. The symbol PoPoPo represents the surface pressure. If the surface pressure is over 1,000 millibars, 

drop the thousands' digit. 

A-97. The symbol ToToTao represents the temperature to the tenths of a degree Celsius. The last digit (Tao) 

indicates if it is a positive or negative temperature value. Table A-14 lists temperature codes. 

Table A-14. Temperature Tenths Value Code 

Positive Temperature 

Tenths Value 

Code Figure Negative Temperature 

Tenths Value 

Code Figure 

.0 0 .0 1 

.1 0 .1 1 

.2 2 .2 3 

.3 2 .3 3 

.4 4 .4 5 
Appendix A 

A-34 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table A-14. Temperature Tenths Value Code 

Positive Temperature 

Tenths Value 

Code Figure Negative Temperature 

Tenths Value 

Code Figure 

.5 4 .5 5 

.6 6 .6 7 

.7 6 .7 7 

.8 8 .8 9 

.9 8 .9 9 

A-98. The symbol DoDo represents the DP depression. Table A-15 lists DP depression codes. DP 

depressions of 0.0 to 4.9 are encoded as 00 to 49. DP depressions from 5.0 to 5.5 are encoded as 50. DP 

depressions 5.5 and above are rounded off to the nearest whole degree and 50 is added to the result. (For 

example, DP depression 15.8 is encoded 16 + 50 = 66.) 

Table A-15. Dew Point Depression Code 

Code Figure Depression of the Dew 

Point in Degrees 

Celsius 

Code Figure Depression of the Dew 

Point in Degrees 

Celsius 

00 0.0 40 4.0 

01 0.1 41 4.1 

02 0.2 42 4.2 

03 0.3 43 4.3 

04 0.4 44 4.4 

05 0.5 45 4.5 

06 0.6 46 4.6 

07 0.7 47 4.7 

08 0.8 48 4.8 

09 0.9 49 4.9 

10 1.0 50 5 

11 1.1 51 

12 1.2 52 

13 1.3 53 NOT USED 

14 1.4 54 

15 1.5 55 

16 1.6 56 6 

17 1.7 57 7 

18 1.8 58 8 

19 1.9 59 9 

20 2.0 60 10 

21 2.1 61 11 

22 2.2 - - 

23 2.3 70 20 

24 2.4 71 21 

25 2.5 - - 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-35

Table A-15. Dew Point Depression Code 

Code Figure Depression of the Dew 

Point in Degrees 

Celsius 

Code Figure Depression of the Dew 

Point in Degrees 

Celsius 

26 2.6 80 30 

27 2.7 81 31 

28 2.8 - - 

29 2.9 89 39 

30 3.0 90 40 

31 3.1 91 41 

32 3.2 - - 

33 3.3 98 48 

34 3.4 99 49 or more 

35 3.5 

36 3.6 

37 3.7 

38 3.8 

39 3.9 

A-99. The symbol dodofofofo represents wind direction and speed. Wind direction is rounded to the nearest 5 

degrees. The last digit of the wind direction is added to the first digit of the wind speed when wind speed 

exceeds 99 knots. (For example, a wind direction of 293 and a wind speed of 45 knots are encoded as 

29545. A wind direction of 115 and a wind speed of 126 knots are encoded as 11626.) 

A-100. The symbol hhh represents height in geopotential meters. This is a mandatory data entry for 

mandatory pressure levels. Table A-16 lists mandatory pressure levels. 

Table A-16. Mandatory Pressure Levels 

Level Millibars 

00 1,000 

92 925 

85 850 

70 700 

50 500 

40 400 

30 300 

20 200 

15 150 

10 100 

NOTES: 

1. Geopotential heights are reported in whole geopotential meters for surface up to 500 mb. 

Geopotential heights are reported in tens of geopotential meters for heights at the 500 mb level 

and above. Geopotential heights below mean sea level are coded by adding 500 to the absolute 

value. (For example, -239 is encoded as 739 [500+239]) 
Appendix A 

A-36 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

2. Sometimes the surface pressure is lower than 1,000 mb, 850 mb, and so on. In this case, the 

1,000 mb level is reported with slashes (///) after the height entry. Figure A-39 shows an 

example of this reporting. 

Figure A-39. Surface pressure reporting 

A-101. The symbol TTTa represents the surface temperature. This is a mandatory data entry for standard 

isobaric surfaces. 

A-102. The symbol DD represents the DP depression. This is a mandatory data entry for standard isobaric 

surfaces. 

A-103. The symbol ddfff represents the wind direction and speed. This is a mandatory data entry for 

standard isobaric surfaces. 

Section 3 

A-104. Tropopause data entries are in Section 3 of Part A. These entries are discussed below. The format 

for section 3 is shown in Figure A-40. 

z The number 88 is the tropopause data indicator. 

NOTE: If tropopause data are missing, the missing data are reported encoded as 88999. 

z The symbol PtPtPt represents the pressure of the tropopause. 

z The symbol TtTtTat represents the temperature at the tropopause. 

z The symbol DtDt represents the DP depression at the tropopause. 

z The symbol dtdtftftft represents the wind direction and speed at the tropopause. 

Figure A-40. Format for section 3, part A (TTAA) of WMO MET message 

Section 4 

A-105. Maximum wind data entries are in section 4 of part A. These entries are discussed below. The 

format for section 4 is shown in figure A-41. 

z The number 66 or 77 is the maximum wind indicator. A 66 maximum wind indicator indicates 

the greatest wind speed observed throughout the sounding and occurring at the terminating level 

of sounding. A 77 maximum wind indicator indicates the level of maximum wind speed 

occurring within the sounding. Maximum winds must be above the 500-mb level and over 60 

knots in speed to be reported. When no maximum wind data is observed, 77999 shall be 

reported for Section 4. 

z The symbol PmPmPm represents the pressure at wind data. 

z The symbol dmdmfmfmfm represents the maximum wind direction and speed. Wind direction is 

encoded to the nearest 5°. The rounded digit is added to the hundreds digit of the speed. (For 

example, 30160 is 300° at 160 knots.) 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-37

z The symbol 4vbvbvava represents the vertical wind shear data. These values are derived by using 

analytical geometry and are not easily checked in the field. The data reported with this entry are 

as follows: 

 4 - Vertical wind shear data indicator. 

 vbvb - Value of vector difference between maximum wind speed and the 

wind blowing at 3,000 feet below the level of the maximum winds, in 

knots. 

 vava - Value of the vector difference between the maximum wind speed and 

the wind blowing at 3,000 feet above the level of the maximum winds, in 

knots. 

Figure A-41. Format for section 4, part A (TTAA) of WMO MET message 

PART B (TTBB)-SIGNIFICANT DATA (TEMPERATURE AND DEW POINT) BELOW 100

MILLIBARS

A-106. The format for part B (TTBB) is shown in figure A-42. 

Figure A-42. Format for part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message 

Section I 

A-107. Section 1 of Part B contains position identification data. The data entries are discussed below. 

Section I is shown in figure A-43. 

z The symbol TTBB is the Part B significant levels indicator. TT means sounding was made by a 

land-based station. UU means the sounding was made by a ship-based station. 

z The symbol YY represents the date (GMT). 

z The symbol GG represents the time of observation to the nearest whole hour (GMT). 
Appendix A 

A-38 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

z The symbol / represents the last level at which wind data were obtained. 

z The symbol IIiii is a USAF identification code. The II identifies the country or geographic area. 

The iii identifies individual stations within the country or geographic area. 

Figure A-43. Section 1, part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message 

Section 5 

A-108. Section 5 of part B (TTBB) is composed of surface data and significant levels of temperature and 

DP. The surface data entries and the significant level data entries are discussed below. Section 5 is shown 

in figure A-44. 

z The symbol 00 is a surface indicator. 

z The symbol PoPoPo represents the surface pressure. 

z The symbol ToToTao represents the surface temperature. 

z The symbol DoDo represents the surface DP depression. 

z The symbol 11 and symbols continuing on in multiples of 11 are level indicators. 

z The symbol PPP represents pressure. 

z The symbol TTTa represents temperature. 

z The symbol DD represents DP depression. 

Figure A-44. Section 5, part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message 

Section 7 

A-109. Section 7 of part B (TTBB) contains data on sea-surface temperature and sounding system used. 

The 31313 is the section indicator. Section 7 is shown in figure A-45. 

z The symbol Sr represents solar and infrared radiation correction. 

z The symbol RaRa is the radiosonde/sounding system used. 

z The symbol SaSa is the tracking technique/status of the system used. 

z The symbol 8 is the indicator for time. 

z The symbol Gggg represents time of observation, in hours and minutes. 

z The 9 is the indicator for the sign of data, relative humidity, and sea-surface temperature. 

z The symbol Sn represents the sign of data and relative humidity indicator. 

z The symbol TwTwTw is the sea-surface temperature reported in tenths of a degree Celsius. 

Figure A-45. Section 7, part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-39

Section 8 

A-110. Section 8 of part B (TTBB) contains cloud code information. 41414 is the section indicator. The 

codes can be found in appendix B of this manual. Section 8 is shown in figure A-46.

z The symbol Nh is the amount of CL present or, if no CL is present, the amount of all the CM cloud 

present.

z The symbol CL represents cloud classes stratocumulus, stratus, cumulus, and cumulonimbus.

z The symbol h represents the height above surface of the base of the lowest cloud seen.

z The symbol CM represents cloud classes altocumulus, altostratus, and nimbostratus.

z The symbol CH represents cloud classes cirrus, cirrocumulus, and cirrostratus.

Figure A-46. Section 8, part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message 

Section 9

A-111. Section 9 of part B (TTBB) contains additional codes developed regionally. Section 9 is shown in 

Figure A-47. 

z The 51515 is the section indicator. 

z The symbol AdfAdf represents the form of the additional data reported. 

Figure A-47. Section 9, part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message 

PART B (PPBB)-SIGNIFICANT DATA (WIND DIRECTION AND SPEED) BELOW 100

MILLIBARS

A-112. The format for part B (PPBB) is shown in figure A-48. 

Figure A-48. Format for part B (PPBB) of WMO MET messages 
Appendix A 

A-40 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Section I 

A-113. Section 1 of part B (PPBB) contains position identification data. Data entries are discussed below. 

z The symbol PPBB is the part B (winds data) below 100 millibars.) 

z The symbol YY represents the date (GMT). 

z The symbol GG represents the time of observation to the nearest whole hour (GMT). 

z The symbol a4 represents the type of instrument used in the observation. The symbol IIiii is a 

USAF location code. The II identifies the country or geographic area. 

z The iii identifies individual stations within the country or geographic area. 

Section 4 

A-114. Section 4 of part B (PPBB) contains fixed regional levels data. The data entries are discussed in 

the following paragraphs. Fixed regional level data for part B are in table A-17. Heights indicated are 

above mean sea level. 

Table A-17. Fixed Regional Levels 

Feet Meters 

1,000 300 

2,000 600 

3,000 900 

4,000 1,200 

6,000 1,800 

7,000 2,100 

8,000 2,400 

9,000 2,700 

12,000 3,600 

14,000 4,200 

16,000 4,800 

20,000 6,000 

25,000 7,500 

30,000 9,000 

35,000 10,500 

50,000 15,000 

A-115. In the symbol 9tnu1u2u3, the 9 is a height indicator, and tn is the 10,000-foot indicator. The u1 is the 

first wind level, u2 is the second wind level, and u3 is the third wind level. (For example, 90012 indicates 

surface level, 1,000-foot level, and 2,000-foot level. If surface level were over 1,000 feet above sea level, 

the indicator would be 90023. The 9205/ indicates 20,000-foot level and 25,000-foot level.) 

A-116. The symbol ddfff represents wind direction and speed. Wind direction is given to the nearest 10 

degrees. Winds are reported to the nearest 5 degrees by adding 500 to wind speed. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-41

PART C (TTCC)-MANDATORY LEVEL TEMPERATURE, DEW POINT, AND WIND DATA 

ABOVE 100 MILLIBARS

A-117. The format for part C (TTCC) is shown in figure A-49. Identification of individual entries is the 

same for part C (TTCC) as for part A (TTAA). This section is omitted if the balloon bursts between 100 

and 70 millibars. However, in this case, TTDD and PPDD must be transmitted so that the user can 

determine what data are available between 100 and 70 millibars. 

Figure A-49. Format of part C (TTCC) of WMO MET message 

PART D (TTDD) – SIGNIFICANT LEVEL (TEMPERATURE AND DEW POINT ABOVE 100

MILLIBARS

A-118. The format for part D (TTDD) is shown in Figure A-50. Identification of individual entries is the 

same for part D (TTDD) as for part B (TTBB). 

Figure A-50. Format of part D (TTDD) of WMO MET message 
Appendix A 

A-42 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

PART D (PPDD)-SIGNIFICANT DATA (WIND DIRECTION AND SPEED) ABOVE 100

MILLIBARS

A-119. The format for part D (PPDD) is shown in figure A-51. Identification of individual entries is the 

same for part D (PPDD) as for part B (PPBB). Fixed regional level data for part D are included in Table 

A-18. Altitudes are above mean sea level. 

Figure A-51. Format of part D (PPDD) of WMO MET message 

Table A-18. Fixed Regional Level Data 

Feet Meters 

70,000 21,000 

90,000 27,000 

100,000 30,000 

110,000 33,000 

140,000 42,000 

and for every 10,000-foot level 

upward 

and for every 3,000-meter 

level upward 

FALLOUT MET MESSAGES 

A-120. The FOMET message contains only wind data recorded at 2,000-meter intervals from the surface 

to 30,000 meters. This data is used by CBRN personnel mainly at division and corps levels to develop the 

downwind messages that predict fallout patterns. 

ENCODING FALLOUT MET MESSAGES 

A-121. Met data for fallout predictions are recorded on DA Form 3676-R, Fallout Message (LRA). Figure 

A-52 shows an encoded fallout message. A copy of this form is at the rear of this manual. The following 

paragraphs discuss how the data recorded on the form are encoded. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-43

Figure A-52. DA Form 3676-R 

OCTANT AND LOCATION

A-122. The area is identified by either a geographic location or a coded location of the MET station. In 

either case, the location is preceded by a number from the Q code, which designates the octant of the globe 

in which the station is located. The geographic location of the MET station may be determined from a 

military map and is recorded in degrees and tenths of degrees. If the longitude is equal to 100 degrees or 

more, the first digit, 1, is dropped. For example, latitude 34°42°N, longitude 98°24’W would be encoded 

as 1 347984. When operations require that the station be identified by a code, the Q code number 9 is used 
Appendix A 

A-44 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

to signify that the next six digits are a coded location of the MET station. The using unit must understand 

the code used for the location. 

A-123. The day of the month is entered in two digits. For example, the number 25 indicates the message is 

for the 25th day (GMT) of the month. 

A-124. The release time in hours and tenths of hours is entered in three digits. Thus, the number 138 

indicates a release time of 1348 GMT. 

A-125. A digit from 1 to 8 is entered to represent duration of validity in hours. Code figure 9 indicates 12 

hours. U.S. Forces use the digit 0 since they do not predict how long MET messages will be valid. 

A-126. The altitude of the MET station above mean sea level is entered in tens of meters. The altitude of 

the station may be determined from a military map or from the survey section and is encoded in three 

digits. For example, the number 036 indicates the station is 360 meters above mean sea level. 

A-127. The line number is identified by two digits that correspond to the zone number. The first line 

number, 00, indicates surface; 01, surface to 2,000 meters; 02, 2,000 meters to 4,000 meters; and so on. 

A-128. Wind direction is encoded in three digits to the nearest 10 mils. Wind speed is encoded in three 

digits to the nearest knot. The number 310 indicates the wind direction is 3,100 mils. The number 004 

indicates a speed of 4 knots. 

A-129. The remarks block is used to record other pertinent data. 

A-130. The FOMET message is transmitted in a certain code group format. An example of the format is 

METFMQ LaLaLaLoLoLo (pause) YYGGGG (pause) hhh (pause) ZZdddFFF (pause) ZZdddFFF, and so on. 

ENCODING STANDARD MESSAGES FROM MMS–P MET 

MESSAGES 

A-131. MMS and STANAG MET message formats are arranged in a tabular format. The message will 

contain heading information followed by line numbers corresponding to a predetermined atmospheric 

zone. Associated with the line number are the wind speed, wind direction, temperature, and pressure for 

that atmospheric zone. 

A-132. MMS–P system generates the same MET data for each type of message as required by STANAG 

agreement. The MMS–P system displays the data in a different format. Each line of the message contains 

one item of data. It is displayed with the data label and the value. Once familiar with the STANAG forms, 

transferring the data from the MMS–P format is self-explanatory. Figure A-53 shows the MMS–P message 

format. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-45

Figure A-53. MMS–P MET message format 

SECTION IV ARTILLERY LIMITED SURFACE OBSERVATION MET MESSAGE 

OVERVIEW 

A-133. All FA MET sections can produce an artillery limited surface observation (ALSO) MET message 

in support of Army tactical operations. Only surface observation equipment is used to collect the data, 

which are entered on DA Form 5033-R, Limited Surface Observation (LRA). A copy of this form is at the 

rear of this manual. MET sections deliver the data to requesting agencies in plaintext format. The message 

will be transmitted in six-digit groups. The order of groups must be maintained. Only the 99 group will be 

considered optional and may be omitted if not applicable. If an element within a group cannot be reported, 
Appendix A 

A-46 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

it must be entered as a slash. Correct procedures for producing an ALSO MET message are described 

below. 

MESSAGE IDENTIFIER (SUPRP Q) 

A-134. Use the five-letter SUPRP identifier followed by octant of globe for the first six-letter/number 

group. 

STATION LOCATION (LALALA LOLOLO) 

A-135. In the second six-number group, three numbers are for latitude and three are for longitude to a 

tenth of a degree. When the location must be coded, the code is in agreement with the receiving and 

transmitting units. 

DATE AND TIME (YY GGGG) 

A-136. Both are given in GMT in hours and minutes at time of observation. 

TOTAL AMOUNT OF CLOUD COVER (NA) 

A-137. Of all the weather conditions that adversely affect aircraft operations, low clouds and low 

visibility are by far the most common. Sky condition observations consist of two elements, the amount of 

clouds or obscuration present and remarks about the sky condition in the area that would be helpful to the 

weather forecaster or to the aviator. This paragraph describes the method of observing the sky conditions. 

Sky Cover Amounts (Na) 

A-138. The total amount of the sky covered by clouds or an obscuration can be described by using one of 

the following words: 

z Clear. Less than 1/8 of the sky is covered by clouds. 

z Scattered. 1/8 to less than 1/2 of the sky is covered (approximately 10-50 percent). 

z Broken. 1/2 or more of the sky is covered (approximately 60-90 percent). 

z Overcast. Sky is totally covered by clouds or other materials; that is., fog, blowing snow, 

blowing sand, or smoke. 

Determining Sky Cover 

A-139. The total cloud amount is determined by considering the sky above as a celestial dome divided 

into eight equal parts. For example, the observer is standing at point X in figure A-54. There are three 

different cloud layers above you. There is 7/8 cloud cover, but the cirrus and the altocumulus overlap by 

about 1/8, so the total cloud amount is reported as 6/8, or a broken condition. Table A-19 indicates amount 

of cloud cover codes. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-47

Figure A-54. Cloud cover 

Table A-19. Na-Total Amount of Cloud Cover 

Code Figure Explanation For Work Sheet Abbreviation 

0 Clear (no clouds) CLR 

2 Scattered (1/8 - 4/8) SCTD 

3 Scattered (hills in clouds) SCTD II 

5 Broken (5/8 - 7/8) BRKN 

6 Broken (hills in clouds) BRKN 

7 Overcast (8/8) OVC 

8 Overcast (hills in clouds) OVC II 

Additional Codes 

A-140. Very often, significant features of sky cover cannot be explained simply by scattered, broken, and 

so forth. Explanations for hilly or mountainous stations are included in the code and must be used. These 

codes, which are extremely important to aircraft operations, are listed in table A-20. 

Table A-20. Additional Codes 

Code Description 

3 - Scattered (Hills in clouds) 

6 - Broken (Hills in clouds) 

8 - Overcast (Hills in clouds) 

WIND DIRECTION AND SPEED (D F) 

A-141. Wind speed and direction are necessary in forecasting weather, especially in locations where 

weather is often associated with frontal systems. Wind direction and speed can be used to locate these 

fronts and to determine their movement. Frequently, the combination of wind direction and terrain 

produces significant variation in wind speed over very short distances. Local variations in wind speed can 

also produce deviations in weather conditions. 
Appendix A 

A-48 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Direction (D) 

A-142. Wind direction is defined as the direction from which the wind is blowing. Wind may be read 

from an anemometer. Table A-21 lists the codes for wind direction. 

Table A-21. D-Direction From Which Surface Wind is Blowing 

Code Figure Explanation Degrees 

0 Calm 

1 NE 023-067 

2 E 068-112 

3 SE 113-157 

4 S 158-202 

5 SW 203-247 

6 W 248-292 

7 NW 293-337 

8 N 338-022 

9 Variable 

Speed (F) 

A-143. Wind speed may also be read from an anemometer. If no wind equipment is available, the speed 

may be estimated by using table A-22. 

Table A-22. F-Force of Surface Wind (Beaufort Scale) 

Code Figure Description Specifications Approximate Knots 

0 Calm Smoke rises vertically Less than 2 

2 Light Breeze Wind felt on face and leaves rustle 3-8 

4 Moderate breeze Dust and loose paper fly about; 

small branches move 

9-18 

6 Strong breeze Large branches in motion, 

whistling in wires 

19-29 

8 Gale Twigs broken off trees; progress of 

person walking generally impeded 

30-42 

VISIBILITY (V) 

A-144. Visibility is an important limiting factor in flying operations. Poor visibility restricts visual 

surveillance and flying observations. Visibility is the greatest distance an object can be seen and identified 

by the normal eye without the aid of optical devices such as binoculars and starlight scopes. In actual 

practice, visibility is the greatest distance that prominent objects such as trees, buildings, water towers, or 

natural landmarks (hills) can be seen clearly enough to be identified. Visibility is reported in meters, to the 

nearest hundred meters, as listed in table A-23. The visibility that is reported must be representative of at 

least half of the horizon circle. In making this determination, the horizon circle is normally divided into 

quadrants as shown in figure A-55. Any two quadrants may be used to determine the prevailing visibility. 

Quadrant visibility may be reported as a remark at the end of the observation. If the observer feels that the 

visibility in one quadrant is significantly different from the prevailing visibility, he should include a 

remark, for example, Visibility N, meters. Any quadrant or direction may be used for this remark. 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-49

Table A-23. V-Visibility at Surface 

Code Figure Explanation 

0 Less than 50 meters 

1 50-200 meters 

2 200-500 meters 

3 5000-1,000 meters 

4 1-2 km 

5 2-4 km 

6 4-10 km 

7 10-20 km 

8 20-50 km 

9 50 km or more 

Figure A-55. Quadrant visibility 

Daytime 

A-145. In daytime, any building, water tower, telephone pole, road, hill, clumps of trees, and others that 

can be seen under ideal conditions may be used as a visibility marker if the distance to the object is known. 

Night 

A-146. At night, the above objects can be used if their silhouettes can be identified. However, the best 

nighttime marker is an unfocused light at a known distance from the observation point. This does not 

include searchlights, airport rotating beacons, or automobile headlights aimed directly at you. 

PRESENT WEATHER AND OBSTRUCTIONS TO VISION (W) 

A-147. The important effect visibility has on operations has already been mentioned. It would not be 

logical to report a reduction in visibility without describing it in terms of the weather phenomena upon 

which the visibility depends. These weather phenomena are divided into two main groups, weather and 

obstructions to vision. They are discussed separately in detail in the following paragraphs. Table A-24 lists 

the codes for present weather. 
Appendix A 

A-50 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table A-24. w-Present Weather and Obstructions to Vision 

Code Figure Explanation 

0 No significant weather 

1 Smoke or haze 

2 Fog in valley 

3 Sandstorm, dust storm, or blowing snow 

4 Fog 

5 Drizzle 

6 Rain 

7 Snow or rain and snow mixed 

8 Shower(s) 

9 Thunderstorm(s) with or without precipitation 

Smoke 

A-148. Smoke is fine ash particles suspended in the air. When smoke is present, the disk of the sun 

appears very red at sunset and sunrise and has a reddish tinge throughout the day. Smoke at a distance, 

such as from a forest fire, usually has light grayish or bluish color. 

Haze 

A-149. Haze is dust and other material too small to be seen individually by the unaided eye. Haze reduces 

visibility and resembles a uniform veil over the landscape that subdues the colors. Haze appears bluish 

against a dark background but dirty or orange against a bright background such as the sun. In contrast, fog 

appears grayish and feels damp on the skin. 

Fog 

A-150. Fog is very small drops of water suspended in the air that reduce visibility. 

Blowing Sand and or Dust 

A-151. Blowing sand or dust is dust or sand raised by the wind to such an extent that visibility is 

impaired. 

Blowing Snow 

A-152. Blowing snow occurs when there is no appreciable amount of falling snow, but snow from the 

ground is carried into the air by the wind and visibility is reduced. 

Precipitation 

A-153. Precipitation includes all forms of moisture that fall to the earth's surface, such as rain, snow, and 

hail. All forms of precipitation can be classified as liquid, freezing, or frozen. Of special importance are the 

freezing types of precipitation that present a great hazard to aviation. Precipitation is reported as 

amplification of phenomenon reported by w. Table A-25 contains the appropriate codes.
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-51

Table A-25. A’-Amplification of Phenomenon Reported by w 

Code Figure Explanation 

0 No precipitation occurring 

1 Light 

2 Heavy 

3 In the past hour, but not at the time of observation 

4 Precipitation within sight 

5 Freezing precipitation 

9 Hail or ice pellets 

Liquid Precipitation 

A-154. There are two forms of liquid precipitation, drizzle and rain. Drizzle is very small water droplets 

that seem almost to float in the air and visibly follow air motion. Drizzle falls from fog or very low clouds. 

Rain is precipitation that reaches the earth's surface as relatively large drops. Rain can be classed as light, 

moderate, or heavy, depending upon the rate of fall. 

Freezing Precipitation 

A-155. There are two forms of freezing precipitation, freezing rain and freezing drizzle. Freezing rain is 

precipitation in the form of very cold raindrops, a portion of which freezes and forms a smooth coating of 

ice upon striking an exposed surface. Freezing drizzle is precipitation in the form of very cold drizzle that 

freezes in the same manner as freezing rain. 

Frozen Precipitation 

A-156. There are four forms of frozen precipitation: ice pellets, hail, snow, and snow grains. Ice pellets 

are frozen raindrops formed by rain falling through a layer of cold air. Ice pellets may adhere to any 

exposed surface, forming an uneven layer of ice. Hail is precipitation in the form of balls or irregular lumps 

of ice. Hail results when water drops are repeatedly carried aloft to the colder air by the violent air currents 

usually associated with thunderstorms. Snow is precipitation composed of ice crystals. Snow grains are 

small grains of snow that are soft and opaque and lack the six-sided appearance of the ordinary snowflake. 

Thunderstorms 

A-157. A thunderstorm may or may not be accompanied by rain or hail. 

Tornado 

A-158. A tornado is a circular whirl or wind of great velocity and small horizontal diameter. The 

horizontal diameter of a tornado varies from a few feet up to a mile, and the wind speeds often exceed 200 

miles per hour. Tornadoes are short-lived, usually not lasting more than an hour or two. If a tornado is 

sighted, the observer should call his reporting station immediately and give its location and direction of 

movement. Speed in reporting the sighting is of the utmost importance to all concerned. 

STATE OF ROAD IN VICINITY OF OBSERVATION POINT (R) 

A-159. Table A-26 lists the codes for road conditions. 
Appendix A 

A-52 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table A-26. R-State of Road in Vicinity of the Observation Point 

Code Figure Explanation 

0 Dry 

1 Wet 

2 Flooded 

3 Slush 

4 Ice patches 

5 Glazed Ice 

6 Snow depth 1 to 19 cm 

7 Snow depth 20 cm or more 

8 Snow drift 

STATE OF TERRAIN IN VICINITY OF OBSERVATION POINT (T) 

A-160. Table A-27 lists the codes for terrain conditions. 

Table A-27. T-State of Terrain in the Vicinity of the Observation 

Point 

Code Figure Explanation 

0 Dry 

1 Wet 

2 Pools of water on surface; 

3 Flooded 

4 Ground frozen 0 to 4 cm 

5 Ground frozen 5 cm or more 

6 Snow depth 0 to 4 cm 

7 Snow depth 5 to 24 cm 

8 Snow depth 25 to 44 cm 

9 Snow depth 45 cm or more 

STATE OF WATER SURFACE (A) 

A-161. Table A-28 lists the codes for water surface conditions. 

Table A-28. A-Sate of Water Surface 

Code Figure Explanation 

0 Water level normal 

1 Water level much below normal 

2 Water level high, but not overflowing 

3 Banks overflowing 

4 Floating ice (more than half) 

5 Thin ice, complete cover, impassable for 

persons, 0-4 cm thick 

6 Ice, complete cover, passable for persons, 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-53

Table A-28. A-Sate of Water Surface 

Code Figure Explanation 

depth unknown 

7 Ice, complete cover, depth 5-9 cm 

8 Ice, complete cover, depth 10-24 cm 

9 Ice, complete cover, depth 25 cm or more 

TEMPERATURE (TT) 

A-162. Temperature is indicated in whole degrees Celsius. Negative temperatures are encoded by adding 

50 to the absolute value of the temperature; that is., -20 degrees is coded as 70. 

PRESSURE (PPPP) 

A-163. The surface pressure to the nearest tenth of a millibar is encoded. When pressure is over 1,000 

millibars, the thousands' digit is dropped. 

WIND DIRECTION (DD) 

A-164. In this portion of the code, the wind direction (in tens of degrees) is reported in two digits. This 

data is used to further amplify wind information reported in the fourth six-digit group. These two digits 

will be encoded as 99 when the wind speed is less than 5 knots. 

WIND SPEED (FF) 

A-165. The wind speed is reported in knots and in two digits. 

AMOUNT OF LOW CLOUD (NH) 

A-166. The lowest cloud is determined for the amount of cover in eighths. For encoding, see table A-29. 

Table A-29. Nh-Amount of Cloud Reported at Height ha 

Code Figure Explanation 

0 0 

1 1/8 or less, but not 0 

2 2/8 

3 3/8 

4 4/8 

5 5/8 

6 6/8 

7 7/8 or more, but not 8/8 

8 8/8 

9 Sky obscured or cloud amount cannot be 

estimated 

HEIGHT OF LOW CLOUD (HA) 

A-167. The height of the lowest cloud above the observing point is estimated. For encoding, see table 

A-30. 
Appendix A 

A-54 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table A-30. ha-Height of the Lowest Cloud Layer Above the 

Observation Point 

Code Figure Explanation 

0 0-99 meters 

1 100-199 meters 

2 200-299 meters 

3 300-399 meters 

4 400-499 meters 

5 500-599 meters 

6 600-699 meters 

7 700-799 meters 

8 800-899 meters 

9 900 meters or more or no clouds 

INDICATOR FOR SURF DATA (99) 

A-168. When the unit is located at a seacoast area, it is important to give surf conditions. The 99 group 

indicates that surf data will follow. The surf data includes average height of breakers, time breakers last, 

direction of waves' approach to beach, and the width of the surf zone. For estimation and encoding of these 

variables, see tables A-31, A-32, A-33, and A-34. When surf data is not available, the message will end 

with height of low cloud plus any remarks on weather elements that might seem appropriate. Thus, the 

message includes seven 6-digit groups when surf data is not included. Any data or weather element that is 

missing is represented by a slash (/). 

Table A-31. Hs-Average Height of Breakers 

Code Figure Explanation 

0 0 to 10 seconds 

1 10 to 20 seconds 

2 20 to 30 seconds 

3 More than 30 seconds 

Table A-32. Ps-Period of Breakers (Seconds) Time Required for 

Successive Breakers to Pass a Given Point 

Code Figure Explanation 

0 Less than 1 meter 

1 1-2 meters 

2 2-3 meters 

3 More than 3 meters 

Table A-33. Dw-Direction of Approach of Waves To Beach 

(Observers Back to Sea) 

Code Figure Explanation 

0 Waves approaching from right side 

1 Waves approaching directly from rear 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-55

Table A-33. Dw-Direction of Approach of Waves To Beach 

(Observers Back to Sea) 

2 Waves approaching from lift side 

Table A-34. Ws-Width of Surf Zone (Distance from Edge of Water 

to the Point Seaward that the White Caps of the Surf Begin to 

Appear) 

Code Figure Explanation 

0 1 to 10 meters 

1 10 to 20 meters 

2 29 to 30 meters 

3 More than 30 meters 

PLAIN LANGUAGE REMARKS

A-169. Any remark that the observer considers beneficial or explanatory may be listed at the bottom of 

the message. Some examples include— 

z The direction of a thunderstorm from your location and the approximate direction it is moving 

toward; for example, thunderstorms E moving NE. 

z The direction of lightning from your location; for example, lightning overhead and SW through 

NW. 

z Obscuring phenomena at a distance from your location but not occurring at your location; for 

example, fog bank NE through SE. 

DA FORM 5033-R LIMITED SURFACE OBSERVATION

A-170. Figure A-56 is a DA form to be completed for each limited surface observation. 

SECTION V MET MESSAGE CHECKING PROCEDURES 

A-171. MET section personnel perform quality control checks of all data and MET messages. However, 

anyone receiving MET messages should question any peculiarities noticed on their copy. Anytime there is 

doubt about the timeliness or validity of a MET message, the MET section should be consulted. MET 

section personnel are qualified to explain and correct message variations or transmission errors. Voice 

dissemination of messages often induces copying errors, especially when other than the standard MET 

message forms are used to copy the messages. 

A-172. All MET messages are processed automatically. Once the instrument is released, MET section 

personnel can monitor the raw data but cannot edit it. If any peculiarities appear on the final message, the 

MET station leader can extract the flight data and look for any abnormal conditions that could explain the 

peculiarity. If the MET station leader has any doubts, another sounding can be made to verify data. 

Consecutive soundings should show a trend unless weather conditions have changed because of rain, snow, 

a rapid increase or decrease in cloud cover, the passage of a front, or a sunrise or sunset transition period. 

MET MESSAGE PARTS 

A-173. MET messages are divided into the message heading and message body. The message heading 

identifies the MET station location, the area of validity of the message, and the time of the message. The 

message body contains the MET data element of the specific message. 
Appendix A 

A-56 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

CHECKING THE MESSAGE HEADING

A-174. In general, the procedures for checking the heading of the MET message are the same for all types 

of messages. These procedures are discussed below. 

Location 

A-175. The location of the MET station and the octant is a check to ensure it is valid for your area of 

operation. 

Date and Time 

A-176. The date and time entries are checked to ensure that the MET data in the message are current. If 

the message is over 4 hours old, verify the validity of the message with the MET section or obtain an 

updated message from them. 

NOTE: The date and time are Greenwich Mean Time, not local standard time. 

Altitude 

A-177. The altitude of the MET section should be checked on the map. An altitude error of 50 meters or 

more can affect temperature and density accuracy. 

Pressure 

A-178. The pressure on the ID line should be the same as the pressure on line 00. This does not apply to 

ballistic messages since all lines except the heading are reported in density percentage of standard. 

CHECKING THE MESSAGE BODY

A-179. The procedures for checking the message body vary with each type of message. Procedures for 

checking the message body of specific types of MET messages are discussed below. 

Computer MET Message 

A-180. The computer MET message is a record of actual measured weather conditions. Therefore, it is 

more likely to show abrupt changes not noticed on the ballistic MET message. 

A-181. Wind speeds and directions should be fairly uniform with proportional changes in altitude. Large 

changes in wind direction (1,000 mils when wind speeds are above 10 knots) or abrupt increases or 

decreases in wind speeds (10 to 15 knots) are suspect and should be investigated. 

NOTE: Large changes in wind direction are not uncommon with wind speeds less than 10 

knots. 

A-182. Temperature accuracy is hard to evaluate because of natural erratic changes. Any severe increase 

or decrease in temperature (for example, +/- 20°K) is suspect and should be investigated. 

A-183. Atmospheric pressure always decreases from line to line. Pressure never increases with height. 

Transposed figures are the most common errors in pressure values. If errors in pressure are suspected, the 

MET section must provide the corrected values. 

BALLISTIC MET MESSAGE

A-184. Ballistic wind directions should remain fairly constant from line to line. Drastic changes (greater 

than 1,000 mils) or sudden reversals in direction should be questioned, particularly if the wind speeds on 
MET Messages 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 A-57

those lines are greater than 10 knots. Ballistic wind speed changes greater than 15 knots from line to line 

should be questioned. 

A-185. Ballistic temperatures and densities should trend smoothly with no drastic changes between zones. 

Normally, as density increases, temperature decreases. Rarely will both temperature and density change in 

the same direction. If they do, those lines are suspect and should be verified by the MET section. Drastic 

changes in density or temperature (2.0 percent or more) should be verified by the MET section. 

OTHER MET MESSAGES

A-186. The data in each of the other types of MET messages are not easily checked by the user. If the 

message heading has been checked for each of these messages, the data provided should be considered 

correct without further checking. 
This page intentionally left blank. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 B-1

Appendix B 

World Meteorological Organization Cloud Codes 

This appendix provides the necessary tables and specific instructions to record cloud 

phenomena for the surface “41414 NhCLhCMCH” group. This guidance assumes 

minimal previous knowledge of synoptic code procedures; however, a basic 

understanding of clouds is necessary. For those already familiar with synoptic codes, 

some departure from conventional World Meteorological Organization coding 

procedures will be noticed. By simply observing the elements requested and 

reporting them according to tables provided in this text, the intent of the cloud entry 

will be fully met. 

CLOUDS GROUP FORMAT 

B-1. The clouds entry is a five-digit, mandatory group as shown in figure B-1. 

Figure B-1 Format for part B (TTBB) of WMO MET message 

B-2. All five digits must be entered, regardless of the presence or absence of clouds. The WMO format 

for entry of clouds has been modified to meet National Climatic Data Center requirements. All stations 

should follow this modified format, regardless of location. A description of the five-digit format follows. 

B-3. Nh. Nh is the amount (in oktas) of the sky covered by all low clouds (CL) observed or the amount of 

sky covered by all the middle clouds (CM) observed. In no case will the amounts of the low and middle 

clouds be combined to report Nh. Use table B-1 to report the amount of low or middle cloud coverage. 
Appendix B 

B-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table B-1. Amount of Low/Middle Cloud, Nh

Code Figure Cloud Amount in oktas (eighths) Cloud Amount in Tenths 

0 0 0 

1 1 okta or less, but not zero 1/10 or less 

2 2 oktas 2/10 - 3/10 

3 3 oktas 4/10 

4 4 oktas 5/10 

5 5 oktas 6/10 

6 6 oktas 7/10 - 8/10 

7 7 oktas or more, but not 8 oktas 9/10 or more, but not 10/10 

8 8 oktas 10/10 

9 Sky obscured by fog and/or other meteorological phenomena 

/ Cloud cover is indiscernible for reasons other than fog or other meteorological 

phenomena 

NOTE: If there are any breaks in the sky at all, such as an overcast with a mackerel sky 

(altocumulus pelucidus or stratocumulus pelucidus), Nh would be encoded as 7. If there are only 

a few patches of low or middle cloud in the sky, Nh cannot be encoded as 0, but is encoded as 1. 

A partial obscuration does not affect the coding of Nh. A total obscuration is coded as 9, not 8 

(overcast sky). 

B-4. CL. CL is the type of low cloud, based on the priority given in table B-2. This table presents the 

specifications for type of low cloud, CL, in order of priority. Go down the table and use the first applicable 

code figure. A slash (/) is reported if CL clouds are not visible owing to fog or similar obscuring 

phenomena. 

Table B-2. Coding of Low Cloud, CL

Code Figure Reportable Heights (ft) 

CUMULONIMBUS PRESENT, WITH OR WITHOUT OTHER CL CLOUDS 

CL = 9 If the upper part of at least one of the cumulonimbus clouds present is clearly 

fibrous or striated, use CL = 9. 

CL = 3 If the upper part of none of the cumulonimbus clouds present is clearly fibrous 

or striated, use CL=3. 

NO CUMULONIMBUS PRESENT 

CL = 4 If stratocumulus formed by the spreading out of cumulus is present, use CL = 

4. 

CL = 8 If the CL code figure 4 is not applicable and if cumulus and stratocumulus 

clouds with bases at different levels are present, use CL = 8. 
World Meteorological Organization Cloud Codes 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 B-3

Table B-2. Coding of Low Cloud, CL

Code Figure Reportable Heights (ft) 

CL = 1 If the CL code figures 4, 8, and 2 are not applicable, use CL = 1, if the CL clouds 

present are predominantly (NOTE 1) cumulus with little vertical extent and 

seemingly flattened or ragged cumulus other than of bad weather (NOTE 2), or 

both. 

CL = 5 Use CL = 5, if among other CL clouds present, stratocumulus other than that 

formed by the spreading out of cumulus of predominant. 

CL = 6 Use CL = 6, if the CL clouds present are predominantly stratus in a more or less 

continuous sheet or layer, or in shreds (stratus of bad weather), or both. 

CL = 7 Use CL = 7, if the CL clouds present are predominantly pannus (ragged shreds 

of stratus of bad weather or ragged cumulus of bad weather), or both. 

0 No CL clouds - No cumulus, cumulonimbus, stratocumulus, or stratus. 

/ CL clouds not visible owning to fog or similar obscuring phenomena. 

NOTE 1: Consideration of predominance is restricted to the clouds corresponding to CL code figures 

1, 5, 6, and 7, which have the same priority. Clouds of any one of these four specifications are said to 

be predominant when their sky cover is greater than that of the clouds of any of the other three 

specifications. 

NOTE 2: Bad weather denotes the conditions which generally exist during precipitation and a short 

time before and after. 

NOTE: Clouds are divided into three families, and classified as low, middle, or high. The 

general height ranges for these are surface to 6,500 feet for low, 6,500 feet to 20,000 feet for 

middle, and above 20,000 feet for high. Remember, these ranges are not absolute, but given as a 

guide only. More consideration may be given to the cloud form than the height in many cases. 

Each cloud family is coded with a single digit, 0 through 9. The code figure 0 is used to indicate 

that clouds are not present for a given family. 

B-5. h. h = Height of the base of the lowest cloud seen. The height reported is with respect to the surface. 

The height is coded as a solidus (/) if there is a total surface-based obscuration that prevents an observation 

of the clouds. Use table B-3 for the cloud base height.

Table B-3. Height of Cloud Base Above Ground 

Code Figure Reportable Heights (ft) 

1 200 or 300 

2 400 or 600* 

3 700 to 900* 

4 1000 to 1900* 

5 2000 to 3200* 

6 3300 to 4900* 

7 5000 to 6500** 
Appendix B 

B-4 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table B-3. Height of Cloud Base Above Ground 

Code Figure Reportable Heights (ft) 

8 7000 to 8000** 

9 8500 or higher or no clouds 

/ unknown or base of clouds below surface of station 

* reported in 100-foot increments 

** reported in 500-foot increments 

NOTE 1: This group is used to report the height of the base of the lowest cloud seen, regardless of 

cloud amount. The height reported is with respect to the surface. 

NOTE 2: The lowest cloud height is coded with a solidus (/) if there is a total surface-based 

obscuration that prevents an observation of the clouds. 

B-6. CM. CM is the type of middle cloud, based on priority given in table B-4. This table presents the 

specifications for type of middle cloud, CM, in order of priority. Go down the table and use the first 

applicable code figure. A solidus (/) is reported if CM clouds are not visible owing to fog or similar 

obscuring phenomenon, or because of a continuous layer of lower clouds. 

Table B-4. Coding of Middle Cloud, CM

Code Figure Coding Criteria 

ALTOCUMULUS PRESENT 

CM = 9 If the sky is chaotic, use CM = 9. 

CM = 8 If the CM code figure 9 is not applicable and if altocumulus with sprouting in the 

form of turrets or battlements or altocumulus having the appearance of small 

cumuliform tufts is present, use CM = 8. 

CM = 7* If the CM code figures 9 and 8 are not applicable and if altostratus or 

nimbostratus is present together with altocumulus, use CM = 7. 

CM = 6 If the CM code figures 9, 8, and 7 are not applicable and if altostratus formed by 

the spreading out of cumulus or cumulonimbus is present, use CM = 6. 

CM = 5 If the CM code figures 9, 8, 7, and 6 are not applicable and if the altostratus 

present is progressively invading the sky, use CM = 5. 

**There are several definitions of CM = 7 and each has a different priority; therefore, CM = 7 appears 

several times in this code table. 

CM = 4 If the CM code figures 9, 8, 7, 6, and 5 are not applicable and if the altostratus 

present is continually changing in appearance, use CM = 4. 

CM = 7 If the CM code figures 9, 8, 6, 5, and 4 are not applicable and if the altostratus 

present occurs at two or more levels, CM = 7. 

CM = 7, 3 If the CM code figures 9, 8, 6, 5, and 4 are not applicable and if the altocumulus 

present occurs at one level, use CM = 7 or 3 depending on whether the greater 

part of the altocumulus is respectively opaque or semi-transparent. 

NO ALTOCUMULUS PRESENT 

CM = 2 If nimbostratus is present or if the greater part of the alto stratus present is 

opaque, use CM = 2. 

CM = 1 If there is no nimbostratus and if the greater part of the altostratus present is 

semi-transparent, use CM = 1. 

CM = 0 No CM clouds - No altocumulus, altostratus, or nimbostratus. 

/ CM clouds not visible owing to fog or similar obscuring phenomena or because of 

a continuous layer of lower clouds. 

B-7. CH.= CH is the type of high cloud, based on priority given in table B-5. This table presents the 

specifications for type of high cloud, CH, in order of priority. Go down the table and use the first applicable 

code figure. A solidus (/) is reported if CH clouds are not visible owing to fog or similar obscuring 

phenomenon, or because of a continuous layer of lower clouds. 
World Meteorological Organization Cloud Codes 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 B-5

Table B-5. Coding of High Cloud, CH

Code Figure Coding Criteria 

ALTOCUMULUS PRESENT 

CH = 9 If cirrocumulus is present alone or is more than the combined sky cover of any 

cirrus and cirrostratus present, use CH = 9. 

CIRROSTRATUS PRESENT 

CH = 7 If the cirrostratus covers the whole sky, use CH = 7. 

CH = 8 If the cirrostratus does not cover the whole sky and is not invading the celestial 

dome, use CH = 8. 

CH = 6 If the cirrostratus is progressively invading the sky and if the continuous veil 

extends more than 45 degrees above the horizon but does not cover the whole 

sky, use CH = 6. 

CH = 5 If the cirrostratus is progressively invading the sky but the continuous veil does 

not reach 45 degrees above the horizon, use CH = 5. 

NO CIRROSTRATUS PRESENT 

CH = 9 Not applicable. 

CH = 4 If the cirrus clouds are invading the sky, use CH = 4. 

CH = 3 If the CH code figure 4 is not applicable and if dense cirrus which originated from 

cumulonimbus is present in they sky, use CH = 3. 

CH = 2, 1 If the code figures 4 and 3 are not applicable: 

Use CH = 2, if the combined sky cover of dense cirrus, of cirrus with sprouting in 

the form of small turrets or battlements, and of cirrus of tufts is greater than the 

combined sky cover of cirrus in the form, of filaments, strands, or hooks. 

Use CH = 1, if the combined sky cover of cirrus in the form of filaments, strands, 

or hooks is greater than the combined sky cover of dense cirrus, of cirrus with 

sprouting in the form of small turrets or battlements, and of cirrus in tufts. 

CH = 0 No CH clouds - No cirrus, cirrostratus, or cirrocumulus. 

/ CH clouds not visible owing to fog or similar obscuring phenomena or because of 

a continuous layer of lower clouds. 
This page intentionally left blank. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 C-1

Appendix C 

MET Support Request Procedures 

MMS equipped sections normally distribute MET messages digitally to all users by 

broadcasting them on a specific schedule (push method). Some users, especially 

firing units, may have an immediate need for MET data before being placed on 

automatic distribution. All MET messages from MMS–P equipped sections using 

220C Protocol are requested (pull method) by users. Users can request MET support 

by using the procedures in this appendix. 

SUBMISSION OF MMS MET SUPPORT REQUESTS 

C-1. All requests for MET support should be forwarded through the operations officer to the appropriate 

MET section. Requests should state who should eventually receive the MET data. To ensure receipt of 

appropriate MET information, the unit requesting MET support should state specifically in the initial 

request what information is needed, the delivery time, and the method of delivery. The number of lines 

requested should be no greater than the number required for the maximum ordinate expected to be fired. 

Requests for MET should be submitted as far in advance as possible. Also units must realize MET 

messages are provided on time schedules based on GMT, not local time. The structure for a request for 

MET support is shown in figure C-1. The standard format for MET requests provides the following: 

z Type of message. 

z Intervals between messages. 

z Lowest and highest lines required. 

z Time request is terminated. 

Figure C-1. Message request structure 

C-2. The symbols in the message request for MET support are defined in table C-1 in the order in which 

they appear. The Q code for octant of the globe is defined in table C-2. Table C-3 lists the line codes for 

the type 2 or 3 ballistic MET message. Table C-4 lists the zone number codes for a TA MET message. 

Table 

C-5 lists the zone codes for a computer MET message. Figure C-2 shows an example and provides an 

explanation of a request for a MET message. 

Table C-1. Symbols in Message Request for MET Support 

Symbol Definition 

MET Designates message category-met. 

R Designates request. 

K Designates type of message as follows: 

2-surface to air (type 2 ballistic). 

3-surface to surface (type 3 ballistic). 
Appendix C 

C-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table C-1. Symbols in Message Request for MET Support 

Symbol Definition 

6-target acquisition. 

9-computer. 

Q Designates octant of the globe in which requesting unit is located. (See Table 

C-2.) 

LaLaLa Designates latitude of requesting unit to the nearest tenth of a degree. 

LoLoLo

XXXXXX 

Designates longitude of requesting unit to the nearest tenth of a degree. For 

longitudes of 100° and greater, the hundreds digit is dropped. 

or 

Location of the center of the area of applicability in code. 

YoYo Designates day of month (GMT) on which delivery of first message is required. 

GoGo Designates time (GMT) to the nearest hour of day (YoYo) at which delivery of 

the first message is required. 

G1G1 Designates time (GMT) to the nearest hour on the last day on which final 

message is required. (See Jo to determine date.) 

ZoZo Designates lowest line required in the message is 00 (surface) for all 

messages. 

ZtZt Designates highest line code required. See Tables C-3, C-4, or C-5 for the type 

message requested by K. 

Jo Designates the number of days from 0 to 9 that must be added to YoYo to find 

the last day for which MET message support is required. The hour of the last 

day is determined by G1G1 above. 

J1 Designates time interval, in hours, between messages. Numbers 1 through 8 

indicate hourly intervals, and 9 indicates a 12-hour interval. When only one 

message is required, G1G1 is the same as GoGo and Jo and J1 are 0. 

Table C-2. Q Code for Octant of the Globe 

Q Code Octant Locations 

0 North latitude-0° to 90° west longitude 

1 North latitude-90° to 180° west longitude 

2 North latitude-180° to 90° east longitude 

3 North latitude-90° to 0° east longitude 

4 Not used 

5 South latitude-0° to 90° west longitude 

6 South latitude-90° to 180° west longitude 

7 South latitude-180° to 90° east longitude 

8 South latitude-90° to 0° east longitude 

9 To be used when the location of the MET station is not 

indicated by latitude and longitude 
MET Support Request Procedures 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 C-3

Table C-3. Line Codes for Ballistic MET Messages (Type 2 or 3) 

Line-Code 

ZtZt

Meters Line-Code 

ZtZt

Meters 

00 0 08 5,000 

01 200 09 6,000 

02 500 10 8,000 

03 1,000 11 10,000 

04 1,500 12 12,000 

05 2,000 13 14,000 

06 3,000 14 16,000 

07 4,000 15 18,000 

Table C-4. Zone Number Codes for Target Acquisition MET Message 

ZtZt

Height Of Midpoint Of Zone 

Above MDP (Meters) 

Height Above MDP Of Zone 

(Meters) 

 Base Top 

00 0 - - 

01 25 0 50 

02 75 50 100 

03 150 100 200 

04 250 200 300 

05 350 300 400 

06 450 400 500 

07 550 500 600 

08 650 600 700 

09 750 700 800 

10 850 800 900 

11 950 900 1,000 

12 1,050 1,000 1,100 

13 1,150 1,100 1,200 

14 1,250 1,200 1,300 

15 1,350 1,300 1,400 

16 1,450 1,400 1,500 

17 1,550 1,500 1,600 

18 1,650 1,600 1,700 

19 1,750 1,700 1,800 

20 1,850 1,800 1,900 

21 1,950 1,900 2,000 

22 2,050 2,000 2,100 

23 2,150 2,100 2,200 

24 2,250 2,200 2,300 
Appendix C 

C-4 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table C-4. Zone Number Codes for Target Acquisition MET Message 

ZtZt

Height Of Midpoint Of Zone 

Above MDP (Meters) 

Height Above MDP Of Zone 

(Meters) 

25 2,350 2,300 2,400 

26 2,450 2,400 2,500 

27 2,550 2,500 2,600 

Table C-5. Zone Number Codes for Computer MET Messages 

ZtZt

Height Above MDP Of Midpoint Of 

Zone (Meters) 

Height Above MDP From Base To 

Top Of Zone (Meters) 

00 0 0 

01 100 0 to 200 

02 350 200 to 500 

03 750 500 to 1,000 

04 1,250 1,000 to 1,500 

05 1,750 1,500 to 2,000 

06 2,250 2,000 to 2,500 

07 2,750 2,500 to 3,000 

08 3,250 3,000 to 3,500 

09 3,750 3,500 to 4,000 

10 4,250 4,000 to 4,500 

11 4,750 4,500 to 5,000 

12 5,500 5,000 to 6,000 

13 6,500 6,000 to 7,000 

14 7,500 7,000 to 8,000 

15 8,500 8,000 to 9,000 

16 9,500 9,000 to 10,000 

17 10,500 10,000 to 11,000 

18 11,500 11,000 to 12,000 

19 12,500 12,000 to 13,000 

20 13,500 13,000 to 14,000 

21 14,500 14,000 to 15,000 

22 15,500 15,000 to 16,000 

23 16,500 16,000 to 17,000 

24 17,500 17,000 to 18,000 

25 18,500 18,000 to 19,000 

26 19,500 19,000 to 20,000 
MET Support Request Procedures 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 C-5

Figure C-2. MET message request 

SUBMISSION OF MMS–P MET SUPPORT REQUESTS 

MET REQUEST REQUIREMENTS

C-3. All requests for MET message generation, except for the upper air message (which is automatically 

generated at the termination of a sounding), require the following entries: 

z Gun location. 

z Target location. 

z Specific type of MET message desired. 

z The requestor’s universal resource locator (URL). 

NOTE: The MET messages (except for the TAM) generated by the MMS–P are based on the 

mid-point between the gun location and target location grids. 

Computer MET Message 

C-4. The requestor should use his grid for gun location and an estimated center grid of the target area for 

the target location. 

Target Area MET Message 

C-5. The requestor should use his grid for gun location and the actual grid of the target area you need data 

on for the target location. 

NOTE: Even though the profiler will ignore the gun location and only use the target location, 

both fields must be entered to generate the MET message. 
Appendix C 

C-6 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Target Acquisition MET 

C-6. Since the MMS–P generates a TA MET for the location midpoint between the entered gun location 

and target location grids, the radar should use his grid for gun location and the nearest suspected enemy 

artillery location, along the radar’s center sector of search, for the target location. 

Basic Wind Report 

C-7. Since the profiler generates a basic wind report for the location midpoint between the entered gun 

location and target location grids, the requestor should use his grid for gun location and the grid of the 

suspected CBRNincident (CBRN 1 Report) for the target location (if known). If no grid for a suspected 

CBRN incident is known then select a grid down range in the direction of the enemy as the target location. 

MET REQUEST GUIDANCE

C-8. In theory, MET data for both the local and target area could be requested and sent for each fire 

mission, or every 30 minutes, to assist in fire mission accuracy. A MET every 30 minutes has been shown 

to dramatically increase the lethality of munitions. This however may be impractical and could slow the 

responsiveness of the shooter as well as tie up the digital communications net. Instead, examples of when it 

would be critical for a firing unit to request and receive a MET message are— 

z Upon entering its initial fighting position. (Along with his unit update, the battery FDC sends a 

request for a computer MET message to the profiler. (MLRS will also request a target area 

MET.) 

z Anytime a firing unit moves more than 4 kilometers, but the target area remains the same. 

(Request a computer MET.) 

z Anytime the target area grid changes by more than 5 kilometers; that is, if the battery is told to 

lay its guns on a new engagement area (EA). (Request both a computer MET and a target area 

MET.) 

z Anytime direction of fire is more than 800 mils from the original target location. (Request a new 

computer MET.) 

z When smart munitions are expected to be used in the target area. (Request a target area MET.) 

(MLRS only.) 

z Anytime there is a significant change in weather; that is, a storm front comes through or the 

temperature increases or decreases. (Request both a computer MET and a target area MET.) 

z As directed by the firing unit commander. 

NOTE: Although the profiler system was developed to allow for automated MET message 

requests using the information request message format, this message format will not be available 

until the next version AFATDS message set is fielded. Since the 188/220A protocol with 

revision 3 message set does not support the information request message format, the requestor 

must request MET messages using a free text message. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 D-1

Appendix D 

Example MET Plan 

The MET plan contains the information needed to understand how MET assets will 

be employed. This appendix shows an example of a MET plan. Table D-1 lists 

acronyms and abbreviations for the example MET plan. 

Table D-1. Acronyms and Abbreviations 

Acronym/Abbreviation Definition 

admin Administrative 

Intel Intelligence 

Log Logistics 

Mech Mechanized 

PSY Psychological 

PSYOP psychological operations 

EXAMPLE MET PLAN 

(Classification) 

The classification is a header and footer that will appear on the top and bottom of each page. 

TAB F (MET PLAN) TO APPENDIX 3 (FA SUPPORT PLAN) TO ANNEX C (FIRE SUPPORT) TO 

OPORD 06-3, 1st Brigade Combat Team. 

REFERENCE: Map, series JWT 128, MONROVIA, sheet 3 (DURIEN), edition 2, 1:50, 000. 

Time Zone Used Throughout the Order: BRAVO. 

1. SITUATION 

 a. Enemy Forces. Annex A (Intelligence) to OPORD 06-3. 

 b. Friendly Forces 

 (1) 1st Brigade Combat Team attacks to secure crossings over the RAMUZZA 

River and destroys enemy in zone. 

 (2) Attachments and detachments are as follows: 

(a) Section-1 is attached for admin and log support to 1-12th FA. 

2. MISSION 

The MET section of the 1st Brigade Combat Team controlling headquarters will provide MET data 

support to U.S. and allied forces (artillery) and to the USAF. 
Appendix D 

D-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

3 EXECUTION 

 a. Concept of Operation. MET support will be provided on a continuous basis. 

 (1) The MET Section will provide automatic MET messages for artillery fires. 

Direct coordination with firing batteries is required for special operations. Unless otherwise requested, 

flights will be 3,000 meters altitude (line 6 [type 3 ballistic] and line 7 [computer]). Coordination with 

allied sound and/or artillery units require direct coordination for both receipt and delivery of MET data 

for artillery fires and allied sound ranging. 

 (2) The MET Section will provide high-altitude MET data for radiological fallout 

forecasts and MET messages for USAF as requested by the using G2, S2, or staff weather offices. 

MET messages for artillery firing and sound data and TA data will be generated from the same 

sounding (ballistic type 2 and type 3, computer, and sound). Additional MET data for artillery firing will 

be required at other times, as scheduled by individual units (U.S. and allied) through controlling 

headquarters S3. Special limited surface observations will be provided for smoke and chemical 

operations, as requested directly by the USAF. 

 (3) Controlling Headquarters operations officer will coordinate all MET section 

displacements and other movements by echelons to provide uninterrupted flow of MET data. 

 (4) Target acquisition MET data will be developed as required. It will be 

generated at the same time as ballistic data. 

 (5) Special MET data requests will be processed through controlling 

headquarters operations officer for PSYOP units. 

 (6) Controlling Headquarters operations officer will establish liaison with any 

adjacent allied artillery units and/or MET sections to provide a receipt of ballistic, computer, and 

fallout data whenever similar data are not available from organic MET section. 

 b. Coordinating Instructions 

 (1) Priority of MET is 7 lines computer and 6 lines ballistic, up to 3,000 meters 

for howitzer and 11 lines computer and 8 lines ballistic, up to 5000 meters for rockets. These 

messages will be provided on a 2-hour basis unless otherwise coordinated with firing units. USAF 

support and radiological fallout will be provided in addition to firing MET data. 

 (2) All firing elements within the sector of operations and spatial validity of MET 

section locations will be provided MET support. 

 (3) There will be direct coordination between the MET section, the firing 

battalion, and, the controlling headquarters operations officer regarding radiosonde frequencies, radio 

frequencies, and movements of MET section. 

 (4) The controlling headquarters operations officer will position the MET section 

to provide optimum coverage for all firing units (U.S. and allied) radar, unmanned aircraft system 

(UAS), smoke units, USAF, Intel sections, and other MET users. 

4. SERVICE SUPPORT 

 a. All MET-specific Class IX parts and expendable items will be routed from the 

controlling headquarters S4 through artillery battalions down to the requesting MET section. 

Organizational maintenance will be performed by on-hand unit maintenance personnel. Direct 

support maintenance will be provided by the direct support battalion. 

 b. Controlling Headquarters S4 will monitor low-density, met-specific parts and 

expendable items and cross-level between MET sections, as required. 
Example MET Plan 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 D-3

5. COMMAND AND SIGNAL 

 a. Command. 1st BDE Combat Team controlling headquarters operations officer will 

direct all MET operations. 

 b. Signal 

 (1) Current SOI in effect. 

 (2) Automatic direct radio data link will be established for all firing units. 

 (3) FM voice (secure) alternate. 

 (4) Landline in effect when MET sections collocate with firing units. 

(Classification) 
This page intentionally left blank. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 E-1

Appendix E 

Global Positioning System (GPS) 

The MMS and the MMS–P systems use the GPS system to track the movement of 

balloon borne radiosondes giving the systems wind finding capability. 

GPS SYSTEM 

E-1. The GPS is a continuous, worldwide, space-based radio positioning and time-transfer navigational 

system maintained by the U.S. Department of Defense (DOD). The GPS provides position, velocity, and 

time (PVT) data that is highly accurate and continuous to an unlimited number of suitably equipped 

ground, sea, air, and space users. 

E-2. The system is unaffected by weather and provides a worldwide common grid reference system based 

on an earth fixed coordinate system. For its earth model, GPS uses the World Geodetic system of 1984 

datum. 

E-3. The GPS consists of three main segments. They are the space segment, control segment, and user 

segment. These are defined as follows: 

z The space segment consists of a constellation of 24 low orbit satellites transmitting military and 

civil navigational signals. Each satellite broadcasts radio frequencies (RF) ranging codes and a 

navigation data message. 

z The control segment consists of a network of monitoring and control facilities that are used to 

manage the satellite constellation and update the satellite navigation data messages. 

z The user segment consists of a variety of radio navigation receivers specifically designed to 

receive, decode, and process the GPS satellite codes and navigation data messages. 

SPACE SEGMENT

E-4. The GPS space segment consists of 24 satellites deployed in semi-synchronous (approximately 12-

hours) orbit. The satellites are positioned in orbital planes that provide a good geometric relationship 

allowing four or more satellites to be viewed from any location on earth. Each satellite broadcasts two RF 

signals. Each signal is modulated with a unique code sequence that allows the navigational set to identify 

the satellite. Each satellite is also modulated with a navigational data message that gives the navigational 

information about the operation of the satellite. 

E-5. A minimum of four satellites are normally required to be simultaneously “in view” of the receiver. 

The satellites provide the receiver four range measurements. Three of the measurements are used to 

calculate a three-dimensional location of the receiver. The fourth parameter represents the user clock error. 

Treating the user clock error as an unknown parameter enables most receivers to be built with an 

inexpensive crystal oscillator rather than an expensive precision oscillator or an atomic clock. 
Appendix E 

E-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure E-1. GPS satellite constellation 

CONTROL SEGMENT

E-6. The control segment of the GPS system consists of ground stations monitoring and controlling the 

satellites by performing the following tasks: 

z Track the satellites. 

z Check and control satellite orbits. 

z Update the satellite navigational message. 

E-7. The control segment primarily consists of a master control station located in Colorado Springs, 

Colorado, and monitor stations and ground antennas at various locations around the world. 

E-8. The master control station is the central processing facility for the control segment and is responsible 

for monitoring and managing the satellite constellation. 

USER SEGMENT

E-9. The user segment is utilized by both military and civilian personnel. The primary intended use for 

GPS is for military purposes. The Department of Defense (DOD) determines who has authorization to use 
Global Positioning System (GPS) 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 E-3

the GPS. The civilian code is limited by a selective availability program also called spoofing. Though 

civilians are able to access the GPS, access is controlled by cryptographic techniques. 

MMS AND MMS–P GPS OPERATIONS

E-10. The MMS and MMS–P systems have the capability to determine wind speed and direction using the 

GPS system. The GPS receiver in the radiosonde transmits frequency and phase measurements to the 

ground station for processing. These measurements are processed by the ground station to determine wind 

speed and direction. 

E-11. The ground stations in the MMS and MMS–P differ in configuration and capabilities. The Marwin in 

the MMS contains a built-in GPS receiver that processes the signals from the GPS radiosonde allowing the 

Marwin to determine wind speed and direction. The MMS–P system GPS radiosonde signals are received 

by the PLGR II and passed to the Marwin III for GPS wind finding. Using the PLGR II to process signals, 

allows the system to utilize the Precise Positioning Service (PPS) signal and allows future compliance with 

Selective Availability Anti-Spoofing Module compliance. This results in the MMS–P producing more 

accurate wind finding data. 
This page intentionally left blank. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-1

Appendix F 

NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

This appendix provides charts for the selection of optimum coverage. Section I 

contains an overview of the long-range aid to navigation coverage charts. Section II 

contains a map depicting very low frequency and Omega station locations. Apply the 

procedures outlined in chapter 4 to enter the charts in this appendix. 

LORAN COVERAGE CHARTS 

F-1. The U.S. Department of Defense requirement for foreign LORAN-C coverage ended December 31, 

1994. The Coast Guard has either closed or turned over the foreign stations to the host country. As a result, 

predictability of coverage availability is no longer possible. Some chains no longer have the requisite three 

stations operating, whereas others are completely off the air. MET personnel should consult with local 

authorities when selecting optimum LORAN-C coverage. Those chains operational as of the publication 

date are contained in. Table F-1 as a quick reference for the LORAN chains’ master and secondary 

stations. See figures F-1 through F-24 for the specific master and secondary stations for each chain. 

Table F-1. LORAN Chains’ Stations 

Chain Name Stations Latitude/Longitude 

5543 Calcutta 

 Master / Baleshwar 021 ̊ 29’ 08.000” N 

086 ̊ 55’ 18.000” E 

 Whiskey / Diamond Harbor 022 ̊ 10’ 18.000” N 

088 ̊ 12’ 25.000” E 

 X-ray / Patpur 020 ̊ 26’ 48.000” N 

085 ̊ 49’ 47.000” E 

5930 Canadian East Coast Chain 

 Master / Caribou 046 ̊ 48’ 27.305” N 

067 ̊ 55’ 37.159” W 

 X-ray / Nantucket 041 ̊ 15’ 12.046” N 

069 ̊ 58’ 38.536” W 

 Yankee / Cape Race 046 ̊ 46’ 32.286” N 

053 ̊ 10’ 27.606” W 

 Zulu / Fox Harbor 052 ̊ 22’ 35.252” N 

055 ̊ 42’ 27.862” W 

5980 Russian-American Chain 

 Master / Petropavlovsk 053 ̊ 07’ 47.584 N 

157 ̊ 41’ 42.900” E 

 Whiskey / Attu Island 052 ̊ 49’ 44.134”N 

173 ̊ 10’ 49.528” E 

 X-ray / Alexandrovsk 151 ̊ 04’ 42.800” N 
Appendix F 

F-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table F-1. LORAN Chains’ Stations 

Chain Name Stations Latitude/Longitude 

142 ̊ 42’ 04.950” E 

5990 Canadian West Coast Chain 

 Master / Williams Lake 051 ̊ 57’ 58.876” N 

122 ̊ 22’ 01.686” W 

 X-ray / Shoal Cove 055 ̊ 26’ 58.876” N 

131 ̊ 15’ 19.094” W 

 Yankee / George 047 ̊ 03’ 48.096” N 

119 ̊ 44’ 38.976” W 

 Zulu / Port Hardy 050 ̊ 36’ 29.830” N 

127 ̊ 21’ 28.489” W 

6042 Bombay Chain 

 Master / Dhrangadhra 023 ̊ 00’ 14.000” N 

071 ̊ 31’ 39.000” E 

 Whiskey / Veraval 020 ̊ 57’ 07.000” N 

070 ̊ 20’ 13.000” E 

 X-ray / Billamora 020 ̊ 45’ 40.000” N 

073 ̊ 02’ 17.000” E 

6731 Lessay Chain 

 Master / Lessay 049 ̊ 08’ 55.224” N 

001 ̊ 30’ 17.029” W 

 X-ray / Soustons 043 ̊ 44’ 23.099” N 

001 ̊ 22’ 49.584” W 

 Zulu / Sylt 054 ̊ 48’ 29.975” N 

008 ̊ 17’ 36.856” E 

6780 China South Sea 

 Master / Hexian (Babu) 023 ̊ 58’ 03.847” N 

111 ̊ 43’ 10.298” E 

 X-ray / Raoping (Huanggang) 023 ̊ 43’ 25.941” N 

116 ̊ 53’ 44.826” E 

 Yankee / Chongzuo (Taiping) 022 ̊ 32’ 35.452” N 

107 ̊ 13’ 21.665” E 

7001 Bo 

 Master / Bo 068 ̊ 38’ 06.847” N 

111 ̊ 43’ 10.298” E 

 X-ray / Jan Mayen Island 070 ̊ 54’ 51.478” N 

008 ̊ 43’ 56.525” W 

 Yankee / Berlevag 070 ̊ 50’ 43.014” N 

029 ̊ 12’ 15.980” E 

7030 Saudi Arabia South Chain 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-3

Table F-1. LORAN Chains’ Stations 

Chain Name Stations Latitude/Longitude 

 Master / Al Khamasin 020 ̊ 28’ 02.025” N 

044 ̊ 34’ 52.894” E 

 Whiskey / Salwa 024 ̊ 50’ 01.631” N 

050 ̊ 34’ 12.574” E 

 X-ray / Afif 023 ̊ 48’ 36.952” N 

042 ̊ 51’ 18.184” E 

 Yankee / Ash Shaykh 

Humayd 

028 ̊ 09’ 15.997” N 

034 ̊ 45’ 40.544” E 

 Zulu / Al Muwassam 016 ̊ 25’ 56.028” N 

042 ̊ 48’ 04.844” E 

7270 Newfoundland East Coast 

 Master / Comfort Cove 049 ̊ 19’ 53.570” N 

054 ̊ 51’ 42.570” W 

 Whiskey / Cape Race 046 ̊ 46’ 32.286” N 

053 ̊ 10’ 27.606” W 

 X-ray / Fox Harbor 052 ̊ 22’ 35.252” N 

055 ̊ 42’ 27.862” W 

7430 China North Sea 

 Master / Rongcheng (Yatou) 037 ̊ 03’ 51.765” N 

122 ̊ 19’ 25.954” E 

 X-ray / Xuancheng 031 ̊ 04’ 07.937” N 

118 ̊ 53’ 09.635” E 

 Yankee / Helong 042 ̊ 43’ 11.562” N 

129 ̊ 06’ 27.213” E 

7499 Sylt 

 Master / Sylt 054 ̊ 48’ 29.975” N 

008 ̊ 17’ 36.856” E 

 X-ray / Lessay 049 ̊ 08’ 55.224” N 

001 ̊ 30’ 17.029” W 

 Yankee / Vaerlandet 061 ̊ 17’ 49.435” N 

004 ̊ 41’ 46.618” E 

7950 Eastern Russia Chayka 

 Master / Aleksadrovsk 051 ̊ 04’ 42.805” N 

142 ̊ 42’ 04.952” E 

 Whiskey / Petropavlovsk 053 ̊ 07’ 47.584” N 

157 ̊ 41’ 42.900” E 

 X-ray / Ussuriisk 044 ̊ 31’ 59.702” N 

131 ̊ 38’ 23.403” E 

 Yankee / Tokachibuto 042 ̊ 44’ 37.214” N 

143 ̊ 43’ 09.757” E 
Appendix F 

F-4 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table F-1. LORAN Chains’ Stations 

Chain Name Stations Latitude/Longitude 

 Zulu / Okhotsk 059 ̊ 25’ 02.050” N 

143 ̊ 05’ 22.916” E 

7960 Gulf of Alaska Chain 

 Master / Tok 063 ̊ 19’ 42.884” N 

142 ̊ 48’ 31.346” W 

 X-ray / Narrow Cape 057 ̊ 26’ 20.301” N 

152 ̊ 22’ 10.708” W 

 Yankee / Shoal Cove 055 ̊ 26’ 20.940” N 

131 ̊ 15’ 19.094” W 

 Zulu / Port Clarence 065 ̊ 14’ 40.372” N 

166 ̊ 53’ 11.996” W 

7980 Southeast United States Chain 

 Master / Malone 030 ̊ 59’ 38.870” N 

085 ̊ 10’ 08.751” W 

 Whiskey / Grangeville 030 ̊ 43’ 33.149” N 

090 ̊ 49’ 43.046” W 

 X-ray / Raymondville 026 ̊ 31’ 55.141” N 

097 ̊ 49’ 59.539” W 

 Yankee / Jupiter 027 ̊ 01’ 58.528” N 

080 ̊ 06’ 52.875” W 

 Zulu / Carolina Beach 034 ̊ 03’ 46.208” N 

077 ̊ 54’ 46.100” W 

7990 Mediterranean Chain 

 Master / Sellia Marina 038 ̊ 52’ 20.707” N 

016 ̊ 43’ 06.713” E 

 X-ray / Lampedusa 035 ̊ 31’ 20.912” N 

012 ̊ 31’ 30.799” E 

 Yankee / Kargabarun 

(off air) 

040 ̊ 58’ 21.066” N 

027 ̊ 52’ 02.074” E 

 Zulu / Estartit 

(off air) 

042 ̊ 03’ 36.629” N 

003 ̊ 12’ 16.066” E 

8290 North Central United States 

 Master / Havre 048 ̊ 44’ 38.589” N 

109 ̊ 58’ 53.613” W 

 Whiskey / Baudette 048 ̊ 36’ 49.947” N 

094 ̊ 33’ 17.915” W 

 X-ray / Gillette 044 ̊ 00’ 11.305” N 

105 ̊ 37’ 23.895” W 

 Yankee / Williams Lake 051 ̊ 57’ 58.876” N 

122 ̊ 22’ 01.686” W 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-5

Table F-1. LORAN Chains’ Stations 

Chain Name Stations Latitude/Longitude 

8830 Saudi Arabia North Chain 

 Master / Afif 023 ̊ 48’ 36.952” N 

042 ̊ 51’ 18.184” E 

 Whiskey / Salwa 024 ̊ 50’ 01.631” N 

050 ̊ 34’ 12.574” E 

 X-ray / Al Khamasin 020 ̊ 28’ 02.025” N 

044 ̊ 34’ 52.894” E 

 Yankee / Ash Shaykh 

Humayd 

028 ̊ 09’ 15.997” N 

034 ̊ 45’ 40.544” E 

 Zulu / Al Muwassam 016 ̊ 25’ 56.028” N 

042 ̊ 48’ 04.844” E 

8970 Great Lakes Chain 

 Master / Dana 039 ̊ 51’ 07.658” N 

087 ̊ 29’ 11.586” W 

 Whiskey / Malone 030 ̊ 59’ 38.870” N 

085 ̊ 10’ 08.751” W 

 X-ray / Seneca 042 ̊ 42’ 50.716” N 

076 ̊ 49’ 33.308” W 

 Yankee / Baudette 048 ̊ 36’ 49.947” N 

094 ̊ 33’ 17.915” W 

 Zulu / Boise City 036 ̊ 30’ 20.783” N 

102 ̊ 53’ 59.487” W 

9610 South Central United States Chain 

 Master / Boise City 036 ̊ 30’ 20.783” N 

102 ̊ 53’ 59.487” W 

 Victor / Gillette 044 ̊ 00’ 11.305” N 

105 ̊ 37’ 23.895” W 

 Whiskey / Searchlight 035 ̊ 19’ 18.305” N 

114 ̊ 48’ 16.881” W 

 X-ray / Las Cruces 032 ̊ 04’ 18.130” N 

106 ̊ 52’ 04.388” W 

 Yankee / Raymondville 026 ̊ 31’ 55.141” N 

097 ̊ 49’ 59.539” W 

 Zulu / Grangeville 030 ̊ 43’ 33.149” N 

090 ̊ 49’ 43.046” W 

9930 East Asia 

 Master / Pohang 036 ̊ 11’ 05.450” N 

129 ̊ 20’ 27.440” E 

 Whiskey / Kwang Ju 035 ̊ 02’ 23.996” N 

126 ̊ 32’ 27.295” E 
Appendix F 

F-6 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table F-1. LORAN Chains’ Stations 

Chain Name Stations Latitude/Longitude 

 X-ray / Gesashi 026 ̊ 36’ 25.038” N 

128 ̊ 08’ 56.920” E 

 Yankee / Niijima 034 ̊ 24’ 11.943” N 

139 ̊ 16’ 19.473” E 

 Zulu / Ussurisk 

(off air) 

044 ̊ 31’ 59.702” N 

131 ̊ 38’ 23.403” E 

9940 United States West Coast Chain 

 Master / Fallon 039 ̊ 33’ 06.740” N 

118 ̊ 49’ 55.816” W 

 Whiskey / George 047 ̊ 03’ 48.096” N 

119 ̊ 44’ 38.976” W 

 X-ray / Middletown 038 ̊ 46’ 57.110” N 

122 ̊ 29’ 43.975” W 

 Yankee / Searchlight 035 ̊ 19’ 18.305” N 

114 ̊ 48’ 16.881” W 

9960 Northeast United States Chain 

 Master / Seneca 042 ̊ 42’ 50.716” N 

076 ̊ 49’ 33.308” W 

 Whiskey / Caribou 046 ̊ 48’ 27.305” N 

067 ̊ 55’ 37.159” W 

 X-ray / Nantucket 041 ̊ 15’ 12.046” N 

069 ̊ 58’ 38.536”W 

 Yankee / Carolina Beach 034 ̊ 03’ 46.208” N 

077 ̊ 54’ 46.100” W 

 Zulu / Dana 039 ̊ 51’ 07.658” N 

087 ̊ 29’ 11.586” W 

9990 North Pacific Chain 

 Master / Saint Paul 057 ̊ 09’ 12.350” N 

170 ̊ 15’ 06.245” W 

 X-ray / Attu Island 052 ̊ 49’ 44.134” N 

173 ̊ 10. 49.528” E 

 Yankee / Port Clarence 065 ̊ 14’ 40.372” N 

166 ̊ 53’ 11.996” W 

 Zulu / Narrow Cape 057 ̊ 26’ 20.301” N 

152 ̊ 22’ 10.708” W 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-7

Figure F1. LORAN-C, Calcutta chain GRI 5543 
Appendix F 

F-8 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure F-2. LORAN-C, Canadian east coast Chain GRI 5930 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-9

Figure F3. LORAN-C, Russian-American chain GRI 5980
Appendix F 

F-10 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure F4. LORAN-C, Canadian west coast chain, GRI 5990 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-11

Figure F5. LORAN-C, Bombay chain GRI 6042 
Appendix F 

F-12 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure F6. LORAN-C, Lessay chain GRI 6780 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-13

Figure F7. LORAN-C, China south sea GRI 6780 
Appendix F 

F-14 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure F8. LORAN-C, Bo chain GRI 7001 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-15

Figure F-9. LORAN-C, south Saudi Arabian chain, GR 7030 
Appendix F 

F-16 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure F10. LORAN-C, Newfoundland east coast GRI 7270 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-17

Figure F11. LORAN-C, China north sea GRI 7430 
Appendix F 

F-18 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure F12. LORAN-C, Sylt chain GRI 7499 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-19

Figure F13. LORAN-C, eastern Russia Chayka chain GRI 7950 
Appendix F 

F-20 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure F-14. LORAN-C, Gulf of Alaska chain, GRI 7960 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-21

Figure F-15. LORAN-C, southeast United States chain, GRI 7980 
Appendix F 

F-22 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure F-16. LORAN-C, Mediterranean chain, GRI 7990 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-23

 Figure F-17. LORAN-C, north central United States chain, GRI 8290 
Appendix F 

F-24 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure F-18. LORAN-C, north Saudi Arabian chain, GRI 8830 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-25

Figure F-19. LORAN-C, Great Lakes chain, GRI 8970 
Appendix F 

F-26 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure F-20. LORAN-C, south central United States chain, GRI 9610 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-27

Figure F-21. East Asia GRI 9930 
Appendix F 

F-28 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure F-22. LORAN-C, United States west coast chain, GRI 9940 
NAVAID Coverage Charts and Tables 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 F-29

Figure F-23. LORAN-C, northeast United States chain, GRI 9960 
Appendix F 

F-30 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure F-24. LORAN-C, north Pacific chain, GRI 9990 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 G-1

Appendix G 

Safety and Environmental Requirements 

Safety is always a primary consideration of Soldiers and trainers at all levels. Often, 

the implementation of safety and environmental procedures becomes 

counterproductive, preventing units from conducting realistic training. Units must be 

able to conduct realistic training while meeting all safety and environmental 

requirements. This appendix addresses these requirements. 

GENERAL 

G-1. The first rule of safety is: “Do Not Take Chances.” Hydrogen gas is extremely flammable. Special 

care in handling, storing, and disposing of waste is required to prevent injury or environmental hazards. 

HYDROGEN

G-2. Mixtures of hydrogen and air can be highly explosive. Personnel using commercial hydrogen must 

remove all possible sources of flames and sparks. Hydrogen burns with an almost invisible flame that is 

difficult to extinguish. If hydrogen ignites, use powder fire extinguishers only. 

Storage 

G-3. Warning signs must be posted in all areas where hydrogen is stored. The hydrogen cylinders should 

not be exposed to extreme heat or the direct rays of the sun. The area should be well ventilated and at least 

50 feet (15 meters) away from ignition sources. Material safety data sheets (MSDS) must be kept on file at 

each location. 

Handling 

G-4. All sources of static electricity must be provided a path to ground. All personnel and equipment must 

be grounded when using or generating hydrogen. Fire extinguishers must be readily available. Personnel 

must adhere to the detailed safety requirements outlined in chapter 7. 

Disposal 

G-5. Commercial hydrogen produces no harmful waste. When using the hydrogen generator set, 

AN/TMQ-3, a cloudy substance, calcium hydroxide, is released into the water during the process. This byproduct is an environmental hazard. Before disposing of this deposit and the calcium hydride containers, 

MET personnel must check with local agencies and comply with their procedures. 
This page intentionally left blank. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 H-1

Appendix H 

Environmental Awareness 

Commanders, unit leaders, and Soldiers have specific duties and responsibilities 

concerning protection of the environment. Soldiers are expected to do what is right in 

the absence of specific guidance. Unit leaders and commanders must be competent 

and confident in the area of environmental stewardship. Not all leaders are required 

to be environmental experts; however, they must be aware and responsive to 

compliance and prevention issues required during the execution of their duties. The 

information contained herein is considered an overview of expected duties and 

responsibilities in order to build a foundation of basic environmental awareness. 

Throughout is reference to material for further reading; research of these documents 

provides a complete explanation of legal and ethical responsibilities. 

NOTE: Equivalent U.S. Marine Corps guidance documents include MCO P1200.7S and MCO 

P5090.2A. 

SECTION I-ARMY ENVIRONMENTAL AWARENESS 

GENERAL POLICY STATEMENTS 

H-1. The Army's environmental vision states: "The Army will be a national leader in environmental and 

natural resource stewardship for present and future generations as an integral part of our mission". To 

achieve this vision, the Army's environmental strategy places a high priority on sustained compliance with 

all environmental laws; takes into account the restoration of previously contaminated sites; focuses on 

pollution prevention; and accounts for the conservation and preservation of natural resources. 

H-2. The Army environmental ethic calls for the chain of command to establish and support a stewardship 

climate that supports compliance; obeying the law; prevention; the concept of reduce, reuse, recycle; 

conservation, control and protection of natural resources; and restoration, the cleanup of contaminated 

areas. This ethic supports caring for the environment while conducting realistic training. 

H-3. All Army personnel should become familiar with these policy statements; they are established so that 

our natural environment will be available for present and future generations. Complete information 

regarding these polices can be obtained in section II of The Field Artillery Guide to Environmental 

Considerations.

SECTION II-METEOROLOGY ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS 

FIELD ACTIVITIES 

H-4. The meteorological (MET) section provides accurate and timely meteorological data to both artillery 

and other tactical units. This data is gathered via highly mobile, automated data processing and MET data 

acquisition systems. In order to obtain this data, various processes are used to launch and track a balloonborne radiosonde. These processes apply and produce substances that have the potential to cause serious 

damage to the environment. This section will identify and address the various preventive measures that can 
Appendix H 

H-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

be utilized in order to decrease possible environmental damage while conducting realistic training from the 

met section, associated vehicles, and personnel involved in training and operations. 

H-5. Key field environmental considerations include, but are not limited to, the following: 

z Vehicles should stay on established roads, trails, firing points, and firebreaks, unless conducting 

specific cross-country maneuver exercises. 

z Follow land contours rather than driving up and down hills or along creeks. 

z In order to minimize siltation of streams; use bridges or low water crossings when crossing 

permanent streams. If crossing through a stream becomes necessary, then do so by the most 

direct route (90-degree angle). 

z Establish refueling and maintenance areas away from wetlands, drainage areas, and near or over 

water sources. 

z Federal law prohibits the removal of artifacts from federal property. Do not excavate, remove, 

damage, or otherwise alter or deface any archaeological resource located on a military 

reservation. 

z Avoid off-limit areas for known archaeological sites during military training exercises. Penalties 

can be up to $250,000 for knowingly disturbing a site. 

z Be aware of and avoid nesting, bedding, and habitats of all species of birds and animals. 

z Use radar-scattering camouflage netting as outlined in the field manual; not live vegetation. 

z When planning training activities, conform to installation and community noise-abatement 

regulations. Identify, mark, and abide by off-limit boundaries. 

z Open fires, such as burning of garbage, refuse, and rubbish is not allowed on range areas. 

z Conform to field sanitation and medical standards when using soakage pits for wash water, 

liquid kitchen wastes, and grease traps per FM 21-10.

z Establish field satellite-accumulation site and procedures. 

z Police field locations and establish field trash-collection point and procedures. Remove 

materials packed into training area on departure from the training area. 

z When the training exercise is complete, repair any field damage such as ruts from vehicles and 

other emplacements. 

z Conduct all training with a concern for conservation and future use of range training areas. 

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL AND HAZARDOUS WASTE 

H-6. The Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) of 1976 is the framework for managing 

hazardous waste and has established standards for identifying, classifying, and storing of these wastes. 

RCRA regulations require those involved in managing hazardous substances to be properly trained, and the 

training to be properly documented. 

H-7. Key hazardous material and hazardous waste environmental considerations include, but are not 

limited to, the following items: 

z Personnel dealing with hazardous materials should be trained in proper handling, containment, 

cleanup, and reporting procedures. 

z A material safety data sheet (MSDS) must be on file, and made available to all personnel 

regarding hazardous material. 

z .Battery electrolyte (acid) from damaged batteries should be drained and disposed of through 

turn-in via installation policy and maintenance SOP. Refer to TB 43-0134 for complete 

procedures regarding battery handling and disposal. 

z Never allow the accumulation of more than 55 gallons of a hazardous waste, or 1 quart of 

acutely hazardous waste, at the satellite accumulation point. Process all hazardous waste in a 

timely manner. 

z Hazardous waste containers should be kept closed when not in use, kept free of rust and leaks, 

and stored separately from incompatible wastes. 

z Incompatible wastes must never be transported on the same vehicle. 
Environmental Awareness 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 H-3

z Ensure that all U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) and hazardous waste transportation 

requirements are met prior to transporting hazardous material or hazardous waste on public 

highways. 

z Check with local environmental office for transportation procedures within the installation 

boundary. 

z For complete information regarding storing and handling of hazardous materials refer to TM 38-

410.

MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET

H-8. A MSDS is a summary of information on a given chemical identifying material, health and physical 

hazards, exposure limits, and precautions. A MSDS describes the hazards of a material and provides 

information on how the material can be safely handled, used, and stored. Insist on receiving a copy of a 

MSDS when receiving a hazardous chemical from supply, and retain it for when or if you turn in the 

material. Periodically review each MSDS pertaining to your unit. This will assure a quick response when 

identifying symptoms and handling emergencies. 

H-9. Unfortunately, there is no specified format for a MSDS, and it doesn't contain all known data of a 

chemical, but there are typical components. These are outlined in 29 CFR 1910.1200. Use the following 

information in table H-1 as a guide toward what to expect on most MSDS forms. 

Table H-1 Material Safety Data Sheet 

Section/Topic Contents 

Section 1 - General Information Manufacturers' name and address 

Trade or common name of product 

Section 2 - Hazardous Components NIOSH and/or CAS Number 

Chemical name and percentage 

Section 3 - Physical Properties Boiling point, freezing point, water solubility, etc. 

Appearance and odor under normal conditions 

Section 4 - Fire & Explosion Hazard Fire-fighting equipment 

Any unusual fire and explosion hazards 

Section 5 - Health Hazard Routes of entry into the body 

Emergency and first aid procedures 

Section 6 - Reactivity Data Conditions to avoid 

Incompatibility with other materials 

Section 8 - Control Measures Recommended respiratory and ventilation 

Personal protective equipment, if needed 

Section 9 – Special Precautions Handling and storing precautions 

Section 10 – Transportation Applicable regulations 

Hazards class and required labeling 

MAINTENANCE 

H-10. The MET station leader assigns a hazardous material/hazardous waste (HM/HW) spill coordinator. 

This person ensures the accountability, proper storage, and disposal of all HM/HW, and ensures that 

HM/HW spills are immediately contained and reported. 

H-11. Key maintenance environmental considerations include, but are not limited to, the following: 

z Refueling operation SOPs should address practices to minimize spills. 
Appendix H 

H-4 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

z Implement preventive maintenance on all heavy equipment to ensure petroleum products will 

not be released from the belly pan. 

z Ensure pollutants are not discharged into storm or wash rack drains or poured on the ground or 

along fence lines. Some common pollutants are oil, solvents, soap, diesel, gasoline, battery acid, 

chemicals, waste antifreeze, paint, and grease. 

z Parts containing asbestos, such as brake shoes, clutch plates, and equipment insulation should be 

removed, collected, and disposed according to installation policy. 

z The least hazardous or preferably, nonhazardous material to perform a function should be used, 

unless previous research of options clearly indicates otherwise. The Defense Logistics Agency 

(DLA) produces a manual, Environmental Products, to assist in this process. 

z Do not mix fuel, oil, or antifreeze together. This is considered a mixed waste. 

SUPPLY 

H-12. The MET section is required to have a complete inventory of HM/HW generated by the section. The 

MET station leader must know what chemicals the unit requires, where and how they are stored, how much 

hazardous waste is generated, and necessary spill response procedures. He/she should coordinate with the 

unit operations officer or environmental control officer (ECO) to ensure this information is incorporated 

into the unit SOP. 

H-13. Key supply environmental considerations include, but are not limited to, the following items: 

z Requisition only supplies needed and authorized, avoid excessive stockpiling of materials. 

z Maintain an accurate inventory in SOP of hazardous waste used by the MET section. This 

listing should include waste by volume, type, generating process, and location. 

z Use of used oil tanks for disposal of solvents, antifreeze, or other HM/HW is against regulation. 

Storage of hazardous material must be in clearly marked DOT-approved containers. 

z Actively support a unit-recycling program. 

z Ensure tires and batteries are properly turned in for recycling. 

z Ensure used batteries are turned in on a one-for-one basis. 

SPILL RESPONSE

H-14. Generally, only persons specifically trained to respond to a spill should handle unit spills. However, 

all personnel should, at a minimum, report the spill, and be aware of the following four basic steps to spill 

response: 

z Protect yourself. Use personal protective equipment (PPE) specified in the MSDS. 

z Stop the flow. This may be as simple as placing the container upright or closing a valve. 

z Contain the spill. Place absorbent material around the spill, and protect drains and ditches. 

z Report the spill. Notify supervisor, and other key personnel. 

H-15. Each unit is responsible for the cleanup of their own spills, as long as no personnel are put in danger. 

After the above four steps are completed, take the necessary steps to cleanup the spill. Information on 

cleanup procedures can be found on the MSDS, unit SOP, or contact installation environmental staff for 

guidance. Turn in the spilled material and absorbent to the Defense Reutilization Marketing Office 

(DRMO), or another designated point if a DRMO is not available. Also, ensure adequate spill supplies are 

on-hand for future use. 

H-16. Key spill prevention, response, and cleanup considerations include, but are not limited to, the 

following items: 

z A spill prevention and response section should be included in the unit SOP outlining installation 

spill plan requirements. 

z Maintain a spill cleanup kit near any satellite-accumulation area, or where a potential for spill 

exists. The kit should contain, at a minimum, absorbent material, shovel, brooms, gloves, and 
Environmental Awareness 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 H-5

appropriate containers. Units who have a potential for release or spill that may impact streams 

should also maintain booms for containment. 

z Drip pans should be used under vehicles and equipment where spills are likely to occur. 

z Spills of oil, fuel, or other hazardous pollutants over 5 gallons (18.9 liters) in volume, 100 

square feet (9.3 square meters) in area, or in any waterway should be reported immediately to 

the chain of command. 

z All topsoil contaminated with oil should be removed, properly disposed, and replaced by the 

unit. While awaiting disposal, keep the excavated soil covered to prevent runoff in case of rain. 

SECTION III-REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

LAWS AND REGULATIONS 

H-17. Military facilities are subject to federal, state, local, and host nation environmental laws. When the 

requirements differ, the most stringent applies. Ignorance of environmental laws is not an excuse for 

noncompliance, and it will not protect commanders, Soldiers, or the military services from civil and 

criminal liability. Table H-2 lists the federal and military laws and regulations that are frequently 

encountered by Army personnel; however, it is not inclusive of all requirements. 

H-18. Additionally, environmental law varies with differing countries, states, and cities. What is legal in 

one area may be illegal in another. Each installation environmental office knows the laws for that locality, 

and should be consulted on environmental considerations during the planning and execution of training. 

H-19. Army units outside the United States (OCONUS) that are not subject to federal environmental 

regulations decreed by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) should comply with the final 

governing standards (FGS) of the host nation (HN). In areas where a HN has minimal or no environmental 

laws and regulations, comply with the Overseas Environmental Baseline Guidance Document (OEBGD)

provided by the Department of Defense, AR 200-1, and AR 200-2. Refer to Table H-2 for a listing of 

applicable Army regulations, executive orders, and federal laws. 

Table H-2. Environmental Laws and Regulations 

Army Regulations Federal Laws 

AR 200-1. Environmental Protection and Enhancement Archaeological Protection Act of 1979 

AR 200-2. Environmental Effects of Army Actions Clean Air Act of 1970 

AR 200-3. Natural Resources Clean Water Act of 1972 

AR 200-4. Historic Preservation CERCLA of 1980 

AR 420-49. Solid and Hazardous Waste Management EPCRA of 1986 

AR 420-76. Pest Management Endangered Species Act of 1973 

 Federal Facilities Compliance Act of 1992 

Executive Orders Haz. Materials Transportation Act of 1975 

EO 11989. Use of off-road vehicles on public land National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 

EO 11990. Wetland protection National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 

EO 12114. Effects of federal actions abroad Noise Control Act of 1972 

EO 12196. OSHA Compliance for federal employees Oil Pollution Act of 1990 

EO 12580. CERCLA duties and powers RCRA of 1976 

EO 13101. Pollution prevention and recycling Toxic Substances Control Act of 1976 

H-20. Regulatory agencies exist which require environmental training. This training may be general 

designed for all personnel in the unit, or may be specialized training targeted at specific personnel. The 

installation Environmental and Safety Offices can best assist in determining your training requirements and 

who to contact for additional information. Table H-3 is provided as a reference of possible training 

requirements for the MET section personnel. 
Appendix H 

H-6 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Table H-3. Regulatory Training Requirements 

NOTE: The depth or level of training will vary between target audiences. For example, K and E will need in-depth 

training, while A will only require broad overviews. The letters K, E, N, or A denotes target audience, and are 

listed below:

Knowledge Personnel who administer, implement, or comply with contents of regulations 

such as program manager and technicians in the environmental field. Also 

includes organizations that need in-depth knowledge of the environmental 

laws/regulations/programs, such as Staff Judge Advocate. 

Executors All personnel who supervise or actually handle responsibilities dealing with 

environmental programs, to include ECOs, technicians, and workers. Also 

includes unit personnel required to execute responsibilities with environmental 

ramifications as part of their mission. 

Need to Know Personnel who may encounter environmental issues as part of their mission. This 

may include personnel within the following activities: Engineers; Designers; 

Emergency Personnel; Safety; Reserve Components; First-line Supervisors; Crew 

Chiefs; NCO's; and various unit personnel as identified by the installation 

Environmental Office and their supervisors 

Awareness Public Affairs Office, Reserve Components, other unit personnel. 

Training Topic Regulatory Reference K E N A

Hazardous Materials/Waste Compliance 

Training 

29 CFR 1200; 40 CFR 262.34, 

264.16, 265.16; 49 CFR 172 

* * * * 

Hazardous Waste Operations (HAZWOPER) 

for IR 

29 CFR 1910.120 * * 

Hazardous Waste Operations (HAZWOPER) 

for TSDF 

29 CFR 1910.120 * * 

Emergency Response to Hazardous Materials 

Incidents/Hazardous Material Technician 

29 CFR 1910.120 * * * 

National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) NEPA of 1969 * * 

National Historic Preservation Act (NHPA) 36 CFR part 800, 36 CFR part 63, 

NHPA of 1966 

* * 

Archaeological Resources Protection Act 

(ARPA) 

43 CFR 7.7 (4) ARPA of 1979 * 

Native American Graves Protection and 

Repatriation Act (NAGPRA) 

NAGPRA of 1990 * 

Emergency Planning and Community Rightto-Know (EPCRA) EPCRA/SARA 1986 Title 3, 

Executive Order 12856 

* * * * 

Lead Based Paint Lead Based Paint Exposure 

Reduction Act of 1992, 24 CFR 35 

* * * * 

Asbestos 40 CFR part 763, 40 CFR 61 part M * * * * 

Endangered Species Act (ESA) ESA 1973 as amended, 50 CFR par 

402 

* * 

Clean Water Act (CWA) CWA S 311 * * * 

Storm Water Pollution Prevention Planning CWA S 319 * * * 

CFC/Halon Refrigerants EO 11051, 40 CFR 82.40, 40 CFR 

282, 58 FR 92 (p. 28660) 

 * * * 

Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and 

Rodenticide Act (FIFRA) 

FIFRA of 1972, 40 CFR 265.16, 

SARA of 1986 

 * 
Environmental Awareness 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 H-7

Table H-3. Regulatory Training Requirements 

NOTE: The depth or level of training will vary between target audiences. For example, K and E will need in-depth 

training, while A will only require broad overviews. The letters K, E, N, or A denotes target audience, and are 

listed below:

Solid Waste Management 40 CFR 240-257/RCRA Subtitle D * * 

Underground Storage Tanks 40 CFR part 280, RCRA Subtitle I * 

National Pollutant Discharge Elimination 

System (NPDES) 

CWA of 1990, 40 CFR 122-129 * * * 

Confined Space Entry 29 CFR 1910.146 * * * * 

Occupational Respiratory Protection 29 CFR 1926.58, 29 CFR 1910.134 * * 

Occupational Exposures to Bloodborne 

Pathogens 

29 CFR 1910.1030 * * * * 

Storm Water Compliance 40 CFR 122-129, WPCA S 319 * * 

Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1910.1200 * * * * 

Department of Transportation 49 CFR172.704 * * * * 

ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES 

H-21. Field artillery battalions will appoint an environmental compliance officer (ECO)/hazardous waste 

coordinator. This individual is an excellent source for guidance with regards to environmental regulations and 

procedures. Appointed personnel— 

z Should receive formal training and act as an advisor on environmental regulatory compliance 

during training, operations, and logistics functions. 

z Will be the commander's eyes and ears for environmental matters, as the safety officer/NCO is 

for safety matters. 

z Should function as the liaison between the unit and higher headquarters regarding environmental 

matters such as training requirements, equipment, or supplies that unit personnel need. 

z Should inspect HM/HW accumulation sites, and ensure that Soldiers handling these materials 

are properly trained. 

z Ensure the unit's SOP covers environmental considerations, conservation, natural resources, 

pollution prevention, HM/HW, and spill procedures. 

z Support the Army's pollution prevention/recycling program. 

z Report hazardous material and waste spills immediately. 

z Conduct environmental self-assessments or internal environmental compliance assessments, and 

meet with key installation environmental points of contact, as necessary, to remain updated on 

any regulatory changes. 

SECTION IV. ENVIRONMENTAL RISK MANAGEMENT 

ENVIRONMENTAL RISK MANAGEMENT 

H-22. Leaders at all levels are required to make timely and appropriate decisions regarding the 

environment. The failure to do so may negatively impact the training environment, which could then lead 

to personal liability of individuals directly involved, the chain of command, and the U.S. Army. Therefore, 

leaders must have a method of managing, assessing, and reducing environmental risks. 

H-23. Risk management is a five-step process designed to provide leaders a methodology for the 

identification, assessment, control, and evaluation of environmental risks. The following is a summary of 

these steps from FM 20-400 and FM 100-14; refer to them for detailed information. 
Appendix H 

H-8 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

H-24. Step 1. Identify Hazards - Environmental hazards include all activities that may pollute, create 

negative noise-related effects, degrade archeological/cultural resources, or negatively affect threatened or 

endangered species habitats. A select listing of common environmental hazards is located in table H-4. 

Table H-4. Common Environmental Hazards 

Media Area Common Environmental Hazards 

Air Equipment exhaust, convoy dust, range fires, open-air burning, 

pyrotechnics/smoke pots/smoke grenades, part-washer emissions, 

paint emissions, air-conditioner/refrigeration CFCs, HM/HW release, 

pesticides, other toxic industrial chemicals or material. 

Archeological and cultural Maneuvering and digging in sensitive areas, disturbing or removing 

artifacts, demolition/munitions effects, HM/HW spills. 

Noise Low-flying aircraft (helicopters), demolition/munitions effects, nighttime 

operations, operations near post/camp boundaries and civilian 

populations, vehicle convoys/maneuvers, large-scale exercises. 

Threatened and/or 

endangered species 

Maneuvering in sensitive areas, demolition/munitions effects, especially 

during breeding seasons, disturbing habitat or individual species, 

HM/HW spills or releases, poor field sanitation, improper cutting of 

vegetation, damage to coral reefs, 

Soil (terrain) Over use of maneuver areas, demolition/munitions effects, range fires, 

poor field sanitation, poor maneuver-damage control, erosion, troop 

construction effect, refueling operations, HM/HW spills, maneuver in 

ecologically sensitive areas such as wetlands and tundra, industrial 

waste runoff, pesticide accumulation in soil, vegetation, and terrestrial 

organisms. 

Water Refueling operations near water sources, HM/HW spills, erosion and 

unchecked drainage, amphibious/water-crossing operations, troop 

construction effects, poor field sanitation, washing vehicles at 

unapproved sites. 

H-25. Step 2. Assess Environmental Hazards to Determine Risk - A risk assessment is a tool used for 

evaluating the most pressing or most hazardous potential environmental damage. It considers two factors: 

probability, how often a hazard is likely to occur; and severity, the effect in degrees a hazard will have on 

personnel, equipment, environment, and mission. Unit leaders should conduct risk assessments before 

conducting any training, operations, or logistical activities that are not previously addressed in the SOP, or 

when conditions differ significantly from the SOP. Complete information on risk assessments can be 

obtained from FM 20-400 for procedures on how to perform an environmental risk assessment. 

H-26. Step 3. Develop Controls and Make a Decision - This step is designed to reduce the probability or 

severity of each hazard, which in turn lowers the overall risk. Control types fall in the categories of 

educational, physical, or avoidance. Table H-5 outlines examples of environmental controls, and section II 

above contains the specifics pertinent to the MET section. 
Environmental Awareness 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 H-9

Table H-5. Examples of Environmental Controls 

Control Type Environmental-Related Examples 

Educational Conducting unit environmental-awareness training 

Conducting an environmental briefing before deployment 

Performing tasks to environmental standards 

Reviewing environmental considerations in AARs 

Reading unit's environmental SOPs and policies 

Physical Providing spill-prevention equipment 

Establishing field satellite-accumulation site and procedures 

Policing field locations 

Practicing good field sanitation 

Posting signs and warnings for off-limit areas 

Avoidance Maneuvering around historical/cultural sites 

Establishing refueling and maintenance areas away from wetlands and 

drainage areas 

Crossing streams at approved sites 

Preventing pollution 

Limiting noise in endangered and threatened species habitats 

H-27. Step 4. Implement Controls - Leaders must inform subordinates of risk-control measures, state how 

each control is to be implemented, and assign responsibilities. They must also ensure these controls are in 

place prior to the operation. This is accomplished by using the before, during, and after checklists and the 

environmental risk-assessment process. Examples of checklists can be obtained from TC 5-400, or from 

the field artillery environmental handbook referenced in section I, in order to determine the environmental 

considerations that may effect MET section training and operations. 

H-28. Step 5. Supervise and Evaluate - Leaders should monitor controls to ensure effectiveness and 

whether controls require modification. They should ensure the after action review (AAR) process includes 

an evaluation of environmental-related hazards, controls, Soldier performance, and leader supervision. 
This page intentionally left blank. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 I-1

Appendix I 

Time Zones, Octants, and Regions 

To establish a common time and location, MET messages are reported in Greenwich 

Mean Time while locations are prefaced with an octant of the globe code. Figure I-1 

is a world map divided into time zones, global octants, and climatic regions 

TIME ZONES 

I-1. Time is calculated from the Greenwich meridian. The middle of the zero time zone passes through 

Greenwich with its east and west limits 7° 30’ on each side. Each 15-degree zone east and west of the 

initial zone represents 1 hour of time. The number of hours that must be added to or subtracted from local 

standard time to give GMT is indicated for each zone. Political boundaries in the various countries have 

caused modifications of the time zones. The vertical lines and clear sections are used to show which zones 

these divisions belong. Where a half-hour difference is legal, horizontal lines are used. Where no zone 

system has yet been adopted, the area is represented by small dots. Where no legal time has been 

established, the larger dots are used. Variations from zone time are given in hours and minutes. Enter the 

map with the section location and extract the time correction. 

GLOBAL OCTANTS 

I-2. Global octants are indicated by bold N-S, E-W lines and octant identifications. Determine the section 

location on the map and extract the appropriate octant number. 

CLIMATIC REGIONS 

I-3. The seven climatic regions of the Northern Hemisphere are indicated and identified by the large 

black numbers 1 through 7. 
Appendix I 

I-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

Figure I-1. Time zones, octants, and regions
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 Glossary-1 

Glossary 

SECTION I. ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 

AFATDS Advanced Field Artillery Tactical Data System 

AFW Air Force weather 

AFWA Air Force Weather Agency 

AI area of interest 

ALSO artillery limited surface observation 

AMV area of meteorology validity 

AO area of operation 

AR Army regulation 

ARTEP Army Training and Evaluation Program 

ASI additional skill identifier 

BCT brigade combat team 

BITE built-in test equipment 

BN Battalion 

C2 command and control 

C Celsius 

CBRN chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear 

CECOM Communications-Electronics Command 

CMP common message processor 

comm Communications 

COSCOM corps support command 

corr alt corrected altitude (Table 2 computation work sheet) 

CPL Corporal 

DA Department of the Army 

DDT digital data terminal 

DISCOM division support command 

DOD Department of Defense 

DOT Department of Transportation 

DP dew point 

DRMO Defense Reutilization Marketing Office 

DS direct support 

DTED Digital Terrain Elevation Data 

ECO 

F 

Environmental Control Officer 

Fahrenheit 

FA field artillery 

FATDS Field Artillery Tactical Data System 

FC Fires Cell 
Glossary 

Glossary-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.55 25 October 2007 

FCE fire control element 

FDC fire direction center 

FLOT forward line of own troops 

FM field manual 

FMH federal meteorology handbook 

FOMET fallout met 

FSCL fire support coordination line 

FSC federal supply catalog 

FSCOORD fire support coordinator 

GMT Greenwich Mean Time 

GPS Global Positioning System 

GRI grid repetition interval 

GS general support 

GUI graphical user interface 

HAZMAT hazardous materials 

HM/HW hazardous material/hazardous waste 

HMMWV high-mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle 

HN host nation 

Hz Hertz 

ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization 

IMETS 

IP 

Integrated Meteorological System 

internet protocol 

IPB intelligence preparation of the battlefield 

JAAWIN Joint Air Force and Army Weather Information Network 

JVMF 

K 

joint variable message format 

Kelvin 

kHz Kilohertz 

km Kilometer 

kw kilowatt 

LCPL lance corporal 

log logistics 

LORAN long-range aid to navigation 

LORAN-C 

LRU 

Long-range aid to navigation commercial 

line replaceable units 

m meter 

MAC maintenance allocation chart 

mb millibar 

MDP meteorological datum plane 

mech mechanized 

MET meteorology 
 Glossary 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 Glossary-3 

METCM meteorology computer message 

METT-TC mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time 

available, civil considerations 

MHG meteorological hydrogen generator 

Mhz megahertz 

MLRS Multiple Launch Rocket System 

MOS military occupational specialty 

MSDS material safety data sheet 

MSE mobile subscriber equipment 

MSL mean sea level 

MM5 mesoscale model (fifth generation) 

MMS meteorological measuring set 

MMS–P meteorological measuring set-profiler 

MUL master unit list 

NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization 

NAVAID navigational aid 

NCO noncommissioned officer 

NIPRNET 

NOGAPS 

Non-Classified Internet Protocol Network 

Naval Operational Global Atmospheric Prediction System 

NOTAM notice to airmen 

OIC operator interface computer 

OPORD operation order 

PFC private first class 

PIBAL pilot balloon 

PMCS preventive maintenance checks and services 

POL petroleum, oils, and lubricants 

PPS Precise Positoning Service 

PSI pounds per square inch 

PSY Phychological 

PSYOP psychological operations 

PTM plaintext message 

PTU 

OPORD 

pressure temperature humidity 

operations order 

QSTAG quadripartite standardization agreement 

RAOB Radiosonde Observation 

RCRA Resource Conservation Recovery Act 

RDF radio direction finding 

RF radio frequencies 

RH relative humidity 

RPV remotely piloted vehicle 

SAASM Selective Availability Anit-Spoofing Module 
Glossary 

Glossary-4 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.55 25 October 2007 

S3 operations officer 

SF standard form 

SFC sergeant first class 

SGT Sergeant 

SINCGARS single-channel ground and air-borne radio system 

SIPRNET 

SOI 

Secret Internet Protocol Routing Network 

signal operating instructions 

SOP standard operating procedure 

SPC Specialist 

SOWT special observation weather team 

SSG staff sergeant (Army) 

SSGT staff sergeant (USMC) 

STANAG standardization agreement 

SWO staff weather officer 

TA target acquisition 

TACMET tactical metorology 

TAM target area metorology 

TB technical bulletin 

TC training circular 

TCIM tactical communications interface module 

TM technical manual 

TRN transmission repeat number 

TSOP tactical standing operating procedure 

T-VSAT Tactical-Very Small Aperture Terminal 

UAV unmanned aerial vehicle 

UPPS Unified Post Processing System 

URL Universal Resource Locator 

URN unit reference number 

U.S. United States 

USAF United States Air Force 

USMC United States Marine Corps 

V Volt 

VAC volts alternating current 

VDC volts direct current 

VLF very low frequency 

VMF 

WB 

variable message format 

white bag 

WLR weapons-locating radar 

WMO World Meteorological Organization 

Z ZUZU time zone 
 Glossary 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 Glossary-5 

SECTION II-TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 

air mass 

An extensive body of air within which the conditions of temperature and moisture in a horizontal 

plane are essentially uniform. 

air pressure 

The weight of the air per unit of volume. 

all-weather 

The ability to be functional without regard to weather. 

ambient temperature 

The temperature of the immediate surrounding medium, such as a gas or liquid. 

Anemometer 

The general name for instruments designed to measure the speed (or force) of the wind. 

aneroid 

A kind of barometer which contains no liquid. 

area observations 

Meteorological observations that come in via messages over the radio network from other MMS–P or 

metorological measuring set systems in the current theater of operations. 

azimuth 

The horizontal angle, measured clockwise by degrees or mils between a reference direction and the 

line to an observed or designated point. There are three base (reference) directions or azimuths: true, 

grid, and magnetic azimuth. 

ballistic meteorology 

The study dealing with the phenomena of the atmosphere and its effect upon the motion of projectiles. 

ballistics 

The science of the motion of projectiles. 

ballistic temperature 

An assumed temperature that would have the same total effect on a projectile during its flight as the 

varying temperatures actually encountered; reported as a percent of standard. 

ballistic wind 

An assumed constant wind that would have the same total effect on a projectile during its flight as the 

varying winds actually encountered. 

barometer 

An instrument for measuring atmospheric pressure. 

baroswitch 

A pressure-operated switching device used in a radiosonde. 

built-in test equipment (BITE) 

Circuits built into an item of equipment to test certain functions. 

climatological information 

Information that deals with weather conditions and variations from normal for a particular place or 

area, during a specified period of a year. 

critical angle 

The limiting angle at which angular data may become invalid. 
Glossary 

Glossary-6 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.55 25 October 2007 

cursor 

An indicator on a computer. 

datum 

A mathematical model of the earth used to calculate and specify geographic locations. 

density 

The mass per unit volume, measured in grams per cubic meter. 

deviation 

A departures from accepted policies or standards. Ballistic densities and temperatures are reported as 

deviations from the standards that were used to develop the weapons firing tables. 

domain 

A square geographic area with a center point selected by the system operator. 

downwind 

The direction toward which the wind is blowing (with the wind). 

dry-bulb temperature 

The temperature measured by the dry bulb of a psychrometer; ambient air temperature. 

elevation 

The vertical distance of a point or level on or affixed to the surface of the Earth measured from mean 

sea level. 

elevation angle 

Elevation angle is the angle between the horizon and objects above the horizon measured along the arc 

which passes through the zenith and the object in question. 

equation of state 

An equation relating temperature, pressure, and volume of a system in thermodynamic equilibrium. 

fallout 

Fallout is the precipitation to earth of particulate matter from a nuclear cloud; also applied to the 

particulate matter itself. 

free lift 

Refers to the net upward force required for a balloon to rise at a given rate. Free lift corresponds to the 

specific balloon (sounding or pilot balloon) being used and is a portion of total lift. 

fronts 

A transition zone between air masses of different densities and temperatures. 

geopotential height 

The height of a given point in the atmosphere in units proportional to the potential energy of unit mass 

(geopotenital) at this height, relative to mean sea level. 

horizontal distance 

The arc distance or the distance traveled by a balloon as projected to the earth’s curved surface. 

hydrostatic equation 

The basic force equation which states that the change of pressure with respect to height is equal to the 

negative product of density and the acceleration of gravity. 
 Glossary 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 Glossary-7 

hygristor 

The hygristor is a humidity-sensing element or device; a resistor whose resistance varies according to 

the amount of moisture in the air. 

inversion 

An increase of air temperature with increase in altitude (the ground being colder than the surrounding 

air). When an inversion esists, there are not convection currents an dwind speed apre below 5 knots. 

The atmosphere is stable and normally is considered the most favorable state for ground release of 

chemical agents. 

isobar 

A line of constant pressure. 

isobaric 

Means of equal or constant pressure. 

isotherm 

A line of constant temperature. 

isothermal 

Means of equal or constant temperature. 

kelvin scale (°K) 

An absolute temperature scale with a freezing point of 273.16°K and a boiling point of 373.16°K. 

lapse rate 

The rate at which temperature changes with altitude. 

Local observations 

Meteorological observations gathered at the current shelter location. Also referred to as local data or 

local met. 

low-level winds 

Winds in the friction layer of the atmosphere. 

magnetic declination 

The angle between the magnetic and geographical meridians at any place, expressed in degrees east or 

west to indicate the direction of magnetic north from true north. In nautical and aeronautical 

navigation, the term magnetic variation is used instead of magnetic declination and the angle is termed 

variation of the compass or magnetic variation. 

mandatory level 

One of several constant-pressure levels in the atmosphere for which a complete evaluation of data 

derived from upper air observation is required. 

mean sea level 

The average height of the surface of the sea for all stage of the tide; used as a reference for elevations. 

mean sea level pressure 

The station pressure reduced to mean sea level pressure. 

meteorological datum plane 

The altitude of the met station from which all met computations are based. 

meteorological day 

A 24-hour day divided into three periods - night, afternoon, and transition. 
Glossary 

Glossary-8 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.55 25 October 2007 

meteorological data 

Meteorological facts pertaining to the atmosphere, such as wind, temperature, air density, and pressure 

an other phenomena that affect military operations. 

meteorology 

The study of the earth’s atmosphere. 

millibar 

A unit of atmospheric pressure. 

modulator 

The part of a radiosonde which contains the sensing elements and baroswitch. 

N unit 

A mathematically simplified unit of refraction; designed to replace complex numbers involved in the 

values of the index of refraction. 

NOGAPS data 

Worldwide forecast model data for the next 72 hours produced by the Navy Operational Global 

Atmospheric Prediction System (NOGAPS). 

nowcast 

A weather forecast for “now,” meaning a very short term forecast. 

nowcast segment 

The 30-minute period in which an iteration of modeling is done by the MM5. 

observations 

Actual measurements of meteorological conditions, as opposed to predicted or interpolated values. 

Also referred to as real-time meteorological observations. 

offset 

The difference in distance and azimuth from a tracking point to the point of release of a sounding or 

pilot balloon. 

operational response 

The data entered during the operation of the flight. 

optical-electrical bearing clock 

A check performed to ensure that the optical axis of the telescope is parallel to the electrical axis of the 

radio direction finding antenna. 

orographic 

Means of, pertaining to, or (frequently in meteorology) caused by mountains. 

parameter 

A quantity to which arbitrary values may be assigned, such a temperature, density, or pressure values. 

pilot balloon 

A small balloon whose ascent is followed by a theodolite to obtain data for computing speed and 

direction of winds in the upper air. 

precipitation 

The form of water, either liquid or solid, that falls from the atmosphere, and which reaches the ground. 

pressure gradient 

The spacing between lines of constant pressure, or isobars. 
 Glossary 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 Glossary-9 

pressure gradient force 

The initiating force which produces wind. 

projectile 

Any object projected by exterior force and continuing in motion by its own inertia. 

psychrometer 

An instrument used for measuring atmospheric humidity that consists of a dry-bulb thermometer and a 

wet-bulb thermometer. 

radioactive fallout 

The eventual descent to the earth’s surface of radioactive matter placed in the atmosphere by atomic or 

thermonuclear explosion (also called radiological fallout). 

radio direction finder 

A component of the MMS that tracks the radiosonde signal. 

radiosonde 

A balloon-borne instrument (radio) that measures and transmits meteorological data. 

rawin 

Rawin is a method of winds aloft observation; that is, the determination of wind speed and direction in 

the atmosphere above the station by using radar or a radio direction finder; a contraction of radio 

winds. 

rawinsonde (radiosonde and wind sounding, combined) 

A method of winds aloft observation that determines wind speed and direction in the atmosphere 

above the station by using radar of a radio direction finder. [Note: the term is a contraction of “radio 

winds”]. 

relative humidity 

The ratio of the actual vapor pressure of the air to the saturation vapor pressure, usually expressed in 

percent. 

sounding 

Upper-air meteorological data gathered by sensors and transmitted to a ground receiver by the 

radiosonde carried aloft by a balloon.

sounding balloon 

A free, unmanned balloon carrying a radiosonde to sound the upper air. 

sound ranging (sound locating) 

The method of locating the source of a sound, such as that of a gum report or a shell burst, by 

calculations based on the intervals between the reception of the sound at various previously oriented 

microphone stations. 

spatial validity 

The space, or distance, from the location of the met section that is estimated or determined to be within 

the valid limitation of the MET sounding. 

standard ballistic density 

The density of the air as defined by the ICAO standard atmosphere; density of 100 percent. 

standard height 
Glossary 

Glossary-10 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.55 25 October 2007 

The height above surface to the top of a prescribed standard zone. 

station pressure 

Surface pressure at the observing station; the atmospheric pressure computed for the level of the 

station elevation. 

surface wind 

The wind speed and direction as measured at the surface with an anemometer. 

temperature element 

A thermistor which is a resistor that reacts to temperature changes. 

theodolite 

An optical instrument which consists of a sighting telescope and graduated scales to read angles of 

azimuth and elevation. 

thermistor temperature 

The temperature measured by the temperature element (thermistor) on a radiosonde. 

total lift 

The weight (grams) of the balloon with attachments that must be balanced by the gas volume in the 

inflated balloon for the balloon to rise at a desired rate of ascent. 

trajectory 

The path of a projectile in the earth’s atmosphere. 

true north 

The direction from any point on the earth’s surface toward the geographic north pole. 

virtual temperature 

In a system of moist air, the temperature of dry air having the same density and pressure as the moist 

air. The virtual temperature is always greater than the actual temperature. 

visual technique 

The determination of upper air conditions from PIBAL observations and the measurement of surface 

temperature, pressure, and relative humidity. 

weather forecast 

A prediction of expected weather conditions at a point, along a route, or within an area, for a given 

time or specific period of time in the future. 

weather information 

Information concerning the state of the atmosphere, mainly with respect to its effects on the military; 

data and information concerned with forecasts, summaries, and climatology. 

weighing off 
 Glossary 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 Glossary-11 

A balloon inflation procedure when using an inflation shelter which involves inflating the balloon with 

attached weights in the inflation shelter until it just lifts off the ground and remains suspended in air. 

weighting factor 

A factor used in weighting the effects of met conditions in each artillery zone. 

wet-bulb depression 

The difference in degrees between the dry-bulb temperature and the wet-bulb temperature. 

wet-bulb temperature 

The temperature measured by the wet bulb of a psychrometer; used to determine wet-bulb depression. 

wind chill 

That part of the total cooling of a body caused by air motion. 
This page intentionally left blank. 
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 References-1 

References 

SOURCES USED 

These are the sources quoted or paraphrased in this publication. 

AR 95-10, Department of Defense Notice to Airmen (NOTAM) System. 1 August 2004. 

AR 115-10, Weather Support for the U.S. Army. 30 June 1996. 

FM 1-02, Operational Terms and Graphics. 21 September 2004. 

FM 1-230, Meteorology for Army Aviators. 30 September 1982. 

FM 3-0, Operations. 14 June 2001. 

FM 3-09.12, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Target Acquisition. 21 June 

2002. 

FM 3-09.21, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Field Artillery Battalion. 22 March 2001. 

FM 5-0, Army Planning and Orders Production. 20 January 2005. 

FM 6-20, Fire Support in the Airland Battle. 17 May 1988. 

FM 6-20-10, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Targeting Process. 8 May 1996. 

FM 6-20-30, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Corps and Division 

Operations. 18 October 1989. 

FM 6-20-40, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Brigade Operations (Heavy). 

5 January 1990. 

FM 6-20-50, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Fire Support for Brigade Operations (Light). 

5 January 1990. 

FM 6-40, Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Field Artillery Manual Cannon Gunnery. 23 April 

1996. 

FM 6-99.2, U.S. Army Report and Message Formats. 30 April 2007. 

FM 11-50, Combat Communications within the Division (Heavy and Light). 4 April 1991. 

FM 21-10. Field Hygiene and Sanitation. 21 June 2000. 

FM 24-18, Tactical Single-Channel Radio Communications Techniques. 30 September 1987. 

FM 34-81, Weather Support for Army Tactical Operations. 31 August 1989. 

FM 71-100, Division Operations. 28 August 1996. 

FMH #1, Surface Weather Observations and Reports, December 1995. 

FMH #2, Surface Synoptic Codes, 1 December 1988. 

FMH #3, Rawinsonde and PIBAL Observations, November 1996. 

Operations Manual 79-95M01, 15 May 1995 

STANAG 4044, Adoption of a Standard Atmosphere. 10 April 1969. 

STANAG 4061, Adoption of a Standard Ballistic Meteorological Message. 3 October 2000. 

STANAG 4082, Adoption of a Standard Artillery Computer Meteorological Message. 28 May 1969. 

STANAG 4103, Format of Requests for Meteorological Messages for Ballistic and Special Purposes. 

28 May 2001. 

STANAG 4131, Adoption of a Standard Character-by-Character Meteorological Message Format. 17 

April 1990. 

STANAG 4140, Adoption of a Standard Target Acquisition Meteorological Message. 28 May 2001. 

STANAG 4168, Characteristics of Hydrogen Generating Equipment. 2 April 1985. 

TB 43-0134, Battery Disposition and Disposal. 1 October 1996.

TM 38-410, Storage and Handling of Hazardous Materials. 13 January 1999.
References 

References-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

DOCUMENTS NEEDED 

These documents must be available to the intended users of the publication. 

AR 700-68, Storage and Handling of Liquefied and Gaseous Compressed Gases and their Full and 

Empty Cylinders. 16 June 2000. 

DA Form 2404, Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet.

DA Form 2407, Maintenance Request. 

DA Form 3675-R, Ballistic Message (LRA).

DA Form 3676-R, Fallout Message (LRA).

DA Form 3677-R, Computer Met Message (LRA). 

DA Form 5033-R, Limited Surface Observation (LRA). 

FM 4-25.11, First Aid. 23 December 2002. 

FM 4-30.3, Maintenance Operations and Procedures. 28 July 2004. 

FM 6-16, Tables for Artillery Meteorology (Electronic) Ballistic Type 3 and Computer Messages, 

10 May 1979. 

FM 20-3, Camouflage, Concealment, and Decoys. 30 August 1999. 

STP 6-93F14-SM-TG, Soldier's Manual, Skill Levels 1/2/3/4 and Trainer's Guide, MOS 93F, Field 

Artillery Meteorological Crew Member. 2 March 1993. 

TB 9-6660-270-50, Calibration Procedures for Aneroid Barometers ML-102(), ML-332/TM, ML333/TM, and FA112150. 22 January 1986. 

TB 43-0129, Safety Requirements for Use of Antenna and Mast Equipment. 15 June 1986. 

TB 43-0134, Battery Disposition and Disposal. 1 October 1996. 

TB 385-4, Safety Requirements for Maintenance of Electrical and Electronic Equipment. 1 August 

1992. 

TM 5-1080-200-13&P, Operator's, Unit, and Direct Support Maintenance Manual (Including Repair 

Parts and Special Tools List) for Lightweight Camouflage Screen Systems and Support 

Systems. 29 January 1987. 

TM 9-2320-280-10, Operator’s Manual for Truck, Utility: Cargo/Troop Carrier, 1-1/4 ton, 4x4, M998 

(2320-01-107-7155) (EIC: BBD); M998A1 (2320-01-371-9577) (EIC: BBN); Truck, Utility: 

Cargo/Troop Carrier, 1-1/4 ton, 4x4, w/Winch, M1038 (2320-01-107-7156) (EIC: BBE); 

M1038A1 (2320-01-371-9578) (EIC: BBP); Truck, Utility: Heavy Variant, 4x4, M1097 

(2320-01-346-9317) (EIC: BBM); M1097A1 (2320-01-371-9583) (EIC: BBU); M1097A2 

(2320-01-380-8604) (EIC: BB6); M1123 (2320-01-445-9593) (EIC: B6G); Truck, Utility: 

Tow Carrier, Armored, 1-1/4 ton, 4x4, M966 (2320-01-107-7153) (EIC: BBC); M966A1 

(2320-01-372-3932) (EIC: BBX); M1121 (2320-01-956-1282) (EIC: B6H); Truck, Utility: 

Tow Carrier, Armored, 1-1/4 ton, 4x4, w/Winch, M1036 (2320-01-107-7154) (EIC: BBH); 

Truck, Utility: Tow Carrier, w/Supplemental Armor, 1-1/4 ton, 4x4, w/ Winch, M1045 (2320-

01-146-7191); M1045A1 (2320-01-371-9580) (EIC; BBR); M1045A2 (2320-01-380-

8229)EIC; BB5); Truck, Utility: Tow Carrier, w/Supplemental Armor, 1-1/4 ton, 4x4, 

w/Winch, M1046 (2320-01-146-7188; M1046A1 (2320-01-371-9582) (EIC: BBT); Truck, 

Utility: Armament Carrier, Armored, 1-1/4 ton, 4x4, M1025 (2320-01-128-9551) (EIC: 

BBF); M1025A1 (2320-01-371-9584) (EIC: BBV); M1025A2 (2320-01-380-8233) (EIC: 

BB3); Truck, Utility: Armament Carrier, Armored, 1-1/4 ton, 4x4, w/Winch, M1026 (2320-

01-128-9552) (EIC: BBG); M1026A1 (2320-01-371-9579) (EIC: BBQ); Truck, Utility: 

Armament Carrier, w/Supplemental Armor, 1-1/4 ton, 4x4, M1043 (2320-01-146-7190); 

M1043A1 (2320-01-372-3933) (EIC: BBY); M1043A2 (2320-01-380-8213) (EIC: BB4); 

Truck, Utility: Armament Carrier, w/Supplemental Armor, 1-1/4 ton, 4x4, w/Winch, M1044 

(2320-01-146-7189); M1044A1 (2320-01-371-9581) (EIC: BBS); Truck, Utility: S250 Shelter 

Carrier, 4x4, M1037 (2320-01-146-7193) (EIC: BBK); Truck, Utility: S250 Shelter Carrier, 

4x4, w/Winch, M1042 (2320-01-146-7187); Truck, Ambulance, 2-litter, Armored, 4x4, M996 

(2310-01-111-2275) (EIC: BBB); M996A1 (2310-01-372-3935) (EIC: BB2); Truck, 
 References 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.55 References-3 

Ambulance, 4-litter, Armored, 4x4, M997 (2310-01-111-2274) (EIC: BBA); M997A1 (2310-

01-372-3934) (EIC: BBZ); M997A2 (2310-01-380-8225) (EIC-BB8); Truck, Ambulance, 2-

litter, Soft Top, 4x4, M1035 (2310-01-146-7194): M1035A1 (2310-01-371-9585) (EIC: 

BBW); M1035A2 (2310-01-380-8290 (EIC: BB9), 31 January 1996. 

TM 9-2330-213-14&P, Operator’s, Unit, Direct Support, and General Support Maintenance Manual 

(Including Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists) for Trailer, Chassis: 1 1/2-ton, 2-Wheel, 

M103A1 (NSN 2330-00-835-8629), M103A3 (NSN 2330-00-141-8052); Trailer, Cargo: 1 

1/2-ton, 2-Wheel, M105A1 (NSN 2330-00-835-8631), M105A2 (NSN 2330-00-141-8050), 

M105A2C (NSN 2330-00-542-5689); Trailer, Tank, Water: 1 1/2-ton, 2-Wheel, 400-gallon, 

M107A1 (NSN 2330-00-835-8633), M107A2 NSN 2330-00-141-8049), M107A2C (NSN 

2330-00-542-5688); Trailer, Van, Shop: Folding Sides, 1 1/2-ton, 2-Wheel, M448 (NSN 

2300-00-631-5692). 9 October 1990. 

TM 9-6115-659-13&P, Operator, Unit, and Direct Support Maintenance Manual, (Including Repair 

Parts and Special Tools List) for Power Unit, Diesel Engine Driven, 1 Ton Trailer Mounted, 

5 kW, 60 Hz, PU 797 (NSN 6115-01-332-0741); Power Unit, Diesel Engine Driven, High 

Mobility Trailer Mounted, 5 kW, 60 Hz, PU 797A (NSN 6115-01-413-3820); Power Plant, 

Diesel Engine Driven, 1 Ton Trailer Mounted, 5 kW, 60 Hz, AN/MJQ-35 (NSN 6115-01-313-

4216); Power Plant, Diesel Engine Driven, High Mobility Trailer Mounted, 5kW, 60 Hz, 

AN/MJQ-35A (NSN 6115-01-414-9697); Power Plant, Diesel Engine Driven, 1 1⁄2 Ton 

Trailer Mounted, 5 kW, 60 Hz, AN/MJQ-36 (NSN 6115-01-313-4215). 1 June 2007. 

TM 11-427, Barometers, ML-102-B, ML-102-D, ML-102-E, ML-102-F, ML-102-G, and ML-316/TM. 

13 November 1944. 

TM 11-5805-201-12, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Telephone Sets, TA-312/PT (NSN 

5805-00-543-0012) and TA-312A/PT (NSN 5805-01-217-7310). 1 August 1990. 

TM 11-5820-401-10-1, Operator's Manual for Radio Sets AN/VRC-12 (NSN 5820-00-223-7412), 

AN/VRC-43 (5820-00-223-7415), AN/VRC-44 (5280-00-223-7417), AN/VRC-45 (5820-00-

223-7418), AN/VRC-46 (5280-00-223-7433), AN/VRC-47 (5820-00-223-7434), AN/VRC-48 

(5820-00-223-7435), and AN/VRC-49 (5820-00-223-7437); (Used Without Intercom 

Systems). 15 January 1986. 

TM 11-5820-401-10-2, Operator's Manual for Radio Sets AN/VRC-12 (NSN 5820-00-223-7412) 

(EIC: GCC), AN/VRC-43 (5820-00-223-7415) (EIC: GCD), AN/VRC-44 (5280-00-223-7417) 

(EIC: GCE), AN/VRC-45 (5820-00-223-7418) (EIC), AN/VRC-46 (5280-00-223-7433) (EIC: 

GCG), AN/VRC-47 (5820-00-223-7434) (EIC:GCH), AN/VRC-48 (5820-00-223-7435) 

(EIC:GCH), and AN/VRC-49 (5820-00-223-7437) (EIC: GCK); (Used Without Intercom 

Systems). 23 November 1982. 

TM 11-5820-477-12, Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual Radio Set Control Groups, 

AN/GRA-39 (NSN 5820-00-889-3860), AN/GRA-39A (5820-00-082-3998) and AN/GRA-39B 

(5820-00-949-9909). 10 July 1975. 

TM 11-5820-890-10-1, Operator’s Manual for SINCGARS Ground Combat Net Radio, ICOM; 

Manpack Radio; AN/PRC-119A (NSN 5820-01-267-9482) (EIC: L2Q); Short Range Vehiclar 

Radio, AN/VRC-87A (NSN 5820-01-267-9480) (EIC: L22); Short Range Vehicular Radio 

with Single Radio Mount, AN/VRC-87C (NSN 5820-01-304-2045) (EIC: GDC); Short Range 

Vehicular Radio with Dismount, AN/VRC-88A (NSN 5820-01-267-9481) (EIC: L23); Short 

Range Vehicular Radio with Dismount and Single Radio Mount, AN/VRC-88C (NSN 5820-

01-304-2044) (EIC: GDD); Short Range/Long Range Vehicular Radio, AN/VRC-89A (NSN 

5820-01-267-9479) (EIC: L24); Long Range Vehicular Radio, AN/VRC-90A (NSN 5820-01-

268-5105) (EIC: L25); Short Range/Long Range Vehicular radio with Dismount, AN/VRC91A (NSN 5820-01-267-9478) (EIC: L26); Long Range/Long Range Vehicular Radio, 

AN/VRC-91A (NSN 5820-01-267-9477) (EIC: L27). 1 September 1992. 

TM 11-6625-3052-14, Operator’s, Unit, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual 

for Digital Multimeter AN/PSM-45 (NSN 6625-01-139-2512). 10 January 1984. 
References 

References-4 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

TM 11-6660-205-14P, Operator’s, Organizational, Direct Support, and General Support 

Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List (Including Depot Maintenance Repair 

Parts and Special Tools) for Anemometers, ML-433/PM and ML-433A/PM (6660-00-663-

8090). 20 February 1978. 

TM 11-6660-218-12, Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Meteorological Station 

Manual AN/TMQ-4 (NSN 6660-00-537-9195). 25 May 1967. 

TM 11-6660-218-20P, Organizational Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tool Lists for 

Meteorological Station AN/TMQ-4 (NSN 6660-00-537-9195) and AN/TMQ-4A (666-01-164-

6757). 15 December 1988. 

TM 11-6660-283-13, Meteorological Measuring Set AN/TMQ-41 (NSN 6660-01-386-3906) (EIC: 

N/A). 1 September 1995. 

TM 750-5-3, Meteorological Equipment Data Sheets. 30 April 1973. 

TM 750-244-2, Procedures for Destruction of Electronics Materiel to Prevent Enemy Use (Electronics 

Command). 3 December 2007. 

METEOROLOGICAL MEASURING SET, AN/TMQ-41 

These additional documents must be available to intended users of this publication who are in met sections 

equipped with the MMS, AN/TMQ-41. 

TB 9-4120-400-24, Warranty Program for Air Conditioners, Horizontal, Compact, 9000 BTU/HR, 

Model F9000H1SA 115 Volts, Single Phase, 50/60 Hertz (NSN 4120-01-326-4370) and 

Model F9000H-3SA, 208 Volts, 3 Phase, 50/60 Hertz (NSN 4120-01-330-6542). 3 June 1992. 

TB 11-6660-283-25, Warranty Program for Meteorological Measuring Set AN/TMQ-41 (NSN 6660-

01-386-3906) (EIC: N/A). 1 February 1996. 

TM 5-6115-630-14&P, Operator’s, Unit, Direct Support, and General Support Maintenance Manual 

(Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Power Unit PU-751/M (NSN 6115-00-

033-1373) MEP-002A, 5 KW, 60 HZ Generator Set M116A1 2-Wheel, 2-Tire, Modified 

Trailer. 5 October 1989. 

TM 9-4120-400-14, Operator’s, Unit, Direct Support, and General Support Maintenance Manual for 

Air Conditioner Horizontal Compact 9,000 BTU/HR Model 9000H-1SA, 115 Volt, Single 

Phase, 50/60 Hertz (4120-01-326-4370) and Model F9000H-3SA, 208 Volts, 3 Phase, 50/60 

Hertz (4120-01-330-6542). 1 July 1992. 

TM 10-5411-224-14, Operator’s, Unit, Direct Support, and General Support Maintenance for 

Lightweight Multipurpose Shelters (LMS) Model No. S-788/G, Type I and Type III (NSN 

5411-01-357-3582) and (NSN 5411-01-357-3583). 15 December 1993. 

TM 11-5820-1118-12&P, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and 

Special Tools List for Grounding Kit, MK-2551A/U (NSN 5820-01-263-1760) (EIC: N/A). 1 

May 1994. 

TM 11-6625-3029-14, Operator’s, Organizational, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance 

Manual for Signal Generator, SG-1170/U (Wavetek Model 3001) (NSN 6625-01-120-

3501)(EIC: KNJ). 29 January 1993. 

TM 11-6625-3055-14, Operator’s, Organizational, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance 

Manual for Digital Multimeter, AN/USM-486/U (NSN 6625-01-145-2430). 30 July 1984. 

TM 11-6625-3165-14, Operator’s, Organizational Direct Support and General Support Maintenance 

Manual for Signal Generator SG-1207/U (Hewlett-Packard Model 8642M) (NSN 6625-01-

233-8615). 1 March 1987. 

TM 11-6625-3198-12, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Signal Generator SG-1288/G 

(NSN 6625-01-276-9421). 1 April 1989. 

TM 11-6625-3198-40, General Support Maintenance Manual for Signal Generator SG-1288/G (NSN 

6625-01-276-9421). 1 October,1989. 
 References 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.55 References-5 

TM 11-6625-3234-12, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Oscilloscope OS-288/G (NSN 

6625-01-272-8054). 15 June 1990. 

TM 11-6625-3250-12, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Spectrum Analyzer AN/USM489A (NSN 6625-01-259-1060). 1 January 1991. 

TM 11-6660-283-13, Operator's, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Meteorological 

Measuring Set AN/TMQ-41 (NSN 6660-01-386-3906) (EIC: N/A). 1 September 1995. 

TM 11-6660-284-23-1, Unit and Direct Support Manual for Antenna AS-4335/TMQ-41 (NSN 5985-

01-381-5668) (EIC: NA). 1 September 1995. 

TM 11-6660-284-23-2, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Antenna AS-4335/ TMQ-41 

(NSN 5985-01-381-5668) (EIC: N/A). 1 September 1995. 

TM 11-6660-286-10, Operator’s Manual for Receiving Set, Radiosonde AN/UMQ-16 (NSN 6660-01-

345-4092) (EIC: N/A) and Antenna AS-4335/TMQ-41 (5985-01-381-5668) (EIC: N/A). 

1 September 1995. 

TM 11-6660-286-23-1, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Receiving Set, Radiosonde, 

AN/UMQ-16 (NSN 6660-01-345-4092) (EIC: N/A). 1 September 1995. 

TM 11-6660-286-23-2, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Receiving Set, Radiosonde, 

AN/UMQ-16 (NSN 6660-01-345-4092) (EIC: N/A). 1 February 1996. 

TM 11-6660-286-23-3, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Receiving Set, Radiosonde, 

AN/UMQ-16 (NSN 6660-01-345-4092) (EIC: N/A). 1 February 1996. 

TM 11-7021-217-12&P, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and 

Special Tools List for Computer, Digital CP-2112. 1 February 1994. 

TM 11-7035-229-13, Operator’s, Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Printer, Ink Jet. 

1 February 1996. 

METEOROLOGICAL MEASURING SET-PROFILER, AN/TMQ-52 

These additional documents must be available to intended users of this publication who are in met sections 

equipped with the MMS, AN/TMQ-52. 

TM 3-4240-325-20&P, Unit Maintenance Manual (Including RPSTL) for Filter Unit, GasParticulate: 100 CFM, 120 V, 50, 60, and 400 Hz, M93 (NSN 4240-01-231-6515). 1 

September 1991. 

TM 9-2320-387-10, Operator's Manual for truck, Utility: S250 Shelter Carrier, 4X4, M1113 (NSN 

2320-01-412-0143) (EIC: B6B), Truck, Utility: Up-Armored Carrier, 4X4, M1114 (2320-01-

413-3739)(EIC: B6C); Truck, Utility: Expanded Capacity, Armament Carrier, M1151 (2320-

01-518-7330) (EIC: BA5); Truck, Utility: Expanded Capacity, Armament Carrier, IAP/Armor 

Ready, M1151A1 (2320-01-540-2038); Truck, Utility: Expanded Capacity, Enhanced, M1152 

(2320-01-518-7332) (EIC: BA6); Truck, Utility: Expanded Capacity, Enhanced, IAP/Armor 

Ready, M1152A1 (2320-01-540-2007); Truck, Utility: Command and Control/General 

Purpose Vehicle, M1165 (2320-01-540-1993); Truck, Utility: Command and 

Control/General Purpose Vehicle, IAP/Armor Ready, M1165A1 (2320-01-540-2017). 17 

October 1997. 

TM 9-6115-670-14&P, Operator’s, Unit, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual 

(Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for Auxiliary Power Unit 10 Kw, 120/240 

Vac, 60 Hz MODEL NO. MEP—903A (SICPS) (NSN 6115-01-431-3062) Model No. MEP903B (JTACS) (6115-01-431-3063) Model No. MEP-903C (WIN-T) (6115-01-458-5329) 

(EIC: N/A). 1 October 2002. 

TM 11-5411-218-13&P, Operator’s, Unit, and Direct Support Maintenance Manual (Including 

Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists) for Shelter, Non-Expendable S-832/G (NSN 5411-01-

436-3326) (EIC: N/A)AND S-832A/G (NSN 5411-01-494-8296) (EIC: N/A). 31 October 

2006. 

TM 11-5895-1546-12&P, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and 

Special Tools List for Communications Modem, TCIM Assembly MD-1298/U, P/N 50766 
References 

References-6 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

(NSN 5895-01-347-8723) (EIC: N/A) TCIM 1 Assembly, P/N 50787 (NSN 5895-01-411-4931) 

(EIC: N/A) TCIM 2 ASSEMBLY, P/N 52605 (NSN 5895-01-443-3457) (EIC: N/A). 1 June 

2000. 

TM 11-6660-293-12&P, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and 

Special Tools List for Meteorological Measuring Set Profiler AN/TMQ-52 (NSN 6660-01-

479-1962) (EIC: N/A). 15 September 2006. 

TM 11-6660-296-12&P, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual, Including Repair Parts and 

Special Tools List for Meteorological Station, Semiautomatic AN/TMQ-55 (NSN: 6660-01-

522-5141) (EIC: N/A). 15 November 2005. 

TM 11-7010-321-12&P, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual (Including Repair Parts and 

Special Tools Lists) for Tactical Command Systems Used in S-832/G Rigid Wall Shelter 

(RWS) Standardized Integrated Command Post System (SICPS). 15 January 2001. 

TM 11-7025-328-12&P, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and 

Special Tools List for Interface Unit, Automatic Data Processing CA-67/U (NSN 7025-01-

384-0292) (EIC: N/A) and Interface Unit, Automatic Data Processing Star Dynamic Model 

2936C (7025-01-348-0124) (EIC: N/A). 1 January 1996. 

Commercial Publications 

523-0778858, Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver PLGR II Precise Positioning Service (PPS). 

1 April 1998. 

Field Guide for the Tactical 1.0 Meter Very Small Aperture Terminal (T-VSAT) Antenna. 21 August, 

2000. 

LLP 2 HP User’s Guide. 2002. 

M210360en-A, MW22M Marwin III Sounding Processor Installation Manual. December 2002. 

M210372en-A, MMS–P System with MW22M Marwin III User’s Guide. December 2002. 

RECOMMENDED READINGS 

These readings contain relevant supplemental information 

American Meteorological Society, Glossary of Meteorology, AMS, Boston, MA, 1970. 

AR 25-400-2, The Army Records Information Management System (ARIMS). 10 February 2007. 

AR 380-40, Policy for Safeguarding and Controlling Communications Security (COMSEC) Material.

30 June 2000. 

ARTEP 6-102-MTP, Mission Training Plan for Corps Artillery, Division Artillery, and Field Artillery 

Brigade Command and Staff Group and Headquarters, and Headquarters Battery. 1 April 

2000. 

ARTEP 6-115-MTP, Mission Training Plan for Field Artillery Cannon Battalion Command and Staff 

Section, Headquarters and Headquarters Battery, and Service Battery. 1, April, 2000. 

DA Form 2028, Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms.
25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.55 Index-1 

Index 

A 

additional sources of 

meteorological information 

 allied nations, 2-1 

 U.S. Air Force, 2-1 

 U.S. Navy, 2-2 

 Marine Corps, 2-2 

 JAAWIN, 2-2 

air 

 circulation, 3-6 

 masses, 3-8 

 pressure, 3-6 

area observations, 4-4 

area of MET validity, 1-5, 4-2, 

4-3 

atmosphere 

 standard, 3-12 

 zone data collections tables, 

 3-14 

atmospheric pressure, 3-4 

authentication, A-2 

B 

ballistic 

 density, 3-14 

 temperature, 3-14 

 wind, 3-14 

ballistic MET message 

 body, A-21 

 identification line, A-19 

balloon 

 ascent rate of, 7-8 

 inflation of, 7-13 

 inflation and launching 7-15 

 device for, 7-11 

 launch of, 7-.16 

 pilot, 4-5 

 preparation of, 7-7 

 shroud, 7-17 

 sounding, 7-13 

 train, 7-14 

basic load, 8-2 

C 

capabilities, 1-2 

camouflage, 5-5, 6-4 

Celsius, 3-2 

circulation 

 air, 3-6 

 general, 3-7 

 secondary, 3-8 

cloud code, B-1 through B-5 

clouds 

 categories, 3-5 

 classification, 3-5 

 composition, 3-5 

 types, 3-5 

 

cold front, 3-9 

commander’s intent, 1-9 

common message processor, 

A-11 

communications 

 comm. line, A-1 

 equipment for, 5-2, 6-3 

 methods, 1-14 

 plans, 1-13 

computer MET message 

 body of, A-17 

 data line, A-17 

 identification line, A-15 

condensation, 3-5 

conduction, 3-2 

convection, 3-2 

Coriolis force, 3-8 

crew member 

 responsibilities, 5-7 through 

5-8, 6-6 through 6-7 

cumulus 3-5 

D 

DA forms 

 3675-R, 

 3676-R, 

 3677-R, 

 5033-R, 

date-time group, A-4 

defense, 

 MET in support of, 1-12 

degraded mode operations, 1-, 

4-4 

density 

 ballistic, 3-15 

 effect of, 3-16 

dissemination, 

 message, 1-5 

domains, 3-16 

E 

environmental considerations, 

H1 through H-9 

employment planning, 1-10 

F 

fallout MET message, A-37 

Fahrenheit (F), 3-2 

free lift, 7-8 

frontal passages, 1-9 

fronts, 3-9 

G 
Index 

Index-2 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 25 October 2007 

gases 

 inflation, 7-3 

GPS operations, 4-3, 4-4 

global positioning system, E-1 

grounding procedures, 7-2 

H 

hazardous material, H-2 

header (comm line), A-1 

helium gas, 7-4 

humidity, 3-3 

hydrogen 

 gas, 7-1, 7-4 

 

I 

inflation 

 nomograph, 7-11 

 shelter, 7-12 

 PIBAL, 4-5 

intelligence preparation of the 

battlefield (IPB), 1-11 

J 

JVMF messages, A-9 through 

A14 

K 

Kelvin (K), 3-2 

L 

launching reel, 7-17 

leapfrog technique, 1-11 

lift, 7-8 

limited surface observation, A40 through A-49 

logistic planning, 8-1 

long range aid to navigation 

(LORAN), 4-1, 4-4, F-1 

M 

maintenance concept, 8-3 

through 8-4 

mandatory pressure levels, A30 

material safety data sheet, H-3 

measuring set (AN/TMQ-41) 

 equipment, 5-1 through 5-4 

 load plans, 5-9 through 5-11 

 section personnel, 5-6 

 through 5-8 

 site operations, 5-3 through 

 5-5 

measuring set (AN/TMQ-52) 

 equipment, 6-1 through 6-3 

 load plans, 6-6 through 6-10 

 section personnel, 6-6 

 through 6-7 

 site operations, 6-4 through 

 6-6 

mesoscale modeling, 3-16 

through 3-18, 4-3 

message, 

 checking procedures, A-49 

 request procedures, C-1 

message, FATDS 

 identification number, A-4 

 priority, A2 

 segment, A-3 

 type, A-2 

messages, standard MET 

 ballistic MET, A-18 

 computer MET, A-14 

 fallout MET, A-37 

 sound ranging MET, A-26 

 target acquisition MET, A-23 

 target area MET 

 WMO MET, A-27 

Meteorology, 3-11 

met plan, 1-14, D1 through D2 

met section 

 capabilities, 1-2 

 leader, 1-2 

 mission of, 1-2 

METT-TC, 1-10 

Millibar, 3-4 

mission, 1-1 

mobile operations, 4-2 

moisture, 3-3 

movement, 1-11 

N 

navigational aid (NAVAID) 

 antenna subsystems, 5-1 

 concept, 4-1 

Naval Operational Global 

Atmospheric Prediction 

System (NOGAPS), 4-4 

nowcasts, 3-19 

O 

observations 

 area, 4-4 

 regional, 4-4 

 PIBAL, 4-5 through 4-7 

occluded front, 3-10 

octant, A-16 

offense 

 support in, 1-12 

operations, 1-12 

 degraded mode, 4-4 through 

4-5 

organizational maintenance, 8-

3 

P 

pilot balloon (PIBAL), 4-5 
 Index 

25 October 2007 FM 3-09.15/MCWP 3-16.5 Index-3 

plaintext message, A-7 

precipitation, 3-5 

pressure 

 gradient force, 3-8 

 mandatory levels, A-30 

 regulator, 7-7 

prevailing winds, 1-7 

preventive maintenance, 8-3 

Q 

Q code, A-38 

R 

radio direction finding (RDF) 

operations, 5-2 

radiosonde, 5-2, 6-3 

regulator, pressure, 7-7 

release, balloon 

 preparation for, 7-13 through 

7-15 

relative humidity, 3-3 

remote launch, 4-2 

resupply, 8-2 

S 

safety procedures, 7-1 

saturation point, 3-3 

section leader 

 duties, 5-7, 6-6 

security classification, A-3 

segments 

 message, A-3 

shroud balloon, 7-17 

software maintenance, 8-4 

sounding balloon, A-17 

smart munitions 

 MET effects on, 3-20 

standard atmosphere, 3-14 

standard MET messages 

 ballistic MET, A-7 

 computer MET, A-6 

 fallout MET, A-7 

 sound ranging MET, A-7, A26 

 target acquisition MET, A-7, 

A-23 

 target area MET 

 WMO MET, A-8, A-26 

stationary front, 3-11 

stockage levels, 8-2 

stratosphere, 3-2 

stratus, 3-5 

subscriber field, A-2, A-12 

supply channels, 8-2 

survey, 5-3. 6-4 

T 

target acquisition MET, 

 data line for, A-23 

 format of, A-23 through A-26 

 standard entries for, A-24 

through a-27 

target area MET, A-10 

temperature 

 ballistic, 3-14 

 effect of, 3-15 

 scales, 3-2 

theodolite, 4-5 

time zones, I-1 

total lift, 7-8 

transition periods, 1-8 

transmission 

 digital means, A-13 

 repeat number, A-2 

tropopause, 3-2 

troposphere, 3-2 

U 

unified post processing system 

(UPPS), 3-19 

V 

validity, 1-5, A-19 

vehicles, 5-1, 6-1 

very low frequency (VLF) 

system, 4-2 

virga, 3-5 

voice dissemination, 1-5 

warm front, 3-10 

water vapor, 3-3 

wind 

 ballistic, 3-14 

 effect of, 3-14 

 prevailing, 1-7 

world meteorological 

organization (WMO) format 

message 

 format, A-28 through A-37 

 heading, A-28 

Z 

Zone 

 atmospheric, 3-12 

 data collection table, 

 number code, A-25 
This page intentionally left blank. 














 PIBAL(Worksheet)

FM 3-09.15 

25 October 2007 

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

 

GEORGE W. CASEY, JR. 

 General, United States Army

 Chief of Staff

Official:

 

 JOYCE E. MORROW

Administrative Assistant to the 

 Secretary of the Army

 0727701 

DISTRIBUTION: 

Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: To be distributed in accordance with the 

initial distribution number 110767 required for FM 3-09.15 
PCN: 143 000032 00 PIN: 084403-000